DOC-20231030-WA0006.

SRM VALLIAMMAI ENGINEERING COLLEGE
(An Autonomous Institution)

SRM Nagar, Kattankulathur, Chengalpattu Dt.-603203, Tamil Nadu.
DEPARTMENT OF
COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
Under Graduate
CURRICULA AND SYLLABI
(REGULATIONS 2019)
Programme: B.E., Computer Science and Engineering

SRM Nagar, Kattankulathur, Chengalpattu Dt.-603203, Tamil Nadu.
DEPARTMENT OF
COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
UNDER GRADUATE
CURRICULA AND SYLLABI
(REGULATIONS 2019)
1
(An Autonomous Institution, Affiliated to Anna University, Chennai)

B.E. COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
REGULATIONS – 2019
1. PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs):
PEO1: To mould students to exhibit top performance in the higher education and research
and to become the State-of-the-art technocrat.
PEO2: To impart the necessary background in Computer Science and Engineering by

providing solid foundation in Mathematical, Science and Engineering fundamentals.
PEO3: To equip the students with the breadth of Computer Science and Engineering
innovate novel solutions for the benefit of common man.
PEO4: To groom the students to be multifaceted entrepreneurs with professional ethical

attitude in broader social perspective.
PEO5: To provide an ambience learning environment that is conducive for the growth of
successful professional career of students.
2. PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs):

After going through the four years of study, our Computer Science and Engineering
Graduates will exhibit ability to:
PO# Graduate Attribute Programme Outcome
Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science,
1 Engineering knowledge engineering fundamentals, and an engineering
specialisation for the solution of complex engineering
Problems.
Identify, formulate, research literature, and analyse
2 Problem analysis Complex engineering problems reaching substantiated
conclusions using first principles of mathematics, natural
sciences, and engineering sciences.
Design solutions for complex engineering problems and
Design/development of design system components or processes that meet the
3 specified needs with appropriate consideration for
solutions
public health and safety, and cultural, societal, and
environmental considerations.
Use research-based knowledge and research Methods
Conduct investigations of including design of experiments, analysis and
4
complex problems interpretation of data, and synthesis of the information
to provide valid conclusions
Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques,
resources, and modern engineering and IT tools,
5 Modern tool usage including prediction and modelling to complex
engineering activities, with an understanding of the
Limitations.
2
Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge
to assess societal, health, safety, legal, And cultural issues
6 The engineer and society and the consequent responsibilities relevant to the
professional engineering practice
Understand the impact of the professional engineering
Environment and solutions in societal and environmental contexts, and
7 sustainability demonstrate the knowledge of, and Need for sustainable
development.
Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics
8 Ethics and responsibilities and norms of the engineering
practice
Function effectively as an individual, and as a member
9 Individual and team work or leader in diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary
settings
Communicate effectively on complex engineering
activities with the engineering community and with the
society at large, such as, being able to comprehend
10 Communication
and write effective reports and design documentation,
make effective presentations, and give and receive clear
instructions
Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the
Project management and engineering and management principles and apply these
11
finance to one’s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to
manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments
Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and
12 Life-long learning ability to engage in independent and life-long learning
in the broadest context of technological change
3. PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs):
PSO1: Exhibit proficiency in planning, implementing and evaluating team oriented-software
Programming solutions to specific business problems and society needs.
PSO2: Demonstrate professional skills in applying programming skills, competency and
decision making capability through hands-on experiences.
PSO3: Apply logical thinking in analyzing complex real world problems, and use professional
and ethical behaviors to provide proper solutions to those problems.
PSO4: Demonstrate the ability to work effectively as part of a team in applying technology to
business and personal situations.
4. PEOs / POs and PSOs Mapping:

The given below is the relational table between the programme educational objective
mapped along with program outcome and program specific outcome.
PROGRAM SPECIFIC
PROGRAMME
PROGRAMME OUTCOMES OUTCOMES
EDUCATIONAL
OBJECTIVES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
I    
II     
III     
IV      
V    
3
B.E. COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING SEMESTER COURSE WISE PO MAPPING
Year SEM SUBJECT PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
Communicative English 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 - - 3 - 1 1 1 1
Engineering Mathematics - I 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 - - - -
Engineering Physics 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 - - - - 1 - - 1 -
Engineering Chemistry 3 2 3 1 2 2 2 - 1 1 - 2 1 1 1 2
I I
Programming in C 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 - 2 - 1 1 3 1 2 3
Engineering Graphics 2 - 3 - - - - - 1 3 - 1 2 1 1 1
Physics and Chemistry
3 1 1 1 - 1 2 1 1 - - 1 2 3 2 1
Laboratory
C Programming Laboratory 3 2 3 2 2 2 - 3 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 2
Technical English 3 2 2 2 - - - - - 3 2 1 1 1 1 2
Engineering Mathematics - II 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - - - 1 - - -
Physics for Information
3 2 2 - 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 2 -
Science
Environmental Science and
1 1 3 - - 2 3 - 3 - - 1 1 1 1 1
Engineering
Problem Solving and Python
3 2 3 2 2 2 1 - - 2 2 2 2 2 2 3
Programming
I II Basic Civil and Mechanical
3 2 2 1 - 1 1 1 - - - 1 2 1 1 2
Engineering
Problem Solving and Python
3 2 2 1 2 2 - 1 - - 2 3 2 3 2 3
Programming Laboratory
Engineering Practice
3 2 2 2 2 1 - - 1 - 1 1 3 2 2 2
Laboratory
Applied Physics and
Environmental chemistry 3 2 2 2 - 2 3 1 1 - - 2 1 1 1 1
Laboratory
NSS/NCC/YRC/NSO - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
4
Year SEM SUBJECT PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
Discrete Mathematics 3 3 2 - - - - - 1 - - 1 - - - -
Programming & Data
3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - 2 3 3 -
Structures in C
Object Oriented Programming 2 3 3 2 3 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 -
Digital Fundamentals and
3 2 2 2 2 1 1 - - 2 2 3 2 2 3 2
Communication
II III Software Engineering 2 2 3 3 - 2 - - - 2 3 2 2 2 2 1
Operating Systems 2 2 2 1 2 1 - - - - - - 1 1 2 3
Data Structures in C
2 3 3 - - - - 2 3 3 - 3 3 3 3 2
Laboratory
Object Oriented Programming
2 3 3 2 2 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 -
Laboratory
Operating Systems Laboratory 2 1 2 1 - - - - 1 - 2 - 2 2 1 -
Probability and Queuing
3 3 3 - - - - - 1 1 - 1 - - - -
Theory
Computer Architecture 3 3 3 2 3 - - - - - - - 2 3 3 -
Database Management
3 2 2 2 2 1 1 - 2 - 1 - 2 2 2 1
System
Design and Analysis of
2 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - 2 - - 2 3 -
Algorithm
Object Oriented Analysis and
II IV 1 2 3 3 2 3 3 - - 2 - 1 1 1 1 -
Design
Professional Ethics - - - - - 3 3 2 - - - - 1 - 1 -
Database Management
3 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 3 3 3 3
System Laboratory
Object Oriented Analysis and
2 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3 2
Design Laboratory
Communication Skills
3 3 3 2 2 - 2 - - 3 - 1 2 - 1 1
Laboratory- Project Based
5
YEAR SEM SUBJECT PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
Computer Networks 3 2 2 - 3 - 3 - - - 2 - 2 3 3 -
Automata Theory 3 2 3 2 2 2 - - - 2 2 2 3 2 3 3
Web Technology 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 - 2 1 3 2 2 2
III V Data Warehousing and Data
2 - 2 2 - 1 2 - - - - - 2 1 1 2
Mining
Open Elective -I
Web Technology Laboratory 2 2 3 3 3 3 - 1 - - 2 1 2 2 2 2
Networks Laboratory 2 3 2 - 3 - - - - - 3 - 2 2 2 -
Mobile Computing 3 3 2 2 2 1 - 2 2 - 2 3 2 2 2 1
Compiler Design 3 2 3 2 2 2 - - - 2 2 2 3 2 3 3
Software Testing 3 - 3 2 2 2 - 3 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 2
Grid and Cloud Computing 2 3 3 2 3 - - - - - - - 2 3 3 -
Professional Elective - I
III VI
Mobile Application
3 2 2 2 3 2 - 1 - 2 1 - 2 2 3 1
Development Laboratory
Compiler Design Laboratory 2 - 2 2 2 1 2 - - 2 - - 2 1 1 2
Professional Communication 3 2 2 3 2 - 3 - - 3 - 1 2 2 2 2
Mini Project 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
6
YEAR SEM SUBJECT PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4
Cryptography and Network
2 2 2 2 2 - 1 - - 1 2 2 2 2 1 1
Security
Artificial Intelligence 2 1 2 2 3 3 - - - - - - 2 2 - 2
Open Elective - II
Professional Elective - II
IV VII
Professional Elective - III
Security Laboratory 3 - 3 - 3 2 - - - 2 2 - 3 3 3 2
Artificial Intelligence Laboratory 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 - - - - 2 2 2 -
Project Work - Phase - I 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Professional Elective V
IV VIII Professional Elective VI
Project Work - Phase II 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Contribution 1: Reasonable 2: Significant 3: Strong
7
Approved by AICTE & Affiliated to Anna University, Chennai, ‘A’ Grade Accreditation by NAAC,
NBA Accredited, ISO 9001:2015 Certified
REGULATIONS - 2019
B.E. COMPUTER SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
I TO VIII SEMESTER CURRICULUM AND SYLLABI
SEMESTER I
Sl. COURSE CONTACT
COURSE TITLE CATEGORY L T P C
No CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. 1919101 Communicative English HS 3 3 0 0 3
2. 1918102 Engineering Mathematics-I BS 4 3 1 0 4

3. 1920103 Engineering Physics BS 3 3 0 0 3
4. 1921104 Engineering Chemistry BS 3 3 0 0 3
5. 1901006 Programming in C ES 3 3 0 0 3
6. 1901007 Engineering Graphics ES 6 2 0 4 4
PRACTICAL
Physics and Chemistry
7. 1901108 BS 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
8. 1901010 C Programming Laboratory ES 4 0 0 4 2
TOTAL 30 17 1 12 24
SEMESTER II
Sl. COURSE CONTACT
No CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. 1919201 Technical English HS 3 3 0 0 3
2. 1918202 Engineering Mathematics-II BS 4 3 1 0 4
Physics for Information
3. 1920202 BS 3 3 0 0 3
Science
Environmental Science
4. 1921203 BS 3 3 0 0 3
and Engineering
Problem Solving and
5. 1901005 ES 3 3 0 0 3
Python Programming
Basic Civil and Mechanical
6. 1901008 ES 3 3 0 0 3
Engineering
PRACTICAL
Problem Solving and
7. 1901009 Python Programming ES 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
Engineering Practices
8. 1901208 ES 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
8
Applied Physics and
9. 1901209 Environmental Chemistry BS 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
10. 1901200 NSS/NCC/YRC/NSO PCD 2* 0 0 2 1
* Conduction after College Hours TOTAL 33 18 1 14 26
SEMESTER – III
SL. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C

No CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. 1918302 Discrete Mathematics BS 4 3 1 0 4
Programming & Data
2. 1904301 PC 3 3 0 0 3
Structures in C
Object Oriented
3. 1904302 PC 3 3 0 0 3
Programming
Digital Fundamentals and
4 1906306 PC 3 3 0 0 3
Communication
5 1908503 Software Engineering PC 3 3 0 0 3
6 1904304 Operating Systems PC 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
Data Structures in C
7 1904305 PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
Object Oriented
8 1904306 PC 4 0 0 4 2
Programming Laboratory
Operating Systems
9 1904307 PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
TOTAL 31 18 1 12 25
SEMESTER – IV
SL. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C

No CODE PERIODS
THEORY
Probability and Queuing
1. 1918402 BS 4 3 1 0 4
Theory
2. 1908006 Computer Architecture PC 3 3 0 0 3
Database Management
3. 1904001 PC 3 3 0 0 3
System
Design and Analysis of
4. 1904402 PC 3 3 0 0 3
Algorithm
Object Oriented Analysis
5. 1908008 PC 3 3 0 0 3
and Design
6. 1915001 Professional Ethics HS 3 3 0 0 3
9
PRACTICAL
Database Management
7. 1904002 PC 4 0 0 4 2
System Laboratory
Object Oriented Analysisand
8. 1904405 PC 4 0 0 4 2
Design Laboratory
Communication Skills
9. 1919001 EEC 2 0 0 2 -
Laboratory- Project Based
TOTAL 29 18 1 10 23
SEMESTER – V
SL. COURSE CONTACT
No CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. 1904003 Computer Networks PC 3 3 0 0 3
2. 1904502 Automata Theory PC 4 3 1 0 4
3. 1908501 Web Technology PC 3 3 0 0 3
Data Warehousing and Data
4. 1908507 PC 3 3 0 0 3
Mining
5. 19xxxxx Open Elective -I OE 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
6. 1908510 Web Technology Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
7. 1904512 Networks Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
TOTAL 24 15 1 8 20
SEMESTER – VI
SL. COURSE CONTACT
No CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1 1904601 Mobile Computing PC 3 3 0 0 3
2 1904602 Compiler Design PC 3 3 0 0 3
3 1908014 Software Testing PC 3 3 0 0 3
4 1904603 Grid and Cloud Computing PC 3 3 0 0 3
5 19xxxxx Professional Elective - I PE 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
Mobile Application
6 1904610 PC 4 0 0 4 2
Development Laboratory
Compiler Design
7 1904611 PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
Professional
8 1919002 EEC 2 0 0 2 1
Communication
9 1904612 Mini Project EEC 4 0 0 4 2
TOTAL 29 15 0 14 22
10
SEMESTER – VII
SL. COURSE CONTACT

NO CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. Cryptography and Network PC 3 3 0 0 3

1904005
Security
2. 1904006 Artificial Intelligence PC 3 3 0 0 3
3. 19xxxxx Open Elective - II OE 3 3 0 0 3
4. 19xxxxx Professional Elective - II PE 3 3 0 0 3
5. PE 3 3 0 0 3
19xxxxx Professional Elective - III
PRACTICAL
6. 1904008 Security Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2
7. 1904009 Artificial Intelligence PC 4 0 0 4 2
Laboratory
8. 1904715 Project Work - Phase I EEC 4 0 0 4 2
9. 1904716 Internship EEC - 0 0 0 1
TOTAL 27 15 0 12 22
SEMESTER – VIII
SL. COURSE CONTACT

NO CODE PERIODS
THEORY
1. 19xxxxx Professional Elective – IV PE 3 3 0 0 3

2. 19xxxxx Professional Elective – V PE 3 3 0 0 3
PRACTICAL
3. 1904805 Project Work - Phase II EEC 12 0 0 12 6
TOTAL 18 6 0 12 12
11
SEMESTER VI
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – I
SL. COURSE CONTACT

NO CODE PERIODS
Natural Language
1. 1904004 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Processing
Security Governance Risk
2. 1904605 PE 3 3 0 0 3
and Compliance
3. 1904606 Intellectual Property Rights PE 3 3 0 0 3
4. 1904607 Data Science PE 3 3 0 0 3
5. 1915002 Principles of Management PE 3 3 0 0 3
SEMESTER VII
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – II
SL. COURSE CONTACT

NO CODE PERIODS
Software Project
1. 1908702 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Management
2. 1904011 Big Data Analytics PE 3 3 0 0 3
Introduction to Machine
3. 1904706 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Learning and Algorithms
Neural Networks & Fuzzy
4. 1904707 PE 3 3 0 0 3
logic
5. 1904708 Internet of Things PE 3 3 0 0 3
SEMESTER VII
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – III
SL. COURSE CONTACT

NO CODE PERIODS
Cyber Security &
1. 1904709 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Forensics
Agile Software
2. 1904710 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Development
3. 1904711 Ethical Hacking PE 3 3 0 0 3
Wireless Adhoc & Sensor
4. 1908707 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Networks
5. 1915003 Total Quality Management PE 3 3 0 0 3
12
SEMESTER VIII
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – IV
SL. COURSE CONTACT

NO CODE PERIODS
1. 1904801 Deep Learning PE 3 3 0 0 3
GPU Architecture &
2. 1904802 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Programming
3. 1908012 Social Network Analysis PE 3 3 0 0 3
Computer Graphics and
4. 1908010 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Multimedia
SEMESTER – VIII
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – V
SL. COURSE CONTACT

NO CODE PERIODS
1. 1904803 Green Computing PE 3 3 0 0 3
Human Computer
2. 1904804 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Interaction
Service Oriented
3. 1908803 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Architecture
Information Storage and
4. 1908009 PE 3 3 0 0 3
Management
5. 1908807 Block Chain PE 3 3 0 0 3
13
OPEN ELECTIVE – I (V SEMESTER)
Sl. COURSE COURSE CONTACT

No CODE COURSE TITLE OFFERING HOURS L T P C
DEPARTMENT
1. 1902512 Environment and Agriculture AGRI 3 3 0 0 3
Production Technology of AGRI 3 3 0 0 3
2. 1902513
Agriculture Machinery
Air Pollution and Control CIVIL 3 3 0 0 3
3. 1903514
Engineering
Participatory Water CIVIL 3 3 0 0 3
4. 1903515
Resources Management
Energy Conservation and EEE 3 3 0 0 3
5. 1905001
Management
6. 1905508 Renewable Energy Sources EEE 3 3 0 0 3
SCADA System EEE 3 3 0 0 3
7. 1905509
Management
8. 1906507 Entertaintronics ECE 3 3 0 0 3
9. 1906505 Photonic Networks ECE 3 3 0 0 3

Telecommunication Network ECE 3 3 0 0 3
10. 1906506
Management
11. 1907503 Sensors and Transducers EIE 3 3 0 0 3
Instrumentation in EIE 3 3 0 0 3
12. 1907504
Biomedical Engineering
13. 1908001 3D Printing and Design IT 3 3 0 0 3
14. 1908002 Scripting Languages IT 3 3 0 0 3

Product Design and MECH 3 3 0 0 3
15. 1909510
Development
16. 1909511 Vibration and Noise Control MECH 3 3 0 0 3
17. 1909512 Industrial Safety Engineering MECH 3 3 0 0 3

Principles of Food MEDICAL 3 3 0 0 3
18. 1910504
Preservation ELECTRONICS
19. 1920501 Nanotechnology PHYSICS 3 3 0 0 3
20. 1920502 Microscopy PHYSICS 3 3 0 0 3

Advanced Engineering CHEMISTRY 3 3 0 0 3
21. 1921501
Chemistry
22. 1921502 Industrial Nanotechnology CHEMISTRY 3 3 0 0 3
14
OPEN ELECTIVE – II (VII SEMESTER)
Sl.No COURSE COURSE CONTACT

CODE COURSE TITLE OFFERING HOURS L T P C
DEPARTMENT
1. 1903706 Green Building Design CIVIL 3 3 0 0 3

Environmental and social CIVIL 3 3 0 0 3
2. 1903716
impact assessment
3. 1905711 Electrical Circuits EEE 3 3 0 0 3
4. 1905712 Renewable Energy systems EEE 3 3 0 0 3

Electric vehicles and power EEE 3 3 0 0 3
5. 1905713
management
6. 1906705 Acoustics ECE 3 3 0 0 3
7. 1906706 Visual Communication ECE 3 3 0 0 3
8. 1906707 MEMS and NEMS ECE 3 3 0 0 3
9. 1907001 Transducers Engineering EIE 3 3 0 0 3

Process Modeling and EIE 3 3 0 0 3
10. 1907003
Simulation
State Variable Analysis and EIE 3 3 0 0 3
11. 1907708
Design
12. 1908003 Software Quality Management IT 3 3 0 0 3
13. 1908004 C # and . Net IT 3 3 0 0 3
14. 1908005 Virtual Reality IT 3 3 0 0 3
15. 1909718 Robotics MECH 3 3 0 0 3
16. 1909719 Testing of Materials MECH 3 3 0 0 3
17. 1909720 Design of Electrical Vehicles MECH 3 3 0 0 3

MEDICAL 3 3 0 0 3
18. 1910703 Clinical Trials
ELECTRONICS
Regulatory requirements in MEDICAL 3 3 0 0 3
19. 1910704
Pharmaceutical Industries ELECTRONICS
MEDICAL 3 3 0 0 3
20. 1910705 Microbiology
ELECTRONICS
Analytical Methods and PHYSICS 3 3 0 0 3
21. 1920701
Instrumentation
22. 1920702 Medical Physics PHYSICS 3 3 0 0 3
23. 1920703 Electronic materials PHYSICS 3 3 0 0 3
24. 1921701 Waste Water Treatment CHEMISTRY 3 3 0 0 3
15
PERSONALITY AND CHARACTER DEVELOPMENT (PCD)
Sl. No COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C
CODE
PERIODS
1 1901200 NSS/NCC/YRC/NSO PCD 2 0 0 2 1
SUMMARY
SUBJECT CREDITS AS PER SEMESTER CREDITS Percentage

S.NO.
AREA I II III IV V VI VII VIII TOTAL
1. HS 3 3 3 9 5.17%
2. BS 12 12 4 4 32 18. 39%
3. ES 9 10 19 10.92%
4. PC 21 16 17 16 10 80 45.97%
5. PCD 1 1 0.57%
6. PE 3 6 6 15 8.62%
7. OE 3 3 6 3.44%
8. EEC 3 3 6 12 6.89%
Total 24 26 25 23 20 22 22 12 174 100%
Non-Credit / Mandatory ✓
16
SEMESTER I
1919101 COMMUNICATIVE ENGLISH LTPC

(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.Tech. Programmes) 3003
OBJECTIVES:
 To develop the basic reading and writing skills of first year engineering and technology students.
 To help learners develop their listening skills, which will, enable them listen to lectures and
comprehend them by asking questions seeking clarification.
 Comprehend content - asking questions; seeking clarifications.
 To help learners develop their speaking skills and speak fluently in real contexts.
 To help learners develop vocabulary of a general kind by developing their reading skills
UNIT- I: SHARING INFORMATION RELATED TO ONESELF/FAMILY& 9

FRIENDS
Reading– short comprehension passages, practice in skimming-scanning and predicting- Writing– Blog/film
review/quora/Twitter/Facebook– developing hints. Listening– short texts- short formal and informal
conversations. Speaking- introducing oneself – exchanging personal information- Language development–
Wh- Questions- asking and answering-yes or no questions- parts of speech. Vocabulary development-–
prefixes- suffixes – word formation: making sentences of your own.
UNIT-II: GENERAL READING AND FREE 9

WRITING
Reading – Story with questions and answers- Writing – paragraph writing- topic sentence- main ideas- free
writing, short narrative descriptions using some suggested vocabulary and structures –Listening– Listening
to a speech – answering questions. Speaking – Presentation with PPT - Language development –
prepositions, Vocabulary development- guessing meanings of words in contexts – articles.
UNIT- III: GRAMMAR AND LANGUAGE DEVELOPMENT 9
Reading– short texts (close reading) Writing- understanding text structure- use of reference words and
discourse markers-coherence-jumbled sentences Listening –listening to stories to answer
questions. Speaking– asking about routine actions and expressing opinions. Language development–
Adjectives, degrees of comparison- conjunctions and connectives - Vocabulary development – single word
substitutes- adverbs.
UNIT- IV: READING AND LANGUAGE DEVELOPMENT 9
Reading- Newspaper articles- answering questions Writing– letter writing, informal or personal letters-
congratulating/ thanking/requesting help/ e-mails-forward a mail to Staff on given topic- Listening– listen to
different sounds and differentiate the sounds with different words. Speaking- speaking about oneself-
speaking about one‘s friend- Language development- Modals -Tenses - Vocabulary development–
synonyms-antonyms- phrasal verbs.
17
UNIT- V: EXTENDED WRITING 9
Reading- longer texts- close reading –Writing– brainstorming -writing short essays – developing an outline-
identifying main and subordinate ideas- dialogue writing-Listening – listening to talks- Note taking- Speaking
– participating in conversations- short group conversations-Language development- correction of
errors- Vocabulary development-collocations- fixed and semi-fixed expressions.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, learners will be able to:
 Read articles of a general kind in magazines and newspapers
 Participate effectively in informal conversations.
 Introduce themselves and their friends and express opinions in English.
 Comprehend conversations and short talks delivered in English
 Write short essays of a general kind and personal letters and emails in English.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Board of Editors. Using English A Course book for Under graduate Engineers and
Technologists. Orient Black Swan Limited, Hyderabad: 2015
2. Richards, C. Jack. Interchange Students’ Book-2 New Delhi: CUP, 2015.

REFERENCES:
1. Bailey, Stephen. Academic Writing: A practical guide for students. New York: Rutledge, 2011.
2. Means,L. Thomas and Elaine Langlois. English & Communication For Colleges.
Cengage Learning ,USA: 2007
3. Redston, Chris &Gillies Cunningham Face2Face (Pre-intermediate Student‘s Book& Workbook)
Cambridge University Press, New Delhi: 2005
4. Comfort, Jeremy, et al. Speaking Effectively: Developing Speaking Skills for Business English.
Cambridge University Press, Cambridge: Reprint 2011
5. Dutt P. Kiranmai and Rajeevan Geeta. Basic Communication Skills, Foundation Books: 2013.
6. Preliminary English Test – Cambridge University Press ESOL
7. Key English Test - Cambridge University Press ESOL.
8. Pronunciation Dictionary - Daniel Jones.
18
CO – PO and PSO MAPPING:
Program Specific
Course PROGRAM OUTCOMES
Outcomes(PSO)
Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO1 3 3 2 3 3 - - - - 3 - 1 2 2 2 2
CO2 3 2 3 2 2 - 2 - - 3 - 1 2 2 1 1
CO3 3 3 - 2 - - - - - 3 - 1 1 1 1 1
CO4 3 3 - - - - 3 - - 3 - 1 2 2 1 2
CO5 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 - - 3 - 1 2 2 2 2
19
1918102 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS - I L T P C
3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
 To understand and apply matrix techniques for engineering applications.
 To familiarize the student with basic calculus and traditions of traditional calculus.
 To solve the problems in single and multivariable calculus and plays an important role in
science, economics, engineering.
 To acquaint the student with mathematical tools needed in evaluating integrals.
 To familiarize the student with multiple integrals and their usage in find the area and
volume of two and three dimensional objects.
UNIT - I : MATRICES 9L+3T
System of equations – consistency and inconsistency- Eigen values and Eigen vectors of a real
matrix - Characteristic equation - Properties of Eigen values and Eigen vectors - Statement and
Applications of Cayley-Hamilton Theorem - Reduction of a quadratic form into canonical form by
orthogonal transformation.
UNIT – II : DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS FOR FUNCTIONS OF ONE VARIABLE 9L+3T
Limit of a function - Continuity – Differentiability - Differentiation rules – Rolle’s theorem and Mean
Value theorem – Taylor’s series- Maxima and Minima of functions of one variable.
UNIT – III : FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 9L+3T
Partial derivatives - Total derivatives - Jacobians and properties - Taylor’s series for functions of
two variables - Maxima and Minima of functions of two variables - Lagrange’s method of
undetermined multipliers.
UNIT – IV : INTEGRAL CALCULUS FOR FUNCTION OF ONE VARIABLE 9L+3T
Definite and Indefinite integrals - Substitution rule - Techniques of Integration - Integration by

parts, Trigonometric integrals, Trigonometric substitutions, Integration by partial fractions-
Improper integrals
UNIT – V : MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 9L+3T
Double integrals in Cartesian and polar coordinates - Change of order of integration - Area
enclosed by plane curves - Change of variables in double integrals (Polar coordinates) - Triple
integrals - Volume of solids.
TOTAL: 45L+15T PERIODS
20
OUTCOMES:
 To apply the idea of reducing complex problems into simple form using matrix technique.
 Basic application of calculus in engineering problems and to tackle for different
geometries.
 This course equips the students to have basic knowledge and understanding of
fundamental statistics to analyze and interpret data.
 To apply Integration by parts, Trigonometric integrals, Trigonometric substitutions,
Integration by partial fractions in Engineering Problems.
 Basic application of Double and Triple integrals used in Engineering real life problems
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Grewal. B.S, "Higher Engineering Mathematics”, 41st Edition, Khanna Publications, Delhi,
2011.
2. Veerarajan. T, “Engineering Mathematics”, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private Limited,
2019.
3. Gupta S.C and Kapoor V.K, “Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics”, S.Chand Private
Ltd., 11th Edition, 2005.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Kreyszig Erwin, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", John Wiley and Sons, 10thEdition,
New Delhi, 2016
2. Ramana B.V, "Higher Engineering Mathematics", Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company,
New Delhi, 2008.
3. James Stewart, "Calculus: Early Transcendentals", Cengage Learning, 7th Edition, New
Delhi, 2015. [For Units I & III - Sections 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.5, 2.7 (Tangents problems only),
2.8, 3.1 to 3.6, 3.11, 4.1, 4.3, 5.1 (Area problems only), 5.2, 5.3, 5.4 (excluding net change
theorem), 5.5, 7.1 - 7.4 and 7.8].

Program
Course Programme Outcomes (PO) Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
(PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 - - - -
CO 2 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 - - - -
CO 3 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 - - - -
CO 4 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 - - - -
CO 5 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 - - - -
21
1920103 ENGINEERING PHYSICS L T PC
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.Tech. 3 0 0 3
Programmes)
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the stress, strain and the concept of Hooke's law for the modulus
of elasticity values .
 To facilitate the knowledge about basics of laser, optical fiber sources and
transmission techniques.
 To enrich the idea of transfer and measurement of heat and uses of heat exchangers.
 To explore the basics of quantum theory and atomic and subatomic particles.
 To enhance the fundamental knowledge crystal Physics and its applications.
UNIT - I : PROPERTIES OF MATTER 9

Elasticity – Hooke’s law-Stress-strain diagram and its uses –Poisson ratio-factors affecting
elastic modulus and tensile strength – twisting couple - torsion pendulum: theory and
experiment (regular body) - bending of beams - bending moment – cantilever: theory and
experiment – uniform and non-uniform bending: theory and experiment - I-shaped girders.
UNIT – II : LASERS AND FIBER OPTICS 9

Lasers: population of energy levels, Einstein’s A and B coefficients derivation – resonant
cavity, optical amplification (qualitative) – Nd-YAG laser-Semiconductor lasers:
homojunction and heterojunction – Applications. Fiber optics: principle, numerical aperture
and acceptance angle - types of optical fibres (material, refractive index, and mode) –
losses associated with optical fibers–Fiber optic communication- fibre optic sensors:
pressure and displacement- Endoscope.
UNIT – III : THERMAL PHYSICS 9

Transfer of heat energy – thermal conduction, convection and radiation – Newton’s law
cooling (qualitative) -heat conductions in solids – thermal conductivity - Forbe’s and Lee’s
disc method: theory and experiment - conduction through compound media (series and
parallel) – thermal insulation – applications: heat exchangers, refrigerators, ovens and
solar water heaters.
UNIT – IV : QUANTUM PHYSICS 9

Black body radiation – Planck’s theory (derivation)- deduction of Wien’s and Rayleigh
jeans law – Compton effect: theory and experimental verification – wave particle duality –
electron diffraction – concept of wave function and its physical significance – Schrödinger’s
wave equation – time independent and time dependent equations – particle in a one-
dimensional - three dimensional potential box– tunnelling (qualitative) - scanning
tunnelling microscope.
22
UNIT – V : CRYSTAL PHYSICS 9
Single crystalline, polycrystalline and amorphous materials – single crystals: unit cell,
crystal systems, Bravais lattices, directions and planes in a crystal, Miller indices – inter-
planar distances- coordination number and packing factor for SC, BCC, FCC, HCP and
diamond structure (qualitative) - crystal imperfections: point defects, line defects – Burger
vectors, stacking faults – growth of single crystals: solution and melt growth techniques -
Importance of crystal physics.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to
 The students will gain knowledge on the basics of properties of matter and its
applications,
 The students will acquire knowledge on the concepts of optical devices and their
applications in fibre optics,
 The students will have adequate knowledge on the concepts of thermal properties
of material and their applications in heat exchanger and electrical appliances,
 The students will get knowledge on advanced physics concepts of quantum theory
and its applications in tunnelling microscopes, and
 The students will understand the basics of crystals, their structures and different
crystal growth techniques.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhattacharya, D.K. & Poonam, T. “Engineering Physics”. Oxford University Press,
2015.
2. Gaur, R.K. & Gupta, S.L. “Engineering Physics”. Dhanpat Rai Publishers, 2012.
3. Pandey, B.K. &Chaturvedi, S. “Engineering Physics”. Cengage Learning India,
2012.
4. Brijlal and Subramanyam, “Properties of Matter”, S .Chand publishing, 2002.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Halliday, D., Resnick, R. & Walker, J. “Principles of Physics”. Wiley, 2015.
2. Serway, R.A. & Jewett, J.W. “Physics for Scientists and Engineers”. Cengage
Learning, 2010.
3. Tipler, P.A. & Mosca, G. “Physics for Scientists and Engineers with Modern
Physics’. W.H.Freeman, 2007.
Shatendra Sharma & Jyotsna Sharma, “Engineering Physics”. Pearson, 2018.
23
Program
Programme Outcomes (PO) Specific
Course
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1
3 1 1 - - 1 1 - - - - 1 - - 2 -
CO 2
3 1 1 - 1 1 1 - - - - 1 - - 2 -
CO 3
3 - 1 - - 1 - - - - - 1 - - 1 -
CO 4
3 1 - 1 - 1 1 - - - - 1 - - 1 -
CO 5
3 1 - 1 - - 1 - - - - 1 - - 1 -
24
1921104 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY L T P C
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.Tech 3 0 03

Programmes)
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To make the students acquainted with boiler feed water requirements, related problems
and domestic water treatment techniques.
 To understand the basic mechanism of surface phenomenon.
 To acquaint the student with the principles of electrochemical reactions, methods for
corrosion prevention and protection of materials.
 To make the student conversant with the basics of polymers, cement and glass.
 To acquaint the students with the basics of nanomaterials, their properties and
applications.
UNIT - I: WATER AND ITS TREATMENT 9

Hardness of water – types – expression of hardness – units - Boiler feed water-boiler troubles
- scale and sludge, priming and foaming, caustic embrittlement, boiler corrosion. Treatment of
boiler feed water – Internal treatment (phosphate, colloidal, sodium aluminate and calgon
conditioning). External treatment – Ion exchange process – domestic water treatment (break
point chlorination) – Desalination of brackish water – Reverse Osmosis.
UNIT – II : SURFACE CHEMISTRY AND CATALYSIS 9

Adsorption: Types of adsorption – adsorption of gases on solids – adsorption of solute from
solutions – adsorption isotherms. Freundlich’s adsorption isotherm – Langmuir’s adsorption
isotherm – Contact theory. Kinetics of surface reactions, unimolecular reactions, Langmuir –
applications of adsorption on pollution abatement. Catalysis: Catalyst – types of catalysis –
Criteria – Autocatalysis – Catalytic poison and catalytic promoters – Acid base catalysis –
Applications (3 way catalytic convertor) – Enzyme catalysis– Michaelis – Menten equation.
UNIT – III: ELECTROCHEMISTRY, CORROSION AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS 9
Electrochemical cell - redox reaction, electrode potential - origin of electrode potential -

oxidation potential - reduction potential, measurement and applications - Electrochemical
series and its significance - Nernst equation (derivation and problems). Corrosion – causes –
factors – types - chemical, electrochemical corrosion (galvanic, differential aeration), corrosion
control – material selection and design aspects – Electrochemical protection – sacrificial anode
method and impressed current cathodic method. Protective coatings: Metallic coatings –
Electroplating of Cu - electroless plating of Ni. Organic coatings: Paints - constituents and
function.
25
UNIT – IV : ENGINEERING MATERIALS 9
Cement: Definition – classification of cement – Portland cement - manufacture and properties
- setting and hardening of cement - special cement, water proof, white and sorel cement –
properties and uses – Glass: Manufacture, types, properties and uses (laminated, safety and
flint glass) - Polymers: Classification - types of polymerization - mechanism - methods of
polymerization - Engineering polymers: Nylon-6, Nylon-6,6, Teflon, Kevlar and PEEK -
preparation, properties and uses - Plastic and its types - Conducting polymers: Types and
applications - Polymers in medicine and surgery (applications).
`
UNIT – V : NANOCHEMISTRY 9
Basics - distinction between molecules, nanoparticles and bulk materials; size-dependent
properties (surface to volume ratio, melting point, optical and electrical). Nanoparticles,
Nanocluster, Nanorods, Nanotube (CNT: SWNT and MWNT) and Nanowire, Synthesis -
precipitation, thermolysis, hydrothermal, electrodeposition, chemical vapour deposition, laser
ablation, sol-gel process and applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Gain idea about various methods available for water treatment.

 Explain the materials surface engineering.
 Understand the process of electrochemistry and its application to corrosion.
 Appreciate the nature and novelty of engineering materials.
 Ability to understand the nature and uses of nanomaterials.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Shikha Agarwal, “Engineering Chemistry - Fundamentals and Applications”,
Cambridge University Press, Delhi, 2015.
2. P. C. Jain and Monika Jain, “Engineering Chemistry”, Dhanpat Rai Publishing
Company (P) LTD, New Delhi, 2015.
3. S. Vairam, P. Kalyani and Suba Ramesh, “Engineering Chemistry”, Wiley India PVT,
LTD, New Delhi, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Friedrich Emich, “Engineering Chemistry”, Scientific International PVT, LTD, New

Delhi, 2014.
2. S.S. Dara and S.S. Umare, “A Text Book of Engineering Chemistry”, S. Chand &
Company LTD, New Delhi, 2015.
3. B. Sivasankar, “Engineering Chemistry”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company LTD,
2012.
26
Program
Course
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 2 3 1 1 1 1 - - - - 2 1 1 2 2
CO 2 3 2 3 1 2 2 3 - - - - 3 1 1 2 2
CO 3 2 1 3 2 3 2 3 - - - - 3 1 2
CO 4 2 1 2 - 3 3 1 - - - - 2 1 1 2
CO 5 3 3 3 2 3 3 1 - 1 1 - 2 1 1 1 2
27
1901006 PROGRAMMING IN C L T P C

Programmes)
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To develop C Programs using basic programming.

 To develop C programs using arrays
 To develop C programs using strings.
 To develop applications in C using functions
 To develop C program using structures and union
UNIT – I : BASICS OF C PROGRAMMING 9

Introduction to algorithm: Flowchart-Pseudo code- Introduction to programming paradigms –
C programming: Data Types – Keywords – Variables and Constants – Operators and
Expressions: Expressions – precedence – associativity – Input/Output statements – Decision
making and looping: Branching statements, Iterative statements – Compilation process
UNIT – II : ARRAYS AND STRINGS 9

Introduction to Arrays: One dimensional array: Assigning an array to another array –Equating
an array with another array –Two dimensional Arrays: Declaration – usage of two dimensional
array – reading, storing and accessing elements in two dimensional array –memory
representation – String operations: String library functions – list of strings-command line
arguments
UNIT – III : FUNCTIONS 9

Introduction to functions: Classification of functions – function definition – function call –
function with inputs and outputs – recursive function – library functions-scope of variables
UNIT – IV : STRUCTURES AND UNIONS 9

Introduction to Structures: Array of structures – Nested structure-functions and Structures
Introduction to union: Practical applications of union – typedef and structures – enumerated
data type.
UNIT – V : STORAGE CLASS AND PREPROCESSOR 9

DIRECTIVE
Introduction to storage classes: Types of storage classes – C preprocessor Directives: Types
of preprocessor directives – Pragma Directive-conditional directive.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
28
COURSE OUTCOMES:

 Develop simple applications in C using basic constructs.
 Design and implement applications using arrays and strings
 Develop and implement applications in C using functions
 Develop applications in C using structures and unions
 Design applications using preprocessor to stimulate functions.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Anita Goel and Ajay Mittal, – “Computer Fundamentals and Programming in C”, Dorling
Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd., Pearson Education in South Asia, 2011.
2. Reema Thareja, – “Programming in C”, Oxford University Press, Second Edition, 2016.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Paul Deitel and Harvey Deitel – “C How to Program”, Seventh Edition, Pearson
Publication.
Course Programme Outcomes (PO) PSO

Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 - 3 - 2 - - - - - - 1 - 2 - -
CO 2 3 3 - - 2 - 1 - - - - - 3 - - -
CO 3 2 1 - 2 3 - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO 4 - - 2 - - - - - 2 - 1 - - 1 - -
CO 5 - 3 - - - 1 - - 2 - - - - - - 3
29
1901007 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS L T P C
Programmes)
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To draw the conics curves and special curves.
 To draw the orthographic projection of lines and plane surfaces.
 To draw the projections and solids and Isometric projection of simple solids.
 To draw projections of Section of Solids and development of surfaces.
 To draw free hand sketching of basic geometrical constructions, multiple views of
objects and Perspective Projection of simple solids.
CONCEPTS AND CONVENTIONS (Not for Examination) 1
Importance of graphics in engineering applications – Use of drafting instruments – BIS
conventions and specifications – Size, layout and folding of drawing sheets – Lettering and
dimensioning.
UNIT – I : PLANE CURVES AND SPECIAL CURVES 10

Basic Geometrical constructions, Curves used in engineering practices: Conics – Construction
of ellipse, parabola and hyperbola by eccentricity method – Construction of cycloid (Rolling
Circle rolls on flat surface only). Construction of involutes of square and circle – Drawing of
tangents and normal to the above curves.
UNIT – II : PROJECTION OF POINTS, LINES AND PLANE 16

SURFACES
Orthographic projection- Principles-Principal planes - First angle projection-projection of points
at First Quadrant only. Projection of straight lines (only First angle projections) inclined to both
the principal planes - Determination of true lengths and true inclinations by rotating line method.
Projection of planes (polygonal and circular surfaces) which inclined to both the principal planes
by rotating object method.
UNIT – III : PROJECTION OF SOLIDS AND ISOMETRIC 16

PROJECTION
Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone when the axis is Inclined to
one of the principal planes by rotating object method. Principles of isometric projection –
isometric scale – Isometric projections of simple solids - Prisms, pyramids, cylinders, cones.
UNIT – IV : PROJECTION OF SECTIONED SOLIDS & 16

DEVELOPMENT OF SURFACES
Sectioning of above solids in simple vertical position when the cutting plane is inclined to the
one of the principal planes and perpendicular to the other – obtaining true shape of section.
Development of lateral surfaces of simple and sectioned solids – Prisms, pyramids cylinders
and cones.
UNIT – V : FREE HAND SKETCHING AND PERSPECTIVE 16

Free Hand sketching: Visualization principles – Representation of Three Dimensional objects
30
– Layout of views- Free hand sketching of multiple views from pictorial views of objects.
Perspective projection of simple solids-Prisms and pyramids by visual ray method.
TOTAL: 75 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:

 To draw the conics curves and special curves.
 To draw the orthographic projection of lines and plane surfaces.
 To draw the projections and solids and Isometric projection of simple solids.
 To draw projections of Section of Solids and development of surfaces.
 To draw free hand sketching of basic geometrical constructions, multiple views of
objects and Perspective Projection of simple solids.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. N.D.BHATT, “Engineering Drawing (Plane and Solid Geometry)”, Charotar Publishing

House. PVT. LTD. 53rd Edition : 2018 (Reprint)
2. Venugopal K. and Prabhu Raja V., “Engineering Graphics”, New Age International (P)
Limited, 2018
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. T. Jeyapoovan, “Engineering Graphics Using Auto CAD”, Vikas Publishing House Pvt.
LTD, seventh Edition, 2015.
2. Luzzader, Warren.J. and Duff, John M., “Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing with an
introduction to Interactive Computer Graphics for Design and Production”, Eastern
Economy Edition, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2005.
3. Shah M.B., and Rana B.C., “Engineering Drawing”, Pearson, 2nd Edition, 2011.
4. Natrajan K.V., “A text book of Engineering Graphics”, Dhanalakshmi Publishers,
Chennai, 2009.
5. Basant Agarwal and Agarwal C.M., “Engineering Drawing”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company Limited, New Delhi, 2013.
Publication of Bureau of Indian Standards:

 IS 10711 – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Size and lay out of drawing
sheets.
 IS 9609 (Parts 0 & 1) – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Lettering.
 IS 10714 (Part 20) – 2001 & SP 46 – 2003: Lines for technical drawings.
 IS 11669 – 1986 & SP 46 – 2003: Dimensioning of Technical Drawings.
 IS 15021 (Parts 1 to 4) – 2001: Technical drawings – Projection Methods.
31
Special points applicable to University Examinations on Engineering Graphics:
 There will be five questions, each of either or type covering all units of the syllabus.
 All questions will carry equal marks of 20 each making a total of 100.
 The answer paper shall consist of drawing sheets of A3 size only. The students will be
permitted to use appropriate scale to fit solution within A3 size.
 The examination will be conducted in appropriate sessions on the same day.
Program
Course Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 2 - 3 - - - - - 1 3 - 1 2 1 1 1
CO 2 2 - 3 - - - - - 1 3 - 1 2 1 1 1
CO 3 2 - 3 - - - - - 1 3 - 1 2 1 1 1
CO 4 2 - 3 - - - - - 1 3 - 1 2 1 1 1
CO 5 2 - 3 - - - - - 1 3 - 1 2 1 1 1
32
1901108 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY LABORATORY L T P C
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.Tech. Programmes) 0 0 4 2
PHYSICS LABORATORY
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To study the behaviour of material under shear stress.

 To learn the basics concept understanding the deformation due to linear stress
 To explore the photons to measure the physical parameters.
 To introduce experiments to test thermal conductivity of bad conductor.
 To study the spectrum of white light.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: (Any 5 Experiments)
 Determination of rigidity modulus – Torsion pendulum.

 Determination of Young’s modulus by non-uniform bending method.
 (a) Determination of wavelength and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle and numerical aperture in an optical Fiber.
 Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor – Lee’s Disc method.
 Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid and Solid – Ultrasonic
Interferometer
 Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum – spectrometer grating
 Determination of thickness of a thin wire – Air wedge method
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:

 Measure the rigidity modulus of the material.
 Calculate the deformation due to linear stress and Young’s Modulus
 Use laser to measure the physical parameters.
 Calculate the thermal conductivity of bad conductor by lees disc.
 Measure the wavelength of the mercury the spectrum.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Wilson J.D. and Hernaandez Hall C.A. – “Physics Laboratory Experiments”, Houghton
Mifflin Company, New York, 2005.
2. S. Srinivasan, “A Text Book of Practical Physics”, S. Sultan Chand publications. 2005
3. R. Sasikumar, “Practical Physics”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2011.
33
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 1 1 1 - 1 - 1 1 - - - - - 1 -
CO 2 3 1 1 1 - 1 - 1 1 - - - - - 1 -
CO 3 3 1 1 1 - 2 - 1 1 - - - - - 2 -
CO 4 3 1 1 1 - 1 - 1 1 - - - - - 2 -
CO 5 3 1 1 1 - 1 - 1 1 - - - - - 1 -
CHEMISTRY LABORATORY: (Any five experiments to be conducted)

OBJECTIVES
 To make the student to acquire practical skills in the determination of water quality
parameters through volumetric and instrumental analysis.
 To acquaint the students with the determination of molecular weight of a polymer by

viscometery.
 To make the student conversant with the corrosion defects experimentally.
 To develop and understand the basic concepts of acidic and basic nature using pH.
 To make the student familiar with the properties and nature of alloys experimentally.
List of Experiments
 Estimation of HCl using Na2CO3 as primary standard and determination of alkalinity in

water sample.
 Estimation of copper content of the given solution by iodometry.
 Determination of strength of given hydrochloric acid using pH meter.
 Determination of strength of acids in a mixture of acids using conductivity meter.
 Estimation of iron content of the given solution using potentiometer.
 Determination of molecular weight of polyvinyl alcohol using Ostwald viscometer.
 Pseudo first order kinetics-ester hydrolysis.
 Corrosion experiment-weight loss method.
 Conductometric titration of strong acid vs strong base.
34
OUTCOMES
 Obtain the hands-on knowledge in the quantitative chemical analysis of water quality
related parameters.
 Understand the experimental concepts in the mixture of acids and bases.
 Appreciate the need of iodometry in the estimation of metals.
 Explore the drawbacks of corrosion by weight loss method.
 Design and carry out the scientific experiments related to boiler troubles.
TEXT BOOKS:
1.G.H. Jeffery, J. Bassett, J. Mendham and R.C. Denney, “Vogel’s Textbook of Quantitative
Chemical Analysis”, John Wiley & Sons Inc, 2014.
Programme Outcomes (PO) PSO

Course
Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 2 2 1 2 - - 2 - - - - 1 - - - -
CO 2 3 2 2 2 - - 2 - - - - 1 - - - -
CO 3 2 2 1 2 - 1 2 - - - - 1 2 3 2 1
CO 4 3 2 3 2 - 1 2 - - - - 1 2 3 2 1
CO 5 2 2 1 2 - 1 2 - - - - 1 2 3 2 1
35
1901010 C PROGRAMMING LABORATORY L T P C
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To develop programs in C using basic constructs.

 To develop applications in C using arrays and functions.
 To develop applications in C using Strings and Structures.
 To develop various applications using array concepts
 To develop various application using function concept.
LIST OF PROGRAMS:
 Programs using I/O statements and expressions.

 Programs using decision-making constructs.
 Write a program to find whether the given year is leap year or Not? (Hint: not every
centurion year is a leap. For example 1700, 1800 and 1900 is not a leap year)
 Write a program to perform the Calculator operations, namely, addition, subtraction,
multiplication, division and square of a number.
 Check whether a given number is Armstrong number or not?
 Check whether a given number is odd or even?
 Write a program to perform factorial of a number.
 Write a C program to find out the average of 4 integers.
 Show how to display array elements using two dimensional array.
 Write a C program to perform swapping using function.
 Display all prime numbers between two intervals using functions.
 Reverse a sentence using recursion.
 Write a program in C to get the largest element of an array using the function.
 Write a C program to concatenate two string.
 Write a C program to find the length of String.
 Find the frequency of a character in a string.
 Write a C program to Store Student Information in Structure and Display it.
 The annual examination is conducted for 10 students for five subjects. Write a program
to read the data and determine the following:
(a) Total marks obtained by each student.
(b) The highest marks in each subject and the marks of the student who secured it.
(c) The student who obtained the highest total marks.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
36
COURSE OUTCOMES:

 Develop C programs for simple applications.
 Making use of basic constructs, arrays and strings.
 Develop C programs involving functions,
 Develop program using recursion, pointers, and structures.
 Design applications using sequential and random access file processing.
Program
Specific
Programme Outcomes (PO)
Course Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 - 3 - - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
CO 2 - - - - 2 - - - - 1 - - - - 2 -
CO 3 - - - 2 - - - - 1 - - - - - - 2
CO 4 - 2 - - - 2 - - - - 2 - - 2 - -
CO 5 - - - - - - - 3 - - - 1 2 - - -
37
SEMESTER II
1919201 TECHNICAL ENGLISH LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
The Course prepares second semester Engineering and Technology students to:
 Develop strategies and skills to enhance their ability to read and comprehend
engineering and technology texts.
 Foster their ability to write convincing job applications and effective reports.
 Develop their speaking skills to make technical presentations, participate in
group discussions.
 Participate in group discussions.
 Strengthen their listening skill which will help them comprehend lectures and
talks in their areas of specialization.
UNIT - I: INTRODUCTION 9
Listening– Listening to talks mostly of a scientific/technical nature and completing
information-gap exercises- Speaking –Asking for and giving directions- Reading – reading
short technical texts from journals- newspapers- Writing– purpose statements –
Technical Jargons, homophones – writing instructions – checklists-recommendations-
Vocabulary Development– technical vocabulary Language Development –subject verb
agreement – compound words.
UNIT - II: READING AND STUDY SKILLS 9

Listening– Listening to a technical conversation and filling the gaps-Speaking – describing
a process-Reading – reading longer technical texts- identifying the various transitions in a
text- paragraphing- Writing– interpreting charts, graphs- Vocabulary Development-
vocabulary used in formal letters/emails and reports Language Development- impersonal
passive voice, numerical adjectives.
UNIT - III: TECHNICAL WRITING AND GRAMMER 9

Listening– Listening to classroom lectures/ talks on engineering/technology –Speaking –
mechanics of presentations - Reading – longer texts both general and technical, practice
in speed reading; Writing-Describing a process, use of sequence words-
Vocabulary Development - Misspelt words. Language Development- homonyms
UNIT - IV: REPORT WRITING 9

Listening– Listening to documentaries and making notes. Speaking – introduction to
technical presentations - Reading – reading for detailed comprehension- Writing–
Product description - job application – cover letter –Résumé preparation( via email and
hard copy)- Issue based essays and official circulars – Vocabulary Development– finding
suitable synonyms-paraphrasing-. Language Development- clauses- if conditionals.
38
UNIT - V: GROUP DISCUSSION AND JOB APPLICATIONS 9
Listening– TED/INK talks, answering the questions; Speaking –participating in a group
discussion –Reading– reading and understanding technical articles Writing– Writing
reports- minutes of a meeting- Letter Writing- Letter to the Editor – Letter seeking
permission for an Industrial visit/ Internship –Business Letters, asking for
quotation/clarifications - seeking orders , thanking for the orders given, Complaint letters
- Vocabulary Development- verbal analogies Language Development- reported speech.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
 Read technical texts and write area- specific texts effortlessly.
 Listen and comprehend lectures and talks in their area of specialization successfully.
 Speak appropriately and effectively in varied formal and informal contexts.
 Participate in group discussions.
 Write reports and winning job applications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Board of editors. Fluency in English A Course book for Engineering and

Technology. Orient Blackswan, Hyderabad: 2016
2. Sudharshana.N.P and Saveetha. C. English for Technical Communication.
Cambridge University Press: New Delhi, 2016
REFERENCES:
1. Raman, Meenakshi and Sharma, Sangeetha- Technical Communication Principles

and Practice. Oxford University Press: New Delhi,2014.
2. Kumar, Suresh. E. Engineering English. Orient Blackswan: Hyderabad,2015
3. Booth-L. Diana, Project Work, Oxford University Press, Oxford: 2014.
4. Grussendorf, Marion, English for Presentations, Oxford University Press, Oxford:
2007.
5. Means, L. Thomas and Elaine Langlois, English & Communication For Colleges.
6. IELTS - Cambridge University Press
7. BEC - Cambridge University Press

Program Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO1 3 2 - - - - - - - 3 - 1 1 1 1 1
CO2 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - 2 2 2 1 2
CO3 3 - - - - - - - 3 3 - 1 1 1 1 1
CO4 3 2 2 2 - - - - - 3 - 1 2 2 1 1
CO5 3 2 - 2 - - - - - 3 2 1 2 2 1 1
39
1918202 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – II L T P C
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 This course is designed to cover topics such as Ordinary Differential equation, Vector
Calculus, Complex Analysis and Laplace Transform.
 ODE is the powerful tools to solve practical problems in the field of engineering.
 Vector calculus can be widely used for modeling the various laws of physics.
 The various methods of complex analysis helps us to evaluate contour integration.
 Laplace transforms can be used for efficiently solving the problems that occur in various
branches of engineering.
UNIT – I : ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9L + 3T

First order linear Differential equations- Exact differential equations- Second order linear
differential equations with constant coefficients – Method of variation of parameters –
Homogenous equation of Euler’s and Legendre’s type.
UNIT – II : VECTOR CALCULUS 9L + 3T

Gradient and directional derivative – Divergence and curl– Irrotational and Solenoidal vector
fields – Green’s, Gauss divergence and Stoke’s theorems – Verification and application in
evaluating line, surface and volume integrals.
UNIT – III : LAPLACE TRANSFORMS 9L + 3T

Existence conditions – Transforms of elementary functions – Transform of unit step function
and unit impulse function – Basic properties – Shifting theorems -Transforms of derivatives and
integrals – Inverse transforms – Convolution theorem – Transform of periodic functions –
Application to solution of linear second order ordinary differential equations with constant
coefficients
UNIT – IV : ANALYTIC FUNCTIONS 9L + 3T
Analytic functions – Necessary and sufficient conditions for analyticity in Cartesian coordinates
– Properties – Harmonic conjugates – Construction of analytic function – Conformal mapping
1
– Mapping by functions w = Cz, C + z, z , z 2 Bilinear transformation
UNIT – V : COMPLEX INTEGRATION 9L + 3T

Complex integrationl – Cauchy’s integral theorem – Cauchy’s integral formula – Taylor’s and
Laurent’s series – Singularities – Residues – Residue theorem – Application of residue theorem
for evaluation of real integrals – Use of circular contour and semicircular contour
40
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Apply complex variables in finding, Gradient, divergence, curl of a vector point function.
 Evaluation of line, surface and volume integrals using Gauss, Stokes and Green’s
theorems and their verification.
 Analytic functions, conformal mapping and complex integration are evaluated.
 Laplace transform and inverse transform of simple functions, properties, are studied.
 Apply various techniques in solving Ordinary differential equations with constant
coefficients
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Grewal. B.S, "Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 43 rd

Edition, 2014.
2. Veerarajan. T, “Engineering Mathematics”, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private
Limited, 2019.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Kreyszig Erwin, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", John Wiley and Sons, 10th
Edition, New Delhi, 2016.
2. Jain R.K. and Iyengar S.R.K., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Narosa
rd
Publications, New Delhi, 3 Edition, 2007.
3. O’Neil, P.V. “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Cengage Learning India Pvt., Ltd,
New Delhi, 2007.

Program
Specific
Course Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - - - 1 - - -
CO 2 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - - 1 - - -
CO 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - - 1 - - -
CO 4 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - - 1 - - -
CO 5 3 1 2 1 - - - - - - - - 1 - - -
41
1920202 PHYSICS FOR INFORMATION SCIENCE L T P C
(Common to CSE & IT) 3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the concept of conductivities in the conducting material .

 To facilitate the knowledge about basics of doping, types of semiconductors.
 To enrich the idea of magnetic materials in storage devices.
 To explore the basics of interaction of photon with materials.
 To enhance the fundamental knowledge nano materials and its applications.
UNIT – I : ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9

Classical free electron theory - Expression for electrical conductivity – Thermal conductivity
expression - Wiedemann-Franz law – Success and failures – Quantum free electron theory
– degenerate states- Fermi- Dirac distribution function – Density of energy states – Electron in
periodic potential – Energy bands in solids; conductors, semiconductors and insulators.
UNIT – II: SEMICONDUCTOR PHYSICS 9

Direct and indirect band gap semiconductors - Intrinsic Semiconductors – Carrier concentration
in intrinsic semiconductors – extrinsic semiconductors - Carrier concentration in N-type & P-
type semiconductors – Variation of carrier concentration with temperature – variation of Fermi
level with temperature and impurity concentration –Hall effect- Theory and experiment–
Applications.
UNIT – III : MAGNETIC PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9

Magnetic dipole moment – origin of magnetic moments- Bohr magneton- magnetic permeability
and susceptibility - Magnetic material classification – Ferromagnetism: Domain theory- Energy
involved in domains - Domain Theory- M versus H behaviour – Hard and soft magnetic
materials – examples and uses saturation magnetization and Curie temperature – Magnetic
hard disc (GMR sensor).
UNIT – IV : OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9

Classification of optical materials – carrier generation and recombination processes -
Absorption emission and scattering of light in metals, insulators and semiconductors (concepts
only) – photo current in a P-N diode – solar cell - LED – Organic LED – Optical data storage
techniques.
UNIT – V : NANO MATERIALS AND DEVICES 9

Introduction – Size dependence of Fermi energy – Quantum confinement – Quantum structures
– Density of energy states in quantum well, quantum wire and quantum dot structure - Band
gap of nanomaterial – Tunnelling: single electron phenomena and single electron transistor –
Quantum dot laser – Carbon nanotubes: Properties and applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
42
COURSE OUTCOMES:

 Gain knowledge on classical and quantum free electron theories, and energy band
Structures.
 Acquire knowledge on basics of Semiconductor Physics and its applications in various
devices,
 Get knowledge on magnetic properties of materials and their applications in data
storage.
 Have the necessary understanding on the functioning of optical materials for
optoelectronics.
 Understand the basics of quantum structures and their applications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jasprit Singh, “Semiconductor Devices: Basic Principles”, Wiley 2012.
2. Kasap, S.O., “Principles of Electronic Materials and Devices”, McGraw-Hill Education,
2007.
3. Kittel, C., “Introduction to Solid State Physics”, Wiley, 2005.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Garcia, N. & Damask, A. “Physics for Computer Science Students”, Springer-Verlag,
2012.
2. Hanson, G.W. “Fundamentals of Nano electronics”, Pearson Education, 2009.
3. Rogers, B., Adams, J. & Pennathur, S. “Nanotechnology: Understanding Small
Systems”, CRC Press, 2014.

Program
Specific
Course Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 2 2 - 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 -
CO 2 3 2 2 - - 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 -
CO 3 3 2 2 - - 1 1 - - - - - - - 2 -
CO 4 3 2 2 - - 1 1 - - - - - - - 3 -
CO 5 3 2 2 - 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 3 -
43
1921203 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING L T P C
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To study the nature and facts about environment.

 To finding and implementing scientific, technological, economic and political solutions to
environmental problems.
 To study the interrelationship between living organism and environment.
 To appreciate the importance of environment by assessing its impact on the human
world; envision the surrounding environment, its functions and its value.
 To study the dynamic processes and understand the features of the earth’s interior and
surface.
UNIT – I : ENVIRONMENT, ECOSYSTEMS AND BIODIVERSITY 14
Definition, scope and importance of environment – need for public awareness – concept of an
ecosystem – structure and function of an ecosystem – producers, consumers and decomposers
– energy flow in the ecosystem – ecological succession – food chains, food webs and ecological
pyramids – Introduction, types, characteristic features, structure and function of the grassland
ecosystem, aquatic ecosystems (lakes, oceans) – Introduction to biodiversity definition: genetic,
species and ecosystem diversity – biogeographical classification of India – value of biodiversity:
consumptive use, productive use, social, ethical, aesthetic and option values – India as a mega-
diversity nation – hot-spots of biodiversity – threats to biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of
wildlife, man-wildlife conflicts – endangered and endemic species of India – conservation of
biodiversity: In-situ and ex-situ conservation of biodiversity. Field study of an ecosystem.
UNIT – II : ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION 8
Definition – causes, effects and control measures of: (a) Air pollution (b) Water pollution (c) Soil
pollution (d) Marine pollution (e) Noise pollution (f) Thermal pollution (g) Nuclear hazards – solid
waste management: causes, effects and control measures of municipal solid wastes – role of
an individual in prevention of pollution – pollution case studies – disaster management: floods,
earthquake, cyclone and landslides. Field study of local polluted site – Urban / Rural / Industrial
/Agricultural.
UNIT – III : NATURAL RESOURCES 10
Forest resources: Use and over-exploitation, deforestation, soil erosion and desertification,
case studies- timber extraction, mining, dams and their effects on forests and tribal people –
Water resources: Use and over- utilization of surface and ground water, floods, drought,
conflicts over water– Mineral resources: Use and exploitation, environmental effects of
extracting and using mineral resources, case studies – Food resources: World food problems,
changes caused by agriculture and overgrazing, effects of modern agriculture, fertilizer-
pesticide problems, water logging, salinity– role of an individual in conservation of natural
resources – Equitable use of resources for sustainable lifestyles. Field study of local area to
document environmental assets – river / forest / grassland / hill / mountain.
44
UNIT – IV : SOCIAL ISSUES AND THE ENVIRONMENT 7
From unsustainable to sustainable development – urban problems related to energy – water

conservation, rain water harvesting and watershed management – role of non-governmental
organization- environmental ethics: Issues and possible solutions – climate change, global
warming, acid rain, ozone layer depletion, nuclear accidents and holocaust, case studies. –
wasteland reclamation – consumerism and waste products – environment production act – Air
(Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act – Water (Prevention and control of Pollution) Act –
Wildlife protection Act – Forest conservation Act – enforcement machinery involved in
environmental legislation- central and state pollution control boards- Public awareness.
UNIT – V : HUMAN POPULATION AND THE ENVIRONMENT 6
Population growth, variation among nations – population explosion – family welfare programme
– environment and human health – human rights – value education – HIV / AIDS – women and
child welfare – role of information technology in environment and human health – Case studies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:

 Gain knowledge on ecosystem, environment and biodiversity.
 Understand the process and disadvantages of environmental pollution.
 Analyze the ill effects of over exploitation of natural resources.
 Explain the social issues from unsustainable to sustainable development.
 Outline the need for decrease in population growth and its measures.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Benny Joseph, “Environmental Science and Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New
Delhi, 2006.
2. Gilbert M. Masters, “Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science”, 2 nd
Edition, Pearson Education, 2004.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Dharmendra S. Sengar, “Environmental law”, Prentice Hall of India PVT LTD, New Delhi,
2007.
2. Erach Bharucha, “Textbook of Environmental Studies”, Universities Press (I) PVT, LTD,
Hyderabad, 2015.
3. Rajagopalan, R, “Environmental Studies - From Crisis to Cure”, Oxford University Press,
2005.
4. G. Tyler Miller and Scott E. Spoolman, “Environmental Science”, Cengage Learning
India PVT, LTD, Delhi, 2014.
45
Program
Specific
Course Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 - - - - - 3 3 - 3 - - 1 1 1 1 1
CO 2 2 1 3 - - 2 3 - - - - 1 1 - - 1
CO 3 - - - - - 2 3 - 2 - - 1 1 1 1 1
CO 4 - 2 2 - - - 3 - 3 - - 1 1 - - 1
CO 5 1 1 3 - - 3 2 - - - - 1 1 1 1 1
46
1901005 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING L T P C
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To know the basics of algorithmic problem solving

 To read and write simple Python programs.
 To develop Python programs with conditionals and loops.
 To define Python functions and call them.
 To use Python data structures – lists, tuples, dictionaries
UNIT – I : ALGORITHMIC PROBLEM SOLVING, DATA TYPES 9

Algorithms: building blocks of algorithms (statements, control flow, functions), notation (pseudo
code, flow chart). Python interpreter and interactive mode; values and types: int, float, Boolean,
string, and list; variables, operators and expressions, statements, tuple assignment,
precedence of operators, comments, Illustrative programs: Algorithm for Arithmetic expression
(addition and subtraction).
UNIT – II : CONTROL FLOW STATEMENTS AND FUNCTIONS 9

Conditionals: Boolean values and operators, conditional (if), alternative (if-else), chained
conditional (if-elif-else); Iteration: state, while, for, break, continue, pass; functions, function
definition and use. Fruitful functions: return values, parameters, local and global scope,
recursion. Illustrative programs: exchange the values of two variables square root, printing n
numbers iteratively.
UNIT – III : LIST & TUPLES 9

Lists: list operations, list slices, list methods, list loop, mutability, list parameters; Tuples: tuple
assignment, tuple as return value. Comparison of Lists and tuples. Illustrative programs:
selection sort, insertion sort, Quick sort.
UNIT – IV : STRINGS, DICTIONARIES & SET 9

Strings: string slices, immutability, string functions and methods, string module. Dictionaries:
Operations (create, access, add, remove) and methods. (insert, delete).Set operation (Access,
Add, Remove).Comparison of dictionary and set.
UNIT – V : FILES, MODULES & PACKAGES 9

Files and exception: text files, reading and writing files, format operator; errors and exceptions,
handling exceptions, modules, packages; Illustrative programs: word count, copy file.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
47
COURSE OUTCOMES:

 Develop algorithmic solutions to simple computational problems.
 Structure simple Python programs for solving problems.
 Decompose a Python program into functions.
 Represent compound data using Python lists, tuples, Set and dictionaries.
 Read and write data from/to files in Python Programs.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Reema Thareja, “Python Programming using Problem solving Approach” ,Oxford Higher
Education,2017
2. Allen B. Downey, “Think Python: How to Think Like a Computer Scientist”, 2nd
edition, Updated for Python 3, Shroff/O’Reilly Publishers, 2016
(http://greenteapress.com/wp/think-python/)
3. Guido van Rossum and Fred L. Drake Jr, “An Introduction to Python” – Revised and
updated for Python 3.2, Network Theory Ltd., 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Charles Dierbach, “Introduction to Computer Science using Python: A Computational
Problem-Solving Focus”, Wiley India Edition, 2013.
2. John V Guttag, “Introduction to Computation and Programming Using Python’’, Revised
and expanded Edition, MIT Press , 2013
3. Kenneth A. Lambert, “Fundamentals of Python: First Programs”, CENGAGE Learning,
2012.
4. Paul Gries, Jennifer Campbell and Jason Montojo, “Practical Programming: An
Introduction to Computer Science using Python 3”, Second edition, Pragmatic
Programmers,LLC,2013.
5. Robert Sedgewick, Kevin Wayne, Robert Dondero, “Introduction to Programming in
Python: An Inter-disciplinary Approach”, Pearson India Education Services Pvt. Ltd.,
2016.

Program
Specific
Course Programme Outcomes (PO)
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 2 3 - - - 1 - - - - 2 2 - - 3
CO 2 - - - - 2 - - - - - - - - 2 3 -
CO 3 - - - 2 3 - - - - - - - - 2 - -
CO 4 - - - - 2 2 - - - 2 - - - 2 - -
CO 5 - - - - - - - - - 2 2 - - - 1 -
48
1901008 BASIC CIVIL AND MECHANICAL ENGINEERING L T P C
(Common to CSE, EEE, ECE, EIE, IT & Medical Electronics) 3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To impart basic knowledge on Civil and Mechanical Engineering.

 To familiarize the materials and measurements used in Civil Engineering.
 To provide the exposure on the fundamental elements of civil engineering structures and
construction methods
 To enable the students to distinguish the components and working principle of power
plant units, boilers and IC engines.
 To understand the concepts and working principle of refrigeration and air conditioning
system
A – OVER VIEW
UNIT – I : SCOPE OF CIVIL AND MECHANICAL ENGINEERING 7

Overview of Civil Engineering: Civil Engineering contributions to the welfare of Society –
Specialized sub disciplines in Civil Engineering – Structural, Construction, Geotechnical,
Environmental, Transportation and Water Resources Engineering.
Overview of Mechanical Engineering: Mechanical Engineering contributions to the welfare of
Society –Specialized sub disciplines in Mechanical Engineering - Production, Automobile,
Energy Engineering - Interdisciplinary concepts in Civil and Mechanical Engineering.
B – CIVIL ENGINEERING
UNIT – II : SURVEYING AND CIVIL ENGINEERING MATERIALS 7

Surveying: Objects – classification – principles – measurements of distances – angles – leveling
– determination of areas– contours - examples.
Civil Engineering Materials: Bricks – stones – sand – cement – concrete – steel - timber –
modern materials.
UNIT – III : BUILDING COMPONENTS AND STRUCTURES 11

Foundations: Types of foundations - Bearing capacity and settlement – Requirement of good
foundations.
Civil Engineering Structures: Brickmasonry – stonemasonry – beams – columns – lintels –
roofing– flooring – plastering – floor area, carpet area and floor space index - Types of Bridges
and Dams – water supply - sources and quality of water - Rain water harvesting - introduction
to high way and railway.
49
C – MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
UNIT – IV : INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES AND POWER PLANTS 11
Classification of Power Plants - Internal combustion engines as automobile power plant –

Working principle of Petrol and Diesel Engines – Four stroke and two stroke cycles –
Comparison of four stroke and two stroke engines. Working principle of steam, Gas, Diesel,
Hydro – electric and Nuclear Power plants – working principle of Cochran, La-mont, Benson
Boilers, Turbines, Reciprocating Pumps (single acting and double acting) and Centrifugal
Pumps
UNIT – V : REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 9

Terminology of Refrigeration and Air Conditioning. Principle of vapour compression and
absorption system – Layout of typical domestic refrigerator – Window and Split type room Air
conditioner.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Knowledge of basics in various sub-disciplines of civil and mechanical engineering.

 Use the basics of surveying for calculation of area and volume in basic construction
works
 Fundamental elements of civil engineering structures and construction methods.
 Understand the energy sources and working principle of power plants and apply the
knowledge of power plants to diagonize and solve the Engineering problem and the
working principle of IC Engines
 Understand the function of refrigeration and air conditioning system.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Shanmugam G and Palanichamy MS, “Basic Civil and Mechanical Engineering”, Tata
McGraw Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 2018.
2. Satheesh Gopi, “Basic Civil Engineering”, Pearson publications, 2009.
3. Basant Agrawal and C.M.Agrawal, “Basic Mechanical Engineering”, Wiley Publications
Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2018.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ramamrutham S., “Basic Civil Engineering”, Dhanpat Rai Publishing Co.(P) Ltd, 2015.
2. Rajput R.K., “Thermal Engineering”, Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd, 10th Edition, 2018.
3. Kothandaraman C.P., Domkundwar S., Dhanpat Rai, “Thermal Engineering”, Publishing
Co.(P) Ltd., 6th Edition, 2015.
50
Program
Specific
Course Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 1 2 - - 3 2 1 - - - 1 1 - 1 2
CO 2 3 3 2 1 - 1 - - - - - - 2 1 - 2
CO 3 3 1 2 1 - 1 1 - - - - - 2 1 - 2
CO 4 3 2 2 1 - 1 - - - - - 1 2 1 1 2
CO 5 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - - - 1 - - 1
51
1901009 PROBLEM SOLVING AND PYTHON PROGRAMMING L T P C
LABORATORY 0 0 4 2
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.Tech. Programmes)
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To write, test, and debug simple Python programs.

 To implement Python programs with conditionals and loops.
 Represent compound data using Python lists, tuples, and dictionaries.
 Use functions for structuring Python programs.
 Read and write data from/to files in Python.
LIST OF PROGRAMS:
 Compute the GCD of two numbers.

 Find the square root of a number (Newton‘s method)
 Exponentiation (power of a number)
 Find the maximum of a list of numbers
 Linear search and Binary search
 Selection sort, Insertion sort
 How to create, slice, change, delete and index elements using Tuple.
 Find First n prime numbers
 How to create, slice, change, add, delete and index elements using list.
 Write a program to calculate the length of a string.
 Write a program to reverse the string
 How to change, delete, add and remove elements in Dictionary
 Find the most frequent words in a text read from a file
 Simulate elliptical orbits in Pygame
 Simulate bouncing ball using Pygame
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
PLATFORM NEEDED:
Python 3 interpreter for Windows/Linux
52
COURSE OUTCOMES:

 Write, test, and debug simple Python programs.
 Implement Python programs with conditionals and loops.
 Develop Python programs step-wise by defining functions and calling them.
 Use Python lists, tuples, dictionaries for representing compound data.
 Read and write data from/to files in Python.

Program
Specific
Course Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
- - - - - -
CO 1 3 1 - - - 3 2 3 - -
CO 2 - 2 2 - - 2 - - - - 2 - - 3 - -
-
CO 3 - - 1 - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
-
CO 4 - - - 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 -
-
CO 5 - - - 3 - - - - - - - - - - 3
53
1901208 ENGINEERING PRACTICES LABORATORY L T P C
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To provide exposure to the students with hands on experience on various basic
engineering practices in Civil, Mechanical, Electrical and Electronics Engineering.
 To provide hands on training for fabrication of components using carpentry, sheet metal
and welding equipment / tools.
 To gain the skills for making fitting joints and assembling air conditioner.
 To develop the skills for making simple electrical wiring connections using suitable
tools.
 To provide hands on experience for soldering and gain knowledge about the behavior
of electronics components.
GROUP A (CIVIL & MECHANICAL)
I CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 15
Buildings:
a) Study of plumbing and carpentry components of residential and industrial buildings
safety aspects.
Plumbing Works:
a) Study of pipeline joints, its location and functions: valves, taps, couplings, unions,
reducers, elbows in household fittings.
b) Study of pipe connections requirements for pumps and turbines.

c) Preparation of plumbing line sketches for water supply and sewage works.
d) Hands-on-exercise:
Basic pipe connections – Mixed pipe material connection – Pipe connections with
different joining components.
e) Demonstration of plumbing requirements of high-rise buildings.
Carpentry works:
a) Study of the joints in roofs, doors, windows and furniture.
b) Hands-on-exercise:
Wood work, joints by sawing, planing and cutting.
54
II MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 15
Welding:
a) Preparation of butt joints, lap joints and T- joints by Shielded metal arc welding.
b) Gas welding practice
Basic Machining:
a) Simple Turning and Taper turning
b) Drilling Practice
Sheet Metal Work:

a) Forming & Bending
b) Model making – Trays and funnels.
c) Different type of joints.
Fitting:
a) Preparation of square fitting
b) Preparation of V – fitting models.
Machine assembly practice:

a) Assembly of centrifugal pump
b) Assembly of air conditioner
Demonstration on:
a) Smithy operations, upsetting, swaging, setting down and bending.
Example – Exercise – Production of hexagonal headed bolt.
b) Foundry operations like mould preparation for gear and step cone pulley.
GROUP B (ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS)
III ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 15
1. Residential house wiring using Switches, Fuse, Indicator, Lamp and Energy meter.
2. Fluorescent Lamp Wiring.
3. Staircase Wiring.
4. Measurement of Voltage, Current, Power and Power factor in electrical circuit.
5. Measurement of Energy using Analog & Digital Energy meter.
6. Measurement of Earth Resistance.

7. Study of Industrial house wiring.
8. Identification & Study of protective devices: Fuses & Fuse carriers, MCB, ELCB and
Isolators with ratings and usage.
55
IV ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING PRACTICE 15
1. Study of Electronic components and equipments – Resistor, colour coding measurement

of AC signal parameter (peak-peak, RMS period, frequency) using CR.
2. Study of logic gates AND, OR, EX-OR and NOT.
3. Generation of Clock Signal.
4. Soldering practice – Components, Devices and Circuits – Using general purpose

PCB.
5. Measurement of ripple factor of HWR and FWR.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Carry out various basic engineering practices in Civil, Mechanical, Electrical and
Electronics Engineering.
 Fabricate carpentry components and pipe connections including plumbing works and use
welding equipment’s to join the structures.
 Carry out the basic machining operations, make the models using sheet metalworks.
Illustrate on centrifugal pump, air conditioner, operations of smithy, foundry and fittings.
 Carry out basic home electrical works and measure the electrical quantities.
 Elaborate on the electronics components, gates and soldering practices.
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
CIVIL
1. Assorted components for plumbing consisting of metallic pipes, plastic pipes, flexible
pipes, couplings, unions, elbows, plugs and other fittings. 15 Sets
2. Carpentry vice (fitted to work bench) 15 Nos.
3. Standard woodworking tools 15 Sets
4. Models of industrial trusses, door joints, furniture joints 5 each
56
MECHANICAL
1. Arc welding transformer with cables and holders 5 Nos.
2. Welding booth with exhaust facility 5 Nos.
3. Welding accessories like welding shield, chipping hammer, 5 Sets

wire brush, etc.
4. Oxygen and acetylene gas cylinders, blow pipe and other 2 Nos
welding outfit.
.
5. Centre lathe 2 Nos.
6. Hearth furnace, anvil and smithy tools 2 Sets
7. Moulding table, foundry tools 2 Sets
8. Power Tool: Angle Grinder 2 Nos.
9. Study-purpose items: centrifugal pump, air-conditioner One each
10. Fitting tools, Hack saw frame, 12' file, hack saw blade 15 Nos.
ELECTRICAL
1. Assorted electrical components for house wiring 15 Sets
2. Fluorescent Lamp 15 Sets
3. Electrical measuring instruments 10 Sets
4. Analog & Digital energy meter 5 Sets
5. Megger 2
ELECTRONICS
1. Soldering guns 10 Nos.
2. Assorted electronic components for making circuits 50 Nos.
3. Small PCBs 10 Nos.
4. Multimeters 10 Nos.
5. Study purpose items: Telephone, FM radio, low-voltage power supply
57
Program
Course
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1
3 - - - - 1 - - - - - 1 3 - - -
CO 2
- 1 2 - 3 - - - - - 1 - - 1 2 -
CO 3 - - - 3 2 - - - - - - 1 - - - 3
CO 4 - 2 3 1 2 - - - - - - - - 2 3 1
CO 5 - 3 2 2 - - - - 1 - - - - 3 2 2
58
1901209 APPLIED PHYSICS AND ENVIRONMENTAL CHEMISTRY L T P C
LABORATORY 0 0 4 2
(Common to all branches of B.E. / B.Tech. Programmes)
(Laboratory classes on alternate weeks for Physics and Environmental Chemistry)
APPLIED PHYSICS LABORATORY

COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To measure the band gap of given semi conductor.
 To study I-V characteristics of solar cell
 To measure electrical resistivity of metal and alloy
 To calculate the hkl planes
 To measure the paramagnetic susceptibility by Quinke’s method.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: (Any 5 Experiments)
 Determination of band gap of a semiconductor.

 Study of I-V characteristics of solar cell and determination of its efficiency.
 Determination of electrical resistivity of metal and alloy –Carey foster Bridge.
 Calculation of lattice cell parameter – X-ray diffraction method.
 Measurement of susceptibility of paramagnetic solution by Quinke’s method.
 Study of magnetic Hysteresis-B-H curve.
 Measurement of Temperature using LM35.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
DEMO:
 Crystal growth- Low temperature solution growth.
 Absorption and transmittance measurement of materials – UV visible spectrum.
 Attenuation losses in optical Fiber.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to
 Measure the band gap of semiconductors

 Measure the efficiency of solar cell
 Compare the resistivity of metals and alloys
 Calculate the lattice parameter and interplanar distance.
59
 Understand the susceptibility values for any paramagnetic substances.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Wilson J.D. and Hernaandez Hall C.A. – “Physics Laboratory Experiments”, Houghton
Mifflin Company, New York, 2005.
2. S. Srinivasan, “A Text Book of Practical Physics”, S. Sultan Chand publications. 2005.
3. R. Sasikumar, “Practical Physics”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2011.
Program Specific
PROGRAM OUTCOMES Outcomes (PSO)
Course Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 1 2 2 - 1 - 1 1 - - - - - 1 -
CO 2 3 2 2 2 - 1 - 1 1 - - - - - 2 -
CO 3 3 2 2 1 - - - 1 1 - - - - - 1 -
CO 4 3 1 2 2 - 1 - 1 1 - - - - - 1 -
CO 5 3 2 2 2 - 2 - 1 1 - - - - - 3 -
60
ENVIRONMENTAL CHEMISTRY LABORATORY
OBJECTIVES
 To determine the dissolved oxygen and chloride content in water.

 To determine calcium and magnesium present in domestic water.
 To estimate iron, sodium and chlorine using various techniques.
 To determine the chemical oxygen demand in industrial effluent.
 To determine the available chlorine in bleaching powder.
List of Experiments
 Determination of total, temporary & permanent hardness of water by EDTA method
 Determination of DO content of water sample by Winkler’s method
 Determination of chloride content of water sample by argentometric method
 Estimation of iron content of the water sample using spectrophotometer
 Determination of COD value of industrial effluents
 Estimation of sodium by flame photometry
 Estimation of available chlorine in bleaching powder
Demo
 Pollution abatement by adsorption techniques
 Scintillation Process
OUTCOMES
 Appreciate the basic requirements for potable water.
 Understand the need of dissolved oxygen in water.
 Explore the quantity of bleaching powder to be added in water.
 Analyze the ill effects caused by the industrial effluents.
 Explore new research areas in the treatment of waste water.

TEXT BOOK:
1. G.H. Jeffery, J. Bassett, J. Mendham and R.C. Denney, “Vogel’s Textbook of
Quantitative Chemical Analysis”, John Wiley & Sons Inc, 2014.
61
Program
Course
Outcomes
Outcomes
(PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 3 3 3 - 3 3 - - - - 1 1 1 1 1
CO 2 3 3 2 3 - 3 3 - - - - 3 1 1 - 1
CO 3 3 3 3 3 - 2 3 - - - - 2 1 1 1 -
CO 4 2 3 3 2 - 3 3 - - - - 2 1 1 - 1
CO 5 3 3 3 3 - 3 3 - - - - 3 1 - 1 -
62
1901200 NSS/NCC/YRC/NSO LTPC
NATIONAL SERVICE SCHEME (NSS) 0021
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
The main objectives of this course are:
 To help learners know about NSS in the context of youth, community and voluntary
service.
 To teach the importance of health, hygiene and sanitation for a healthy Nation.
 To understand the community in which they work.
 To identify the problems of the community and involve them in problem-solving.
 To develop the capacity to meet emergencies and natural disasters.
 To practice the National integration and social harmony.
 To utilize their knowledge in finding practical solutions to individual and community
MODULE - I : INTRODUCTION AND BASIC CONCEPTS OF NSS 8
History – Aim – Objectives of NSS- Emblem – Motto – Badge –Song-Organizational structure

- Roles and Responsibilities of NSS-Regular activities - Any approved indoor / outdoor
programs approved by the Principal
MODULE - II : YOUTH LEADERSHIP, SOCIAL HARMONY AND NATIONAL 8

INTEGRATION
Meaning and types of Leadership - Qualities of good leaders and leadership - Importance and
role of youth leadership - Role of youth in peace and Nation building - Any approved indoor /
outdoor programs approved by the Principal
MODULE - III : HEALTH, HYGIENE AND SANITATION AND YOUTH HEALTH 8
Definition, Needs and Scope of Health Education - Swachh Bharat Abhiyan - Healthy
Lifestyles, HIV, AIDS, Drugs abuse - Any approved indoor / outdoor programs approved by
the Principal
MODULE - IV : ENVIRONMENT ISSUES, EMERGENCIES AND DISASTER 8

MANAGEMENT
Environment conservation, enrichment and sustainability - Waste management - Natural

resource management [Rain water harvesting and Energy conservation] - Introduction to
Disaster Management, Classification of Disasters - Any approved indoor / outdoor programs
approved by the Principal
63
MODULE – V: SPECIAL CAMPING AND YOUTH DEVELOPMENT PROGRAMMES 8
Aim and objectives of special camping - Organization of special camping - National Youth Policy
- Youth Development - Any approved indoor / outdoor programs approved by the Principal
TOTAL: 40 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
Learners will have the knowledge about NSS and its role in the fields of health, hygiene,
emergencies & natural disasters and involve them in problem-solvingof the nearest community
so as to build a strong country.
REFERENCES :
1. National Service Scheme Manual (Revised) 2006, Government of India, Ministry ofYouth
Affairs and Sports, New Delhi.
2. National Youth Policy, Government of India, Ministry of Youth Affairs and Sports,
New Delhi.
3. https://nss.gov.in/
4. National Service Scheme Handbook, Anna University, Chennai - 25.
64
1901200 NATIONAL CADETS CORPS LTPC
0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES:
 To develop the students character into comradeship
 To improve the self-responsibilities of the student
 To give the secular outlook
 To perform the adventure activates
 To give the ideas of selfless service among young citizens
MODULE – I: INTRODUCTION NCC 8

Moto of NCC- Cardinal principals of Discipline - Aim of NCC – History of NCC – NCC
Organization- NCC Song - Opportunities in Indian Army
MODULE – II: BASIC DRILL PRACTICE 8

Foot Drill – Arms Drill – Ceremonial Drill – Attention – Right Face – Salute – Present Arms
and Orders – Forward March.
MODULE – III: NCC ARMY 8

Armed Forces – Military History – Badges and Ranks- Setting a Map, Finding Own
Position and North– General Awareness – Border & Coastal Areas
MODULE – IV: NCCNAVY 8

History of Indian Navy – Types of Warship and Roles – Navy Ranks – Role of INDO PAK
war – 1971 &Kargil war – Naval Communications
MODULE – V: NCC SAFETY AND RESCUE OPERATIONS 8

First Aid – Firefighting – Flooding – Damage Control - Health and Hygiene – Swimming -
Trekking
TOTAL: 40 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
 The NCC cadets learnt several Valuable things Selfness, Honesty Hard work and
discipline
 NCC develops their personalities in different angles
 NCC army grows the turnout cadets in Army
 NCC Navy intensification the technical information about the coastal areas
 NCC generally improve the personal and social impact
 NCC is foot path to join in an Indian defense
65
Text books:
1. R Gupta’s “NCC Navy wing“ it covers both Common and Special Subjects
2. R Gupta’s “Handbook of National Cadets Corps for ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ certificate
examination”
3. NCC Army Hand book
https://nccorissa.org/old/Doc/cadet%20Hand%20Book%20SPL%20SUBJECT%20Army.pdf
4. NCC Navy Hand Book
https://dokumen.tips/documents/ncc-cadet-handbook-navy-specialised-subject-sd-swpdf-
ncc-cadet-handbook.html
66
1901200 YOUTH RED CROSS LTPC
0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES:
To inculcate the following in the youth of our college

 Health awareness
 Civic responsibilities with humanitarian concern
 Spirit of service
 Sense of duty
 Friendly relationship without discrimination
MODULE – I : INTRODUCTION 8
Origin-Fundamental Principles-Huanity,Impartiality,Neutrality,Independence,Voluntary
service, Unity, Universality based activities like First Aid etc.
MODULE – II : MOTTO 8
Health-Protection of health and life , Service- Serving the sick and suffering, Friendship-
Promoting it through program like Financial Literacy etc.
MODULE – III : FEATURES OF YRC 8
Organizing Committee-Structure-How to start a Unit- Core focus areas-Strategic Goals
and Objectives through programs like Eye, Dental, General Health checkup etc.
MODULE – IV : REGULAR ACTIVITIES 8
Disaster Relief- Health and Medical Service-Training Courses-Human resource
development through programs on the above areas
MODULE – V : HUMANITARIAN PRINCIPLES 8
Principle of Humanity-Principle of Distinction-Principle of Military Necessity-Principle of
prevention of unnecessary suffering-Principle of Proportionality - programs on the above
TOTAL: 40 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
The students would have got their personality developed through
 Health awareness
 Civic responsibilities with humanitarian concern
 Spirit of service
 Sense of duty
 Friendly relationship without discrimination
References:
1. IRCS/YRC Handbook
2. https://www.indianredcross.org/youth/Guidelines-for-JYRC-LR.pdf
67
1901200 NATIONAL SPORTS ORGANISATION (NSO) LTPC
0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES:
 To create awareness about basic fitness and mental strength
 To promote the development of physical fitness
 To develop the sporting activities of the youth
 To create the social responsibility and social interaction through participation
MODULE – I: 8
Introduction of Physical Education- History - Origin - Physical Fitness Test - Major games Skills
Test.
MODULE – II: 8
Importance of Basic Physical Fitness - BMI Calculation - Identification of deformities - Nutrition
& Diet for fitness - Major games practice.
MODULE – III: 8
Health Education - Physical Fitness Activities (Speed - Strength - Endurance - Agility) minor
games practice.
MODULE – IV: 8
Major games introduction(Athletics - Badminton - Ball Badminton- Basketball- Chess- Cricket -
Football -Kabaddi -Kho-Kho -Table Tennis -Volleyball) and tournament.
MODULE – V: 8
Major games skills training - Physical Fitness Activities (50mtr dash-800mtr run-sit ups/pushups
- shuttle run)Assessments.
TOTAL: 40 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
 Get basic knowledge about physical and mental fitness and gain physical fitness and
mental fitness
 NSO create-esteem and self confidence
 NSO provide opportunity get social interaction
 Development of character and personality through participation
68
SEMESTER – III
1918302 DISCRETE MATHEMATICS LTPC

3104
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To extend student‘s logical and mathematical maturity and ability to deal with
abstraction.
 To introduce most of the basic terminologies used in computer science courses and
application of ideas to solve practical problems.
 To understand the basic concepts of Combinatorics and graph theory.
 To familiarize the applications of algebraic structures.
 To understand the concepts and significance of lattices and Boolean algebra which
are widely used in computer science and engineering.
UNIT - I: LOGIC AND PROOFS 9L+3T

Propositional logic – Propositional equivalences – Normal forms - Predicates and quantifiers
– Nested quantifiers – Rules of inference.
UNIT - II: COMBINATORICS 9L+3T

Mathematical induction – Strong induction and well ordering – The basics of counting – The
pigeonhole principle – Permutations and combinations – Recurrence relations – Solving linear
recurrence relations – Generating functions – Inclusion and exclusion principle and its
applications.
UNIT - III: GRAPHS 9L+3T

Graphs and graph models – Graph terminology and special types of graphs – Matrix
representation of graphs and graph isomorphism – Connectivity – Euler and Hamilton paths.
UNIT - IV: ALGEBRAIC STRUCTURES 9L+3T

Algebraic systems – Semi groups and monoids - Groups – Subgroups – Homomorphism‘s –
Normal subgroup and cosets – Lagrange‘s theorem – Definitions and examples of Rings and
Fields.
UNIT - V: LATTICES AND BOOLEAN ALGEBRA 9L+3T

Partial ordering – Posets – Lattices as posets – Properties of lattices - Lattices as algebraic
systems – Sub lattices – Direct product and homomorphism – Some special lattices – Boolean
algebra.
69
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Have knowledge of the concepts needed to test the logic of a program.
 Have an understanding in identifying structures on many levels.
 Be aware of a class of functions which transform a finite set into another finite set
which relates to input and output functions in computer science.
 Be aware of the counting principles, and exposed to concepts and properties of
algebraic structures such as groups, rings and fields.
 Have knowledge of the concepts needed to test the Boolean algebra.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rosen, K.H., "Discrete Mathematics and its Applications", 7th Edition, Tata McGraw
Hill Pub. Co. Ltd., New Delhi, Special Indian Edition, 2011.
2. Tremblay, J.P. and Manohar.R, “Discrete Mathematical Structures with Applications
to Computer Science", Tata McGraw Hill Pub. Co. Ltd, New Delhi, 30th Reprint,
2011.
REFERENCE BOOK:
1. Grimaldi, R.P. "Discrete and Combinatorial Mathematics: An Applied Introduction",
4th Edition, Pearson Education Asia, Delhi, 2007.
2. Lipschutz, S. and Mark LiProgram Specific Outcomes(PSO)n., "Discrete
Mathematics", Schaum‘s Outlines, Tata McGraw Hill Pub. Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 3rd
Edition, 2010.
3. Koshy, T. "Discrete Mathematics with Applications", Elsevier Publications, 2006.

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - 1 1 - - -
CO 2 3 3 3 - - - - - 1 - - 1 1 - - -
CO 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 1 - - 1 1 - - -
CO 4 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - 1 1 - - -
CO 5 3 3 3 - - - - - 1 - - 1 1 - - -
70
1904301 PROGRAMMING & DATA STRUCTURES IN C LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To understand the concepts of list ADTs.
 To learn linear data structures – stacks and queues.
 To learn the non-linear data structure trees and its types.
 To understand the concepts of graphs and its applications.
 To understand sorting, searching and hashing algorithms.
UNIT - I: LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES – LIST 9

Introduction to structure-Abstract Data Types (ADTs) – List ADT – array-based
implementation – linked list implementation ––singly linked lists- circularly linked lists- doubly-
linked lists – applications of lists –Polynomial Manipulation.
UNIT - II: LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES – STACKS, QUEUES 9

Stack ADT – Operations – Applications – Evaluating arithmetic expressions- Conversion of
Infix to postfix expression – Queue ADT – Operations – Circular Queue – Priority Queue –
deQueue –applications of queues.
UNIT - III: NON LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES – TREES 9

Tree ADT – tree traversals – Binary Tree ADT – expression trees – binary search tree ADT –
Threaded Binary Trees- AVL Trees – B-Tree – B+ Tree-Heap
UNIT - IV: NON LINEAR DATA STRUCTURES – GRAPHS 9

Definition – Representation of Graph – Types of graph – Breadth-first traversal – Depth-first
traversal – Topological Sort – Dijkstra's algorithm-mimimum spanning tree-Bi-connectivity
UNIT - V: SEARCHING, SORTING AND HASHING TECHNIQUES 9
Searching-Linear Search – Binary Search. Sorting – Bubble sort – Selection sort – Insertion
sort – Shell sort – Radix sort. Hashing- Hash Functions – Separate Chaining – Open
Addressing.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
71
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Implement abstract data types for linear data structures list.
 Apply the different linear data structures to the problem solutions.
 Apply the non linear data structures to solve the complex problems.
 Analyze the applications of graphs
 Critically analyze the various searching and sorting algorithms.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mark Allen Weiss, “Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C”, 2nd Edition, Pearson
2. Education,1997.
3. Reema Thareja, “Data Structures Using C”, Second Edition, Oxford University Press,
2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Reema Thareja, “Data Structures Using C”, Second Edition , Oxford University Press,
2011
2. Thomas H. Cormen, Charles E. Leiserson, Ronald L.Rivest, Clifford Stein,
“Introduction to Algorithms”, Second Edition, Mcgraw Hill, 2002.
3. Aho, Hopcroft and Ullman, “Data Structures and Algorithms”, Pearson education,1983.
4. Stephen G. Kochan, “Programming in C”, 3rd edition, Pearson Education.
5. Ellis Horowitz, SartajSahni, Susan Anderson-Freed, “Fundamentals of Data Structures
in C”, Second Edition, University Press, 2008

Program
Course
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 3 - 2 - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
CO 2 3 - 3 - - - - - - - - - - 3 - -
CO 3 3 - - 2 - - - - - - - - - - 3 -
CO 4 3 - 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
CO 5 - 3 - 3 - - - - - - - - - 3 - -
72
1904302 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To understand Object Oriented Programming concepts using Java.
 To know the principles of packages, inheritance and interfaces.
 To handle exceptions and use I/O streams.
 To develop a java application with threads.
 To design and build simple Graphical User Interfaces.
UNIT - I: INTRODUCTION TO OOP AND JAVA FUNDAMENTALS 8

Object Oriented Programming - Abstraction – Encapsulation- Inheritance -Polymorphism-
Characteristics of Java – The Java Environment - Java Source File -Structure – Compilation.
Fundamental Programming Structures in Java – Data Types, Variables, Operators, Control
Flow, Arrays.
UNIT - II: CLASSES AND CONSTRUCTORS 10

Defining classes in java -inheritance – Super classes- sub classes –Protected members –
constructors in sub classes- the Object class – abstract classes and methods- final methods
and classes – Interfaces – defining an interface, implementing interface, differences between
classes and interfaces and extending interfaces.
UNIT - III: STRINGS AND EXCEPTION HANDLING 9

String Operations - Exceptions - exception hierarchy - throwing and catching exceptions – built-
in exceptions, creating own exceptions, packages.
UNIT - IV: I/O AND MULTITHREADING 9

Input / Output Basics – Streams – Byte streams and Character streams – Reading and Writing
Console – Reading and Writing Files, Multi-threading, thread life cycle, creating threads,
synchronizing threads, Inter-thread communication.
UNIT - V: EVENT DRIVEN PROGRAMMING 9

Graphics programming - Frame – Components - working with 2D shapes - Using color and
fonts, - Basics of event handling - event handlers - adapter classes - actions - AWT event
hierarchy
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
73
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Develop Java programs using Object Oriented Programming principles.
 Develop Java programs with the concepts inheritance and interfaces.
 Build Java applications using exceptions and I/O streams.
 Develop Java applications with threads and Files.
 Develop interactive Java programs using graphics.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Cay S. Horstmann, Gary cornell, “Core Java Volume –I Fundamentals”, 9th Edition,
Prentice Hall, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Herbert Schildt, “Java The complete reference”, 8th Edition, McGraw Hill Education,
2011.
2. Paul Deitel, Harvey Deitel, “Java SE 8 for programmers”, 3rd Edition, Pearson, 2015.
3. Steven Holzner, “Java 2 Black book”, Dreamtech press, 2011.
4. Timothy Budd, “Understanding Object-oriented programming with Java”, Updated
Program
Course
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 - - - - - 2 1 - - 1 2 - 2 - -
CO 2 - 3 3 2 - 1 - - - - - - 3 - - -
CO 3 2 - - - - 2 - - 2 - - - - - 2 -
CO 4 - - 2 1 - - - - 2 2 - - - 2 - -
CO 5 1 - 3 1 3 2 - - 3 3 - - 2 - - -
74
1906306 DIGITAL FUNDAMENTALS AND COMMUNICATION LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
The student should be made to:
 Learn the various number systems.
 Understand the various logic gates.
 Be familiar with various combinational circuits.
 Be familiar with designing synchronous and asynchronous sequential circuits.
 Analyze Source and Error control coding.
UNIT - I: BOOLEAN ALGEBRA AND LOGIC GATES 9

Review of Number Systems– Boolean Algebra and Theorems – Boolean Functions –
Simplification of Boolean Functions using Karnaugh Map– Logic Gates – NAND and NOR
Implementations.
UNIT - II: COMBINATIONAL LOGIC 9

Combinational Circuits – Analysis and Design Procedures – Circuits for Arithmetic
Operations, Code Conversion – Decoders and Encoders – Multiplexers and Demultiplexers
– Introduction to HDL – HDL Models of Combinational circuits.
UNIT - III: SYNCHRONOUS AND ASYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL LOGIC 9
Sequential Circuits – Latches and Flip Flops – Analysis and Design Procedures – State
Reduction and State Assignment –HDL for Sequential Logic Circuits. Analysis and Design
of Asynchronous Sequential Circuits– Hazards.
UNIT - IV: ANALOG MODULATION 9

Amplitude Modulation – AM, DSBSC, SSBSC, VSB – PSD, modulators and demodulators –
Angle modulation – PM and FM – PSD, modulators and demodulators – Super heterodyne
receivers.
UNIT - V: DIGITAL MODULATION 9

Low pass sampling theorem – Quantization – PAM – Line coding – PCM, DPCM, DM, and
ADPCM and ADM, Time Division Multiplexing, Frequency Division Multiplexing. Phase shift
keying – BPSK, DPSK, QPSK .
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
75
COURSE OUTCOMES :
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
 Simplify Boolean functions using KMap
 Implement designs using Programmable Logic Devices
 Write HDL code for combinational and Sequential Circuits
 Ability to comprehend and appreciate the significance and role of this course in the
present contemporary world
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Morris Mano M. and Michael D. Ciletti, “Digital Design”, IV Edition, Pearson
Education, 2008.
2. H Taub, D L Schilling, G Saha, “Principles of Communication Systems” 3/e, TMH
2007
3. S. Haykin “Digital Communications” John Wiley 2005.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. John F. Wakerly, “Digital Design Principles and Practices”, Fourth Edition, Pearson
Education, 2007.
2. Charles H. Roth Jr, “Fundamentals of Logic Design”, Fifth Edition – Jaico Publishing
House, Mumbai, 2003.
3. Donald D. Givone, “Digital Principles and Design”, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 2003.
4. B.P.Lathi, “Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems”, 3rd edition, Oxford
University Press, 2007
5. H P Hsu, Schaum Outline Series – “Analog and Digital Communications” TMH 2006
6. B.Sklar, Digital Communications Fundamentals and Applications” 2/e Pearson
Education 2007
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 2 1 2 1 - - - - - - 3 3 - 3 -
CO 2 - 3 2 3 2 - - - - - - 2 - - - 2
CO 3 - 2 2 - 2 1 1 - - 2 2 3 2 2 3 -
CO 4 3 - - - - - - - - 2 2 - - 2 - -
CO 5 3 - - - - - - - - 2 2 - - - - -
76
1908503 SOFTWARE ENGINEERING LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To understand the phases in a software project
 To understand fundamental concepts of requirements engineering
 To Understand Analysis Modeling.
 To understand the various software design methodologies.
 To learn various testing and maintenance measures.
UNIT - I: SOFTWARE PROCESS AND AGILE DEVELOPMENT 9

Introduction to Software Engineering, Software Process, Perspective and Specialized
Process Models –Introduction to Agility-Agile process-Extreme programming-
XPProcess-Quality management-SQA-SQA plan
UNIT - II: REQUIREMENTS ANALYSIS AND SPECIFICATION 9

Software Requirements: Functional and Non-Functional, User requirements, System
requirements, Software Requirements Document – Requirement Engineering
Process: Feasibility Studies, Requirements elicitation and analysis, requirements
validation, requirements management-Classical analysis: Structured system Analysis,
Petri Nets- Data Dictionary.
UNIT - III: SOFTWARE DESIGN 9

Design process – Design Concepts-Design Model– Design Heuristic – Architectural
Design - Architectural styles, Architectural Design, Architectural Mapping using Data
Flow- User Interface Design: Interface analysis, Interface Design –Component level
Design: Designing Class based components, traditional Components.
UNIT - IV: TESTING AND MAINTENANCE 9

Software testing fundamentals-Internal and external views of Testing-white box testing
- basis path testing-control structure testing-black box testing- Regression Testing –
Unit Testing – Integration Testing – Validation Testing – System Testing and
Debugging –Software Implementation Techniques: Coding practices-Refactoring-
Maintenance and Reengineering-BPR model-Reengineering process model-Reverse
and Forward Engineering.
UNIT - V: PROJECT MANAGEMENT 9

Software Project Management: Estimation – LOC, FP Based Estimation, Make/Buy
Decision COCOMO I & II Model – Project Scheduling – Scheduling, Earned Value
Analysis Planning – Project Plan, Planning Process, RFP Risk Management –
Identification, Projection - Risk Management-Risk Identification-RMMM Plan-CASE
TOOLS
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
77
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Identify the key activities in managing a software project, project schedule,
estimate project cost and effort required.
 Compare different process models.
 Concepts of requirements engineering and Analysis Modeling.
 Apply systematic procedure for software design and deployment.
 Compare and contrast the various testing and maintenance.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Roger S. Pressman, ―Software Engineering– A Practitioner’s
Approach‖, Seventh Edition, Mc Graw-Hill International Edition,2010.
2. Ian Sommerville,―SoftwareEngineering‖,9th Edition, Pearson Education
Asia,2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Rajib Mall, ““Fundamentals of Software Engineering”, Third Edition, PHI Learning
Pvt Limited, 2009.
2. Pankaj Jalote, “Software Engineering, A Precise Approach”, Wiley India, 2010.
3. Kelkar S.A., “Software Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd, 2007.
4. Stephen R.Schach, “Software Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
Company Limited,2007.
5. http://nptel.ac.in/.
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 2 - 3 3 - - - - - - - 2 2 - - -
CO 2 2 - 3 3 - 2 - - - - - - - 2 - -
CO 3 - - 3 3 - - - - - - 3 - - - 2 -
CO 4 - 2 - - - - - - - 2 - - - 2 - -
CO 5 - 2 - - - 3 - - - - 3 - - - 1 -
78
1904304 OPERATING SYSTEMS LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To understand the basic concepts and functions of operating systems.
 To understand Processes and Scheduling algorithms.
 To understand the concept of Deadlocks.
 To analyze various memory management schemes.
 To understand I/O management and File systems.
UNIT - I: PROCESSES 9
Introduction to operating systems - Evolution of Operating System - Operating System-
structures – System calls – System programs –Processes: Process concept – Process
scheduling – Operations on processes –Inter process communication – Communication
in client-server systems.
UNIT - II: PROCESS SCHEDULING AND SYNCHRONIZATION 9

CPU Scheduling: Scheduling criteria – Scheduling algorithms – Multiple-processor
scheduling. Process Synchronization: The critical-section problem –Synchronization
hardware – Semaphores – Classic problems of synchronization –critical regions –
Monitors. Deadlock: System model – Deadlock characterization –Methods for handling
deadlocks – Deadlock prevention – Deadlock avoidance –Deadlock detection –
Recovery from deadlock.
UNIT - III: STORAGE MANAGEMENT 9

Main Memory Management: Background – Swapping – Contiguous memory allocation
– Paging – Segmentation – Segmentation with paging. Virtual Memory: Background –
Demand paging – Process creation – Page replacement – Allocation of frames –
Thrashing.
UNIT - IV: FILE SYSTEMS 9

File-System Interface: File concept – Access methods – Directory structure – File system
mounting – Protection. File-System Implementation: Directory implementation –
Allocation methods – Free-space management – efficiency and performance – recovery
– log-structured file systems.
UNIT - V: I/O SYSTEMS 9

I/O Systems – I/O Hardware – Application I/O interface – kernel I/O subsystem - streams
– performance. Mass-Storage Structure: Disk scheduling – Disk management – Swap-
space management – disk attachment.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
79
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Analyze various scheduling algorithms.
 Understand deadlock, prevention and avoidance algorithms.
 Compare and contrast various memory management schemes.
 Understand the functionality of file systems.
 Understand the functionality I/O management.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Abraham Silberschatz, Peter Baer Galvin and Greg Gagne, “Operating System
Concepts”, 9th Edition, John Wiley and Sons Inc., 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, “Modern Operating Systems”, Second Edition, Pearson
Education, 2004.
2. Gary Nutt, “Operating Systems”, Third Edition, Pearson Education, 2004.
3. Harvey M. Deitel, “Operating Systems”, Third Edition, Pearson Education, 2004.
4. Ramez Elmasri, A. Gil Carrick, David Levine, “Operating Systems – A Spiral
Approach”, Tata McGraw Hill Edition, 2010.
5. Achyut S. Godbole, Atul Kahate, “Operating Systems”, McGraw Hill Education,
2016.
6. Daniel P Bovet and Marco Cesati, “Understanding the Linux kernel”, 3rd edition,
O‘Reilly, 2005.

Program
Course Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 2 - - - - 1 - - - - - - 2 - - -
CO 2 - 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 1 2 - -
CO 3 - - - 2 2 - - - - - - - - 1 - -
CO 4 - - - - - 2 - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO 5 - - 2 1 - - - - - - - - - - - 3
80
1904305 DATA STRUCTURES IN C LABORATORY LTPC
0042
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To implement linear and non-linear data structures
 To understand the different applications of linear data structure.
 To implement the different operation on search tree.
 To implement graph traversal algorithms
 To get familiarized to sorting and searching algorithms
List of experiments
1. Array implementation of Stack and Queue ADTs
2. Array implementation of List ADT
3. Linked list implementation of List, Stack and Queue ADTs
4. Applications of List and Stack
i. Polynomial manipulation
ii. Infix to post fix conversion
iii. Postfix Evaluation
5. Implementation of Binary Search Trees
6. Implementation of AVL Trees
7. Implementation of Heaps using Priority Queues.
8. Graph representation and Traversal algorithms
9. Implementation of searching methods
10. Implementation of and sorting algorithms
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
At the end of the course, the students will be able to:
 Write functions to implement linear and non-linear data structure operations
 Suggest appropriate linear / non-linear data structure operations for solving a given
problem
 Appropriately use the linear / non-linear data structure operations for a given
problem
 Apply efficient search method to solve the problems.
 Analyze the different sorting algorithms.
81
Program
Specific
Course Programme Outcomes (PO) Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 2 2 - - - - 2 3 3 - 3 3 - - -
CO 2 2 3 2 - - - - 2 3 2 - 3 - 3 - 2
CO 3 2 3 3 - - - - 2 3 3 - 3 - 3 - 2
CO 4 2 3 3 - - - - - 3 2 - 2 - - 3 2
CO 5 2 3 3 - - - - 2 - 3 - 2 - - 3 2
82
1904306 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING LABORATORY LTPC
0042
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To apply the concepts of classes.
 To understand and implement packages and interfaces.
 To handle I/O and exception handling.
 To understand file processing operations.
 To develop applications using event handling.
List of experiments
1. Write a java program to illustrate the concept of class and object creation.
2. Write a java program to implement constructors.
3. Write a java program to implement abstract class and abstract method.
4. Write a java program to implement Inheritance.
5. Write a java program to implement I/O, Throwing and Catching exceptions.
6. Write a java program to implement Designing Packages.
7. Write a java program to implement Interfaces in Java.
8. Write a java program to manipulate file operations.
9. Write a java program to create multithreads in Java applications.
10. Write a java program to implement Graphics classes
11. Write a java program to implement Event driven programming.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Develop and implement Java programs for simple applications that make use of
classes.
 Develop and implement packages and interfaces.
 Develop and implement Java programs with files and I/O.
 Develop and implement Java programs using exception handling and
multithreading.
 Develop and implement applications using event handling.
83
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 - - - - - 2 1 - - 1 2 - 2 - -
CO 2 - 3 3 3 - 1 - - - - - - 3 - - -
CO 3 2 - - - 2 - - - 2 - - - - - 2 -
CO 4 - - 2 1 - - - - 2 2 - - - 2 - -
CO 5 1 - 3 1 3 2 - - 3 3 - - 2 - - -
84
1904307 OPERATING SYSTEMS LABORATORY LTPC
0042
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To learn Unix commands and shell programming.
 To implement various CPU Scheduling Algorithms.
 To implement Process Creation and Inter Process Communication.
 To implement Deadlock Avoidance and Deadlock Detection Algorithms.
 To implement Page Replacement Algorithms, File Organization and File Allocation
Strategies.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Basics of UNIX commands
2. Write programs using the following system calls of UNIX operating system fork,
exec, getpid, exit, wait, close, stat, opendir, readdir
3. Shell Programming
4. Write C programs to implement the various CPU Scheduling Algorithms
5. Implementation of Semaphores
6. Implementation of Shared memory and IPC
7. Bankers Algorithm for Deadlock Avoidance
8. Implementation of Deadlock Detection Algorithm
9. Implementation of the following Memory Allocation Methods for fixed partition
a) First Fit
b) Worst Fit
c) Best Fit
10. Implementation of Paging Technique of Memory Management
11. Implementation of the following Page Replacement Algorithms
a) FIFO
b) LRU
c) LFU
12. Implementation of the following File Allocation Strategies
a) Sequential
b) Indexed
c) Linked
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
85
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Compare the performance of various CPU Scheduling Algorithms.
 Implement Deadlock avoidance and Detection Algorithms.
 Create processes and implement IPC and Semaphores.
 Analyze the performance of the various Page Replacement Algorithms.
 Implement File Allocation Strategies.
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 2 1 - - - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
CO 2 - - 2 1 - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO 3 - - - - - - - - 2 - 1 - - 2 - -
CO 4 1 - 2 - - - - - 1 - 2 - - - 1 -
CO 5 2 - - 2 - - - - - - 1 - 2 - - -
86
SEMESTER – IV
1918402 PROBABILITY AND QUEUEING THEORY LTPC

3104
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To provide necessary basic concepts in probability and random processes for
applications such as random signals, linear systems in communication
engineering.
 To understand the basic concepts of probability, one and two dimensional
random variables and to introduce some standard distributions applicable to
engineering which can describe real life phenomenon.
 To understand the basic concepts of random processes which are widely used
in IT fields.
 To understand the concept of queuing models and advanced model to apply in
engineering.
 To provide the required mathematical support in real life problems and develop
probabilistic models which can be used in several areas of science and
engineering.
UNIT - I: RANDOM VARIABLES AND PROBABILITY DISTRIBUTIONS 9L+3T
Random Variables - Discrete and continuous random variables – Moments – Moment

generating functions - Binomial, Poisson, Geometric, Uniform, Exponential and Normal
distributions.
UNIT - II: TWO - DIMENSIONAL RANDOM VARIABLES 9L+3T

Joint distributions – Marginal and conditional distributions – Covariance – Correlation and
linear regression – Transformation of random variables – Central Limit Theorem.
UNIT - III: RANDOM PROCESSES 9L+3T

Classification – Stationary process – Markov process - Poisson process – Discrete
parameter Markov chain – Chapman Kolmogorov equations – Limiting distributions.
UNIT - IV: QUEUEING MODELS 9L+3T

Markovian queues – Birth and death processes – Single and multiple server queueing
models – Little‘s formula - Queues with finite waiting rooms – Queues with impatient
customers : Balking and reneging.
87
UNIT - V: ADVANCED QUEUEING MODELS 9L+3T
M/G/1 queue – Pollaczek Khinchin formula - M/D/1 and M/EK/1 as special cases –
Series queues – Open Jackson networks.
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Understand the fundamental knowledge of the concepts of probability and have
knowledge of standard distributions which can describe real life phenomenon.
 Understand the basic concepts of one and two dimensional random variables and
apply in engineering applications.
 Apply the concept of random processes in engineering disciplines,
 Acquire skills in analyzing queueing models.
 Understand and characterize phenomenon which evolve with respect to time in a
probabilistic manner
TEXT BOOKS:
1. T. Veerarajan, - Probability, Statistics Random Processes with Queueing Theory
and Queueing Networks (Third Edition), Tata McGraw-Hill Publishers
2. Gross, D., Shortle, J.F, Thompson, J.M and Harris. C.M., ―Fundamentals of
Queueing Theory", Wiley Student 4th Edition, 2014.
3. Ibe, O.C., ―Fundamentals of Applied Probability and Random Processes",
Elsevier, 1st Indian Reprint, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. P.Sivaramakrishna Das, C.Vijayakumari , "Probability and Queueing Theory",
Second Edition, Pearson India Education Services Pvt. Ltd.
2. Hwei Hsu, "Schaum‘s Outline of Theory and Problems of Probability, Random
Variables and Random Processes", Tata McGraw Hill Edition, New Delhi, 2004.
3. Trivedi, K.S., "Probability and Statistics with Reliability, Queueing and Computer
Science Applications", 2nd Edition, John Wiley and Sons, 2002.
4. Yates, R.D. and Goodman. D. J., "Probability and Stochastic Processes", 2nd
Edition, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., Bangalore, 2012.
88
Program
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 3 3 - - - - - 1 1 - 1 1 - - -
CO 2 3 3 3 - - - - - 1 1 - 1 1 - - -
CO 3 3 3 3 - - - - - 1 1 - 1 1 - - -
CO 4 3 3 3 - - - - - 1 1 - 1 1 - - -
CO 5 3 3 3 - - - - - 1 1 - 1 1 - - -
89
1908006 COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To learn the basic structure and operations of a computer.
 To learn the arithmetic and logic unit and implementation of fixed-point and
floating point arithmetic unit
 To learn the basics of pipelined execution.
 To understand the parallelism and multi-core processors
 To understand the memory hierarchies, cache memories and virtual memories
and to learn the different ways of communication with I/O devices.
UNIT - I: BASIC STRUCTURE OF A COMPUTER SYSTEM 9

Functional Units – Basic Operational Concepts – Performance – Instructions: Language
of the Computer – Operations, Operands – Instruction representation – Logical operations
– decision making – MIPS Addressing– Bus structure – Bus operation.
UNIT - II: ARITHMETIC FOR COMPUTERS 9

Addition and Subtraction – Multiplication – Division – Floating Point Representation –
Floating Point Operations – Subword Parallelism.
UNIT - III: PROCESSOR AND CONTROL UNIT 9

A Basic MIPS implementation – Building a Datapath – Control Implementation Scheme –
Pipelining – Pipelined data path and control – Handling Data Hazards & Control Hazards
– Exceptions.
UNIT - IV: MEMORY & I/O SYSTEMS 9

Memory Hierarchy – memory technologies – cache memory – measuring and improving
cache performance – virtual memory, TLB‘s - Accessing I/O Devices, programmed I/O,
Interrupts – Direct Memory Access– Arbitration.
UNIT - V: PARALLELISIM 9
Instruction-level-parallelism - Parallel processing challenges – Flynn‘s classification –
SISD, MIMD, SIMD, SPMD, and Vector Architectures – Multi-core processors and other
Shared Memory Multiprocessors.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Understand the basics structure of computers, operations and instructions
 Design arithmetic and logic unit
 Understand pipelined execution and design control unit
 Understand parallel processing architectures
 Understand parallelism, multi-core processors, different memory systems and I/O
communication.
90
TEXT BOOKS:
1. David A. Patterson and John L. Hennessy, Computer Organization and Design: The
Hardware/Software Interface, Fifth Edition, Morgan Kaufmann / Elsevier, 2014.
2. Carl Hamacher, ZvonkoVranesic, SafwatZaky and NaraigManjikian, Computer
Organization and Embedded Systems, Sixth Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. William Stallings, Computer Organization and Architecture – Designing for
Performance, Eighth Edition, Pearson Education, 2010.
2. John P. Hayes, Computer Architecture and Organization, Third Edition, Tata
McGraw Hill, 2012.
3. John L. Hennessey and David A. Patterson, Computer Architecture – A Quantitative
Approach, Morgan Kaufmann / Elsevier Publishers, Fifth Edition, 2012.
Program
Course
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 - - 2 - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
CO 2 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - 3 - -
CO 3 2 - 3 - - - - - - - - - - - 3 -
CO 4 - - 3 2 - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
CO 5 - - - 3 3 - - - - - - - - - 3 -
1904001 DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM LTPC

91
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To learn the fundamentals of data models and to represent a database system using
ER diagrams.
 To study SQL and relational database design.
 To understand the fundamental concepts of transaction processing- concurrency
control techniques recovery procedures.
 To have an introductory knowledge about Query Processing.
 To analyze the different DB storage like XML,ODMG etc. in distributed environment
UNIT - I: INTRODUCTION TO DATABASES 10

Purpose of Database System – Views of data – Data Models – Database System
Architecture – Introduction to relational databases – Relational Model – Keys – Entity-
Relationship model – E-R Diagrams – Enhanced-ER Model – ER-to-Relational Mapping.
UNIT - II: SQL FUNDAMENTALS 8

Relational Algebra – SQL fundamentals – Advanced SQL features–Triggers–Nested
Queries-Joins-Inner Join-Outer join-Functions.
UNIT - III: NORMALIZATION 9

Functional Dependencies – Non-loss Decomposition – First, Second, Third Normal Forms,
Dependency Preservation – Boyce Codd Normal Form – Multi-valued Dependencies and
Fourth Normal Form – Join Dependencies and Fifth Normal Form.
UNIT - IV: TRANSACTION PROCESSING AND CONCURRENCY 9

CONTROL
Transaction Concepts – ACID Properties – Schedules – Serializability – Concurrency
Control – Need for Concurrency – Locking Protocols – Two Phase Locking – Deadlock –
Transaction Recovery - Save Points – Isolation Levels – SQL Facilities for Concurrency
and Recovery.
UNIT - V: IMPLEMENTATION TECHNIQUES 9

RAID – File Organization – Organization of Records in Files – Indexing and Hashing –
Ordered Indices – B+ tree Index Files – B tree Index Files – Static Hashing – Dynamic
Hashing – Query Processing Overview – Query optimization using Heuristics and Cost
Estimation Distributed Databases.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
92
 Classify the modern and futuristic database applications based on size and
complexity
 Map ER model to Relational model to perform database design effectively
 Write queries using normalization criteria and optimize queries.
 Compare and contrast various indexing strategies in different database systems
 Appraise how advanced databases differ from traditional databases.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Abraham Silberschatz, Henry F. Korth, S. Sudharshan, Database System Concepts,
Sixth Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2016
2. Ramez Elmasri, Shamkant B. Navathe,- Fundamentals of Database Systems, Sixth
Edition, Pearson, 2016.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. C. J. Date, A.Kannan, S. Swamynathan, - An Introduction to Database Systems,
Eighth Edition, Pearson Education, 2006.
2. Raghu Ramakrishnan, ―Database Management Systems, Fourth Edition,

McGraw-Hill College Publications, 2015.G.K.Gupta, "Database Management
Systems, Tata McGraw Hill, 2011.
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 - 3 - 2 - 1 - - - - - 2 - - -
CO 2 3 3 - - 2 - - - - - 2 - - 3 - -
CO 3 2 1 - 2 3 - - - - - - - - 2 - -
CO 4 - - 2 - - 1 - - 2 - 1 - - - 2 -
CO 5 - 3 - - - - - - 2 - - - - - - 1
93
1904402 DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF ALGORITHM LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To understand and apply the algorithm analysis techniques.
 To analyze and understand the solution to a problem.
 To critically analyze the efficiency of alternative algorithmic solutions for the problem
 To understand different algorithm design techniques.
 To understand the limitations of Algorithmic power.
Notion of an Algorithm – Fundamentals of Algorithmic Problem Solving – Important
Problem Types – Fundamentals of the Analysis of Algorithmic Efficiency –Asymptotic
Notations and their properties. Analysis Framework– Empirical analysis - Mathematical
analysis for Recursive and Non-recursive algorithms, Statement of master theorem-
Visualization
UNIT - II: BRUTE FORCE METHOD 9
Brute Force – Computing an– String Matching- Closest-Pair and Convex-Hull Problems -
Exhaustive Search - Travelling Salesman Problem- Knapsack Problem - Assignment
problem.
UNIT - III: DIVIDE-AND-CONQUER TECHNIQUE 9
Divide and Conquer Methodology – Binary Search – Merge sort – Quick sort – Heap Sort -
Multiplication of Large Integers – Closest-Pair and Convex - Hull Problems.
UNIT - IV: DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING AND GREEDY TECHNIQUE 9

Dynamic programming – Principle of optimality - Coin changing problem, Computing a
Binomial Coefficient – Floyd‘s algorithm – Multi stage graph - Optimal Binary Search Trees
– Knapsack Problem and Memory functions. Greedy Technique – Container loading problem
- Prim‘s algorithm and Kruskal's Algorithm – 0/1 Knapsack problem, Optimal Merge pattern
- Huffman Trees.
UNIT - V: COPING WITH THE LIMITATIONS OF ALGORITHM POWER 9

Lower - Bound Arguments - P, NP NP- Complete and NP Hard Problems. Backtracking –
n-Queen problem - Hamiltonian Circuit Problem – Subset Sum Problem. Branch and Bound
– LIFO Search and FIFO search - Assignment problem – Knapsack Problem – Travelling
Salesman Problem -Approximation Algorithms for NP-Hard Problems – Travelling Salesman
problem – Knapsack problem.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
94
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Design algorithms for various computing problems.
 Analyze and understand the solution to a problem
 Analyze the time and space complexity of algorithms.
 Critically analyze the different algorithm design techniques for a given problem.
 Modify existing algorithms to improve efficiency.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Anany Levitin, ―Introduction to the Design and Analysis of Algorithms, Third
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ellis Horowitz, Sartaj Sahni and Sanguthevar Rajasekaran, Computer Algorithms/
C++, Second Edition, Universities Press, 2007.
2. Parag H.Deve, Himanshu B. Dave“ Design and Analysis of Algorithms“, Pearson
Education, 2008
3. Thomas H.Cormen, Charles E.Leiserson, Ronald L. Rivest and Clifford Stein,
Introduction
to Algorithms, Third Edition, PHI Learning Private Limited, 2012.
4. Alfred V. Aho, John E. Hopcroft and Jeffrey D. Ullman, ―Data Structures and
Algorithms,
Pearson Education, Reprint 2006.
5. Harsh Bhasin, - Algorithms Design and Analysis, Oxford university press, 2015.
6. http://nptel.ac.in/

Program
Specific
Course Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 2 - 3 - 3 2 - - - - - - - 2 2 -
CO 2 2 3 - 3 2 2 - - - - 2 - - 2 3 -
CO 3 2 3 - 3 2 2 - - - - 2 - - - 3 -
CO 4 2 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 3 -
CO 5 2 - - - 2 - - - - - 2 - - 2 2 -
1908008 LTPC
OBJECT ORIENTED ANALYSIS AND DESIGN
95
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To understand the fundamentals of object modeling and differentiate Unified
Process from other approaches.
 To design with static UML diagrams.
 To design with the UML dynamic and implementation diagrams.
 To improve the software design with design patterns.
 To test the software against its requirements specification
UNIT - I: UNIFIED PROCESS AND USE CASE DIAGRAMS 9
Introduction to OOAD with OO Basics - Unified Process – UML diagrams – Use Case –Case
study – the Next Gen POS system, Inception -Use case Modelling – Relating Use cases –
include, extend and generalization – When to use Use-cases.
UNIT - II: DESIGN PATTERNS AND METHODOLOGY 9
GRASP: Designing objects with responsibilities – Creator – Information expert – Low

Coupling – High Cohesion – Controller Design Patterns – creational – factory method –
structural – Bridge – Adapter – behavioural – Strategy – observer –Applying GoF design
patterns – Mapping design to code – methodology – Survey – Rumbaugh, Booch, Jacobson
Methods.
UNIT - III: STATIC UML DIAGRAMS 9
Class Diagram–– Elaboration – Domain Model – Finding conceptual classes and description
classes – Associations – Attributes – Domain model refinement – Finding conceptual class
Hierarchies – Aggregation and Composition - Relationship between sequence diagrams and
use cases – When to use Class Diagrams.
UNIT - IV: DYNAMIC AND IMPLEMENTATION UML DIAGRAMS 9
Dynamic Diagrams – UML interaction diagrams - System sequence diagram – Collaboration

diagram – When to use Communication Diagrams - State machine diagram and Modelling –
When to use State Diagrams - Activity diagram – When to use activity diagrams
Implementation Diagrams - UML package diagram - When to use package diagrams -
Component and Deployment Diagrams – When to use Component and Deployment
diagrams.
UNIT - V: TESTING 9
Object Oriented Methodologies – Software Quality Assurance – Impact of object orientation

on Testing – Develop Test Cases and Test Plans ,CASE STUDY: Health care, Student
Marks Analysing system, CASE studies Tools: Star UML/ UML
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
96
 Express software design with UML diagrams
 Design software applications using OO concepts.
 Identify various scenarios based on software requirements
 Transform UML based software design into pattern based design using design
patterns
 Create code from design
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Craig Larman, ―Applying UML and Patterns: An Introduction to Object-Oriented
Analysis and Design and Iterative Development‖, Third Edition, Pearson Education,
2005.
2. Ali Bahrami - Object Oriented Systems Development - McGraw Hill International
Edition - 1999.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Erich Gamma, a n d Richard Helm, Ralph Johnson, John Vlissides, ―Design
patterns: Elements of Reusable Object-Oriented Software, Addison-Wesley, 1995.
2. Martin Fowler, ―UML Distilled: A Brief Guide to the Standard Object Modeling
Language, Third edition, Addison Wesley, 2003.
Program
Specific
Course Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 2 - 2 3 - - - - - 3 - 2 1 - - -
CO 2 - - 3 3 - - - - - - 1 - 2 - -
CO 3 1 - 3 3 - - - - - 2 - - - - 1 -
CO 4 - 2 - - - 3 3 - - 2 - - - 1 - -
CO 5 - - - - 2 3 3 - - 1 - - - - 1 -
97
1915001 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce and educate the students on the concept of Human Values
 To enable the students to have awareness on Engineering Ethics theories and models.
 To make students understand the code of ethics and fundamental principles in social
experiments in engineering.
 To educate on safety and risk aspects in engineering and to appreciate the rights of others.
 To create awareness about international issues related to ethics..
UNIT – I: HUMAN VALUES 9
Moral values and Ethics – Integrity – Work ethic – Service learning – Civic virtue – Respect
for others – Living peacefully – Caring – Sharing – Honesty – Courage – Valuing time –
Cooperation – Commitment – Empathy – Self-confidence – Character – Introduction to Yoga
and Meditation for professional excellence and stress management - Simple Living and High
Thinking, Science and Spirituality.
UNIT – II: ENGINEERING ETHICS 9
Senses of ‘Engineering Ethics’ – Variety of moral issues – Types of inquiry – Moral dilemmas
– Moral Autonomy – Kohlberg’s theory – Gilligan’s theory – Consensus and Controversy –
Models of Professional roles – Theories about right action – Self-interest – Customs and
Religion – Uses of Ethical Theories.
UNIT – III: ENGINEERING AS SOCIAL EXPERIMENTATION 9

Engineering as Experimentation – Engineers as responsible Experimenters - Engineer’s
Responsibilities to Economically Deprived People and Environment, Corruption – Codes of
Ethics- Fundamental Principles – A Balanced Outlook on Law – Challenger Case Study
UNIT – IV: SAFETY, RESPONSIBILITIES AND RIGHTS 9
Safety and Risk – Assessment of Safety and Risk – Risk Benefit Analysis and Reducing
Risk –Government Regulator's approach to risks - The Three Mile Island, Chernobyl &
Bhopal Case Studies, Greenery Effects - Collegiality and Loyalty - Respect for Authority –
Collective Bargaining – Confidentiality – Conflicts of Interest – Unethical Behaviour at Work
Place – Reporting Unethical Behaviour- Professional Rights – Employee Rights – Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR).
98
UNIT – V: INTERNATIONAL ISSUES 9
Multinational corporations - Business ethics - Environmental ethics - Internet ethics - Role in
Technological Development - Weapons development-engineers as managers - Consulting
Engineers - Engineers as expert witnesses and advisors - Honesty - leadership - Sample
code of conduct ethics - ASME, ASCE, IEEE, Institution of Engineers (India),Indian Institute
of Materials Management Institution of electronics and telecommunication engineers (IETE),
India – Corporate Social Responsibility, Indian and Western Culture – Cyber Crime.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
 Students should be able to understand and apply ethics in society on ethical issues.
 Students will be able to get understanding on senses of engineering ethics.
 Students will be able to realize Western culture related to ethics.
 Students will understand risk and safety issues related to engineering.
 Student will have an understanding of engineer’s responsibility to society and code of ethics
TEXT BOOKS:
1. World Community Service Centre, “Value Education", Vethathiri publications, Erode,
2011.
2. R. Subramanian, ‘Professional Ethics’ Oxford University Press, 2 nd Edition 2017
3. R. S. Nagarazan, ‘ A Textbook on Professional Ethics and Human Values’ New Age
International Publishers, 2015
4. Sekhar, R.C., Ethical Choices in Business Response Books, New Delhi,Sage
Publications,1997
REFERENCES:
1. Langford, Duncan (EDT): Internet Ethics, London, Macmillan Press Ltd., 2000.
2. Erwann, M. David, Michele S. Shauf, Computers, Ethics and Society, Oxford University
Press,2003
3. Alan Kitson and Robert Campebell: ”The Ethical Organisation”, Red Globe Press, 2008.
4. Govindarajan M, Natarajan S, Senthil Kumar V. S, “Professional Ethics and Human
Values”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2013.
5. Mike Martin and Roland Schinzinger, “Ethics in Engineering”, McGraw Hill, New York,
3rd edition (2017).

99
Program
Course
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 - - - - - 3 3 2 - - - - 1 - - -
CO 2 - - - - - - - 3 - - - - - - 1 -
CO 3 - - - - - 3 3 2 - - - - - - 1 -
CO 4 - -- - - - 2 3 - - - - 1 - - -
CO 5 - - - - - - - 1 - - - - - - - -
1904002 DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM LABORATORY LTPC

100
0042
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 Learn to create and use a database
 Be familiarized with a query language
 Have hands on experience on DDL Commands
 Have a good understanding of DML Commands and DCL commands
 Be Exposed to different applications
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Creation of a database and writing SQL queries to retrieve information from the
database.
2. Performing Insertion, Deletion, Modifying, Altering, Updating and Viewing records
based on conditions.
3. Creating an Employee database to set various constraints and Creation of Views
Indexes, Save point.
4.Joins and Nested Queries.
5. Study of PL/SQL block.
6. Write a PL/SQL block to satisfy some conditions by accepting input from the user.
7. Write a PL/SQL block that handles all types of exceptions.
8. Creation of Procedures.
9. Creation of database triggers and functions
10. Creation of Database in Ms Access.
11. Database connectivity using Front End Tools (Application Development using Oracle/
Mysql)
Mini Project
a) Inventory Control System.
b) Material Requirement Processing.
c) Hospital Management System.
d) Railway Reservation System.
e) Personal Information System
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
101
 Use typical data definition and manipulation commands.
 Design application to test nested and join queries.
 Implement simple application that use views.
 Implement application that requires front end tools.
 Critically analyze the use of tables and functions.
Program
Course
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 - 3 - 2 - 1 - - - - 3 - 3 - -
CO 2 - 3 - - 2 - - - - - 2 - - - - 3
CO 3 - 1 - 2 3 - - 2 - - - - - - 3 -
CO 4 - - 2 - - - - - 2 1 - - - 3 - -
CO 5 - 3 - - - 1 - - 2 1 - - 3 - - -
1904405 OBJECT ORIENTED ANALYSIS AND DESIGN LABORATORY LTPC
102
0042
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To capture the requirements specification for an intended software system
 To draw the UML diagrams for the given specification
 To map the design properly to code
 To test the software system thoroughly for all scenarios
 To improve the design by applying appropriate design patterns.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
UML DESIGN
1. To develop a problem statement.
2. Identify Use Cases and develop the Use Case model.
3. Identify the conceptual classes and develop a domain model with UML Class diagram.
4. Using the identified scenarios, find the interaction between objects and represent them
using UML Sequence diagrams.
5. Draw relevant state charts and activity diagrams.
6. Identify the User Interface, Domain objects, and Technical services. Draw the partial
layered, logical architecture diagram with UML package diagram notation.
7. Develop and test the Technical services layer.
8. Develop and test the Domain objects layer.
9. Develop and test the User interface layer
Suggested domains for Mini-Project ( any 3 can done):

1. Passport automation system.
2. Exam Registration
3. Stock maintenance system.
4. Online course reservation system
5. Software personnel management system
6. Recruitment system
7. Conference Management System
8. BPO Management System
9. Library Management System
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
103
 Perform OO analysis and design for a given problem specification.
 Identify and map basic software requirements in UML mapping.
 Use the UML analysis and design diagrams.
 Improve the software quality using design patterns and to explain the
rationale behind applying specific design patterns
 Create code from design.
LIST OF EQUIPMENTS FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:
SOFTWARE: Rational Rose Or Agro UML

HARDWARE: Standalone desktops - 30 Nos. (or) Server supporting 30 terminals or
more.
Program
Outcomes Outcomes(PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 2 2 - - - - - - 1 3 - 2 3 - - -
CO 2 3 - 2 - 1 - - - - - - - - - 3 -
CO 3 2 - 1 2 - - - - - - 2 - - - 2 -
CO 4 - - - - 1 2 - - - - - - - 2 - 2
CO 5 - - - - - - 2 2 - - - - - - 3 2
1919001 COMMUNICATION SKILLS LABORATORY – PROJECT BASED LTPC
104
0020
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
The Course will enable learners to:
 Equip students with the English language skills required for the successful undertaking
of academic studies with primary emphasis on academic speaking and listening skills.
 Provide guidance and practice in basic general and classroom conversation and to
engage in specific academic speaking activities and make effective presentations.
 Improve general and academic listening skills and technical writing skills.
 Strengthen the reading skills of students of engineering.
 Provide more opportunities to develop their project and proposal writing skills.
UNIT - I: INFORMAL COMMUNICATION AN INTRODUCTION 6

Listening - Listening as a key skill- its importance- Speaking - give personal information - ask
for personal information - express ability - enquire about ability – rephrase for clarification or
emphasis - Improving pronunciation – Articulation of speaking –vowel sounds. Reading –
Strategies for effective reading- Read and recognize different text types in a newspaper -
Writing-Plan before writing- Develop a paragraph: topic sentence, supporting sentences,
concluding sentence.
UNIT - II: MECHANICSOF BASIC COMMUNICATION 6

Listening - Listen to a process information- Speaking - asking for details formal/informal – give
views, opinions and justification of a news- consonant sounds –diphthongs -.Reading-Read
for vocabulary through scientific invention summarise the same into a paragraph- . Writing-
compare and contrast ideas using adjectives from multiple sources stating reasons and
examples to support ideas. Write a paragraph with reasons and examples- Write a rejoint to a
newspaper expressing opinions on particular news.
UNIT - III: NUANCES OF LSRW 6

Listening - Lexical chunking for accuracy and fluency- factors that influence fluency- listen for
and follow the gist- listen for detail Speaking - deliver a five-minute informal talk - invite and
offer - accept - decline - take leave - word stress – stress rules-ability to recognize RP sound- .
Reading– Skimming / Scanning a text to apply both the concepts – to search – to analyze.
Writing–Use of dictionary and usage of synonyms- editing and proof reading.
105
UNIT - IV: TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION – BASIC PRESENTATION SKILLS 6
Listening - Being an active listener: giving verbal and non-verbal feedback- listening to a
podcast of a native speaker and reciprocating Speaking - participating in a group discussion -
conversational speech listening to and participating in conversations - persuade.– Sentence
stress – intonations types-features of connected speech Reading– Genre and Organization
of Ideas- note taking and summarizing Writing–Email writing- Job application- Blog writing.
UNIT - V: COMMUNICATION SKILLS FOR FORMAL OCCASION 6

Listening to documentaries and make notes (TED talks) Speaking -Power point presentation
- strategies for presentations and interactive communication - group/pair presentations –use
stress and intonation to convey meaning and nuances of meaning clearly- Reading– Technical
passages for comprehension- understanding how the text positions the reader- Writing–
Statement of Purpose - analyse the situation in a picture / photo and write suitable description
with a proper title.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
The lab course is offered as an Employability Enhancement Course
The Course will have an Internal End semester exam includes a project work.
The Students need to have 75% attendance for the completion of the course.
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Listen and respond appropriately.
 Make effective presentations
 Participate confidently and appropriately in conversations both formal and informal
Write winning job applications.
 Read and evaluate texts critically.

 Display critical thinking in various professional contexts.
106
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Gramer F. Margot and Colin S. Ward Reading and Writing (Level 3) Oxford University
Press: Oxford, 2011
2. Debra Daise, CharlNorloff, and Paul Carne Reading and Writing (Level 4) Oxford
University Press: Oxford, 2011
3. Brooks,Margret. Skills for Success. Listening and Speaking. Level 4 Oxford University
Press, Oxford: 2011.
4. Richards,C.Jack. & David Bholke.Speak Now Level3. Oxford University
Press,Oxford:2010
5. Davis, Jason and Rhonda LIss.Effective Academic Writing (Level 3) Oxford University
Press: Oxford, 2006
6. E. Suresh Kumar and et al. Enriching Speaking and Writing Skills. Second Edition.
Orient Black swan: Hyderabad, 2012
7. Petelin, Roslyn and Marsh Durham. The Professional Writing Guide: Knowing Well and
Knowing Why. Business & Professional Publishing: Australia, 2004.
8. Bhatnagar, Nitin and MamtaBhatnagar. Communicative English for Engineers and
Professionals. Pearson: New Delhi, 2010.

Program
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 3 2 3 3 - - - - 3 - 1 2 - 2 1
CO 2 3 2 3 2 2 - 2 - - 3 - 1 2 - 1 1
CO 3 3 2 3 2 2 - 2 - - 3 - 1 2 - 1 1
CO 4 3 3 - - - - 3 - - 2 - 1 1 - 1 1
CO 5 3 3 - 2 - - - - - 3 - 1 1 - 1 1
SEMESTER - V
107
1904003 COMPUTER NETWORKS LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To understand the protocol layering and physical level communication
 To understand the various components required to build different networks.
 To learn the functions of network layer and the various routing protocols.
 To familiarize the functions and protocols of the Transport layer.
 To understand and analyze the performance of network applications.
UNIT - I: INTRODUCTION AND PHYSICAL LAYER 9

Networks – Network Types – TCP/IP Protocol suite – OSI Model – Physical Layer:
Performance – Transmission media – Switching – Circuit-switched Networks – Packet
Switching.
UNIT - II: DATA-LINK LAYER & MEDIA ACCESS 9
Introduction – DLC Services – HDLC – PPP - Media Access Control - Wired LANs:
Ethernet - Wireless LANs: IEEE 802.11, Bluetooth – Connecting Devices: Hubs,
Switches- Routers.
UNIT - III: NETWORK LAYER 9
Network Layer Services – Packet switching – IPV4 Addresses: Classful addressing-
classless addressing – Network Layer Protocol: Internet Protocol (IP) – Routing
Algorithms: Distance vector routing- Link State routing- Unicast routing algorithm: OSPF–
Multicasting Basics – IPV6 Addressing – IPV6 Protocol.
UNIT - IV: TRANSPORT LAYER 9
Introduction – Transport Layer Protocols – Services – Port Numbers – User Datagram
Protocol (UDP) – Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) – SCTP.
UNIT - V: APPLICATION LAYER 9
WWW and HTTP – FTP – Email –Telnet –SSH – DNS – SNMP.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Understand the basic layers and its functions in computer networks.
 Understand the basics of how data flows from one node to another.
 Analyze and design routing algorithms.
 Design protocols for various functions in the network.
 Understand the working of various application layer protocols.
108
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, Data Communications and Networking, Fifth Edition TMH,
2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Larry L. Peterson, Bruce S. Davie, “Computer Networks: A Systems Approach”,
Fifth Edition, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers Inc., 2012.
2. William Stallings, “Data and Computer Communications”, Tenth Edition, Pearson
Education, 2013.
3. Nader F. Mir, “Computer and Communication Networks”, Second Edition,

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 2 - - 3 - - - - - - - 2 3 - -
CO 2 2 - - - 3 - - - - - - - - 2 3 -
CO 3 - 3 - - 2 - - - - - 3 - 2 - - -
CO 4 - - 2 - 3 - 3 - - - - - - 3 2 -
CO 5 3 - 2 - - - - - - - 2 - 2 - 3 -
1904502 AUTOMATA THEORY LTPC
109
3104
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To understand and design various Computing models like Finite State Machine,
Pushdown Automata, and Turing Machine.
 To understand the various types of grammar and the corresponding languages.
 To make the students understand the use of automata theory in Compliers &
System programming.
 To understand Decidability and Undesirability of various problems
 To strengthen the students’ ability to carry out formal and higher studies in
computer science.
UNIT - I: AUTOMATA FUNDAMENTALS 9 L + 3T
Introduction - Languages: Alphabets and Strings - Finite Automata - Deterministic Finite
Automata - Non-deterministic Finite Automata – Equivalence of NFA and DFA - Finite
Automata with Epsilon Transitions.
UNIT - II: REGULAR EXPRESSIONS & LANGUAGES 9 L + 3T

Regular Expressions - FA and Regular Expressions - Proving Languages not to be regular
-Closure Properties of Regular Languages - Equivalence and Minimization of Automata.
UNIT - III: CONTEXT FREE GRAMMAR AND LANGUAGES 9 L + 3T

CFG - Parse Trees - Ambiguity in Grammars and Languages - Normal Forms for CFG -
Definition of the Pushdown Automata – Languages of a Pushdown Automata -
Equivalence of Pushdown Automata and CFG - Pumping Lemma for CFL .
UNIT - IV: TURING MACHINES 9 L + 3T
Turing Machines – Introduction – Formal definition of Turing machines – Instantaneous
descriptions – Turing machines as Acceptors – Turing machine as Transducers
computable languages and functions - Deterministic TM, Multi-track and Multitape Turing
Machine- Programming Techniques for TM.
UNIT - V: COMPUTATIONAL COMPLEXITY 9 L + 3T

Undecidability- Basic definitions- Decidable and undecidable problems - Properties of
Recursive and Recursively enumerable languages –-Post‘s Correspondence Problem–
complexity classes – introduction to NP-Hardness and NP-Completeness.
TOTAL: 45L + 15T PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
110
 Explain Automata concepts, Automata and complexity and to adopt a suitable
process for finite automata
 Important structural representations other than automata
 Analyze the different types of proofs such as deductive, inductive, proof by
contradiction and proof by counter examples
 Difference between DFA and NFA and central concepts of automata theory
 Identify the Difference between Finite automata and Regular Expressions
TEXT BOOKS:
1. J.E.Hopcroft, R.Motwani and J.D Ullman, - Introduction to Automata Theory,

Languages and Computations, ThirdEdition, Pearson Education, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. H.R.Lewis and C.H.Papadimitriou, Elements of the theory of Computation, Second
Edition, PHI, 2003.
2. J.Martin, Introduction to Languages and the Theory of Computation, Third Edition,
TMH, 2003.
3. Micheal Sipser, Introduction of the Theory and Computation, Thomson Brokecole,
1997.

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 - - 2 - 2 - - - - - - 3 - - -
CO 2 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - 3 -
CO 3 3 - 3 - 2 - - - - - - - - - 3 -
CO 4 3 - - - - - - - - - 2 - - 2 - -
CO 5 3 - - 3 - - - - - 2 - 2 - - - 3
1908501 WEB TECHNOLOGY LTPC

3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
111
 To understand about client-server communication and protocols used during
communication
 To design interactive web pages using Scripting languages.
 To learn server side programming using servlets and JSP.
 To develop web pages using XML/XSLT.
 To develop the web applications using web development framework.
UNIT - I: WEB SITE BASICS AND HTML 9
Web Essentials: Clients, Servers, and Communication. The Internet-Basic Internet Protocols
-The World Wide Web-HTTP request message-response message-Web Clients Web
Servers. Markup Languages: XHTML. An Introduction to HTML History-Versions-Basic
XHTML Syntax and Semantics-Some Fundamental HTML Elements-Relative URLs-Lists-
tables-Frames-Forms-HTML 5.0.
UNIT - II: CSS AND CLIENT SIDE SCRIPTING 9
Style Sheets: CSS-Introduction to Cascading Style Sheets-Features-Core Syntax-Style
Sheets and HTML-Style Rule Cascading and Inheritance-Text Properties-Box Model
Normal FlowBox Layout-Beyond the Normal Flow-CSS3.0. Client-Side Programming: The
JavaScript Language-History and Versions Introduction JavaScript in Perspective-Syntax-
Variables and Data Types-Statements-Operators-Literals-Functions-Objects-Arrays-Built-
inObjects-JavaScript Debuggers.
UNIT - III: CLIENT SIDE TECHNOLOGIES 9
Model-View-Controller Paradigm, Representing Web Data: XML-Documents and
Vocabularies-Versions and Declaration-Namespaces-DOM based XML processing Event-
oriented Parsing: SAX-Transforming XML Documents-Selecting XML Data: XPATH-
Template based Transformations: XSLT-Displaying XML Documents in Browsers.
UNIT - IV: SERVER SIDE TECHNOLOGIES 9
Server-Side Programming: Java Servlets-Architecture -Overview-A Servlet-Generating
Dynamic Content-Life Cycle-Parameter Data-Sessions-Cookies-URL Rewriting-Other
Capabilities-Data Storage Servlets and Concurrency-Databases and Java Servlets.
Separating Programming and Presentation: JSP Technology Introduction-JSP and Servlets-
Running JSP Applications Basic JSP-JavaBeans Classes and JSP-Tag Libraries and Files-
Support for the Model-View-Controller Paradigm-Databases and JSP.
UNIT - V: APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT ENVIRONMENT 9

Overview of MVC architecture – Java Server Faces: Features – Components – Tags –
Struts: Working principle of Struts – Building model components – View components –
Controller components – Forms with Struts – Presentation tags – Developing Web
applications – Hibernate: Configuration Settings – Mapping persistent classes – Working
with persistent objects – Concurrency – Transactions – Caching – Queries for retrieval of
objects – Spring: Framework – Controllers – Developing simple applications.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
112
 Design simple web pages using markup languages like HTML and XHTML.
 Design web pages using CSS
 Create dynamic web pages using DHTML and java script that is easy to navigate
and use.
 Program server side webpages that have to process request from client side web
pages.
 Represent web data using XML and develop web pages using JSP.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Jeffrey C. Jackson, "Web Technologies--A Computer Science Perspective",
Pearson Education, 2006.
2. Deitel, Deitel, Goldberg, “Internet & World Wide Web How to Program”, Third
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Robert. W. Sebesta, "Programming the World Wide Web", Fourth Edition, Pearson
Education, 2007
2. Marty Hall and Larry Brown, “Core Web Programming Second Edition”, Volume I
and II, Pearson Education, 2001.
3. Bates, “Developing Web Applications”, Wiley, 2006.

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 - - - - - - - 1 - - - 3 - - -
CO 2 - 2 3 - - 3 - - - - - - - 2 - -
CO 3 - - - 3 - - - 1 - - 2 - - 3 2 -
CO 4 3 - - - - - 3 - - - - 2 - - 3 1
CO 5 1 - - - 3 - - - - - - 1 - 1 - 3
1908507 DATA WAREHOUSING AND DATA MINING LTPC

3003
113
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 Be familiar with the concepts of data warehouse.
 Be familiar with techniques of data mining.
 Be acquainted with the tools and techniques used for Knowledge Discovery in
Databases.
 Be familiar with data mining functionalities.
 To understand the applications of data mining.
UNIT - I: DATA WAREHOUSING 9
Data warehousing Components –Building a Data warehouse –- Mapping the Data

Warehouse to a Multiprocessor Architecture – DBMS Schemas for Decision Support – Data
Extraction, Cleanup, and Transformation Tools –Metadata.
UNIT - II: BUSINESS ANALYSIS 9
Reporting and Query tools and Applications – Tool Categories – The Need for Applications
– Cognos Impromptu – Online Analytical Processing (OLAP) – Need – Multidimensional
Data Model – OLAP Guidelines – Multidimensional versus Multirelational OLAP –
Categories of Tools – OLAP Tools and the Internet.
UNIT - III: DATA MINING 9
Introduction – Data – Types of Data – Data Mining Functionalities – Interestingness of

Patterns – Classification of Data Mining Systems – Data Mining Task Primitives –
Integration of a Data Mining System with a Data Warehouse – Issues –Data Preprocessing.
UNIT - IV: ASSOCIATION RULE MINING AND CLASSIFICATION 9
Mining Frequent Patterns, Associations and Correlations – Mining Methods – Mining

various Kinds of Association Rules – Correlation Analysis – Constraint Based Association
Mining – Classification and Prediction - Basic Concepts - Decision Tree Induction -
Bayesian Classification – Rule Based Classification – Classification by Back propagation
– Support Vector Machines – Associative Classification – Lazy Learners – Other
Classification Methods – Prediction.
UNIT - V: CLUSTERING AND TRENDS IN DATA MINING 9

Cluster Analysis - Types of Data – Categorization of Major Clustering Methods – K-means–
Partitioning Methods – Hierarchical Methods - Density-Based Methods –Grid Based
Methods – Model-Based Clustering Methods – Clustering High Dimensional Data -
Constraint – Based Cluster Analysis – Outlier Analysis – Data Mining Applications.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
114
 Understand the basic concepts of Data Warehouse.
 Apply the data warehouse concepts in business analysis.
 Apply data mining techniques and methods to large data sets.
 Understand the concepts of Association and Prediction.
 Compare and contrast the various classifiers.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Alex Berson and Stephen J.Smith, “Data Warehousing, Data Mining and OLAP”,
Tata McGraw – Hill Edition, Thirteenth Reprint 2008.
2. Jiawei Han and Micheline Kamber, “Data Mining Concepts and Techniques”, Third
Edition, Elsevier, 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Pang-Ning Tan, Michael Steinbach and Vipin Kumar, “Introduction to Data Mining”,
Person Education, 2007.
2. K.P. Soman, ShyamDiwakar and V. Aja, “Insight into Data Mining Theory and
Practice”, Eastern Economy Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2006.
3. G. K. Gupta, “Introduction to Data Mining with Case Studies”, Eastern Economy
Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2006.
4. Daniel T.Larose, “Data Mining Methods and Models”, Wiley-Interscience, 2006.

Programme Outcomes (PO) PSO
Course
Outcomes 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO 1 2 - - - - - 2 - - - - - 2 - - -
CO 2 - - 2 - - 2 2 - - - - - - 1 - -
CO 3 - - 2 - - - - - - - - - - - 1 -
CO 4 - - - 2 - 1 - - - - - - - - - 2
CO 5 - - - 2 - - - - - - - - - - - -
1908510 WEB TECHNOLOGY LABORATORY LTPC
115
0042
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
The student should be made:
 To design interactive web pages using HTML.
 To apply CSS style rules for dynamic web pages.
 To design interactive web pages using Scripting languages.
 To learn server side programming using servlets and JSP.
 To develop web pages using XML/XSLT.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. HTML
I. Simple HTML using
Heading elements
Text Elements
Logical Styles
Physical Styles
Ordered , Unordered and Definition list
II. Hyper Links
Image Link - Link to page containing Images and Videos
File Link - Time table
Single Page Link
III. Using Frames
Navigation Frame
Floating Frame
Inline Frame
IV. Registration Form with Table
2. CSS - Inline Style , Internal Style and External Style Sheets
3. DHTML
I. Use user defined function to get array of values and sort them in ascending order
II. Demonstrate String and Math Object’s predefined methods
III. Demonstrate Array Objects and Date Object’s predefined methods
IV. Exception Handling
V. Calendar Creation: Display all month

Validation of registration form
116
Open a Window from the current window
Change color of background at each click of button or refresh of a page
Display calendar for the month and year selected from combo box
OnMouseover event
4. JSP
I. Create a welcome Cookie (Hit for a page) and display different image and
textcontent each time when the user hit the page
II. List a table of content and navigate within the pages
III. Demonstrate Request and Response object using HTML Form IV. Database
Connection to display all the values in the table
5. Java Servlets
I. Simple Servlets
II. Servlets with HTML form
III. Cookie creation and retrieval using servlet
6. XML
I. Create any catalog
II. Display the catalog created using CSS or XSL
III. Programs using XML –Schema –XSLT/XSL.8.Programs using DOM and SAX
IV. Programs using AJAX
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Design simple web pages using markup languages like HTML and XHTML
 Develop web pages using CSS.
 Create dynamic web pages using DHTML and java script that is easy to navigate
and use.
 Program server side web pages that have to process request from client side web
pages.
 Represent web data using XML and develop web pages using JSP.

SOFTWARE: Dream Weaver or Equivalent, MySQL or Equivalent, Apache Server,
WAMP/XAMPP
HARDWARE: Standalone desktops - 30 Nos. (or) Server supporting 30 terminals or more.
117
Course Programme Outcomes (PO) PSO
Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 - 3 - - - - - - - - - 3 - 1 -
CO 2 - 2 3 - - 3 - - - - - - 1 2 - -
CO 3 - - - 3 - - - 1 - - 2 - - 3 2 -
CO 4 3 - 3 - 3 - - - - - - 2 - - 3 1
CO 5 1 - 3 - 3 - - - - - - 1 - 1 - 3
118
1904512 NETWORKS LABORATORY LTPC
0042
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To learn and use network commands.
 To learn socket programming.
 To implement and analyze various network protocols.
 To learn and use simulation tools.
 To use simulation tools to analyze the performance of various network protocols.
List of experiments
1. Learn to use commands like tcpdump, netstat, ifconfig, nslookup, ping and
traceroute.
2. Write a code simulating Socket Programming and Client – Server model
3. Write a code simulating Stop and Wait protocol.
4. Write a code simulating ARP /RARP protocols.
5. Develop a TCP daytime server and client.
6. Applications using TCP sockets like:
 Echo client and echo server
 Chat
 File Transfer
7. Write a HTTP web client program to download a web page using TCP sockets.
8. Simulation of DNS using UDP sockets.
9. Simulation of Distance Vector/ Link State Routing algorithm.
10. Study of TCP/UDP performance using Simulation tool.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Implement various network commands.
 Develop applications using socket programming.
 Implement applications using TCP and UDP protocols.
 Use simulation tools to analyze the performance of various network protocols.
 Analyze various routing algorithms.

SOFTWARE: C /C++ / Java / Equivalent Compiler, Network simulator likeNS2 / Equivalent
HARDWARE: Standalone desktops - 30 Nos. (or) Server supporting 30 terminals or more.
119
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 2 - - - - - - - - - - - 2 - 2 -
CO 2 - - 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2 - -
CO 3 - 3 - - 2 - - - - - 3 - - 2 - -
CO 4 - - - - 3 - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO 5 - - - - 3 - - - - - - - - 2 -
120
SEMESTER VI
1904601 MOBILE COMPUTING LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 Understand the basic concepts of mobile computing.
 Be familiar with the network protocol stack.
 Learn the basics of mobile telecommunication system.
 Be exposed to Ad-Hoc networks.
 Gain knowledge about different mobile platforms and application development.
Basics of Mobile Computing – Mobile Computing Vs wireless Networking – Hand off and
Hand over-Hidden Terminal Problem-Mobile Computing Applications – Characteristics of
Mobile computing – Structure of Mobile Computing Application. MAC Protocols – Wireless
MAC Issues – Fixed Assignment Schemes – Random Assignment Schemes –
Reservation Based Schemes.
UNIT - II: MOBILE INTERNET PROTOCOL AND TRANSPORT LAYER 9

Overview of Mobile IP – Features of Mobile IP – Key Mechanism in Mobile IP – route
Optimization. Overview of TCP/IP – Architecture of TCP/IP- Adaptation of TCP Window –
Improvement in TCP Performance-Tunneling.
UNIT - III: MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM 9

Global System for Mobile Communication (GSM) – General Packet Radio Service (GPRS)
– Universal Mobile Telecommunication System (UMTS).
UNIT - IV: MOBILE AD-HOC NETWORKS 9

Ad-Hoc Basic Concepts – Characteristics – Applications – Design Issues – Routing –
Essential of Traditional Routing Protocols –Distance Vector and Link State Routing
Protocols – Vehicular Ad Hoc networks ( VANET) – MANET Vs VANET – Security.
UNIT - V: MOBILE PLATFORMS AND APPLICATIONS 9

Mobile Device Operating Systems – Special Constrains & Requirements – Comparision
of Windows and Android OS-Commercial Mobile Operating Systems-Mobile Payment
System – Security Issues.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
121
COURSE OUTCOMES :

 Explain the basics of mobile telecommunication system
 Choose the required functionality at each layer for given application
 Identify solution for each functionality at each layer
 Use simulator tools and design Ad hoc networks
 Develop a mobile application.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Prasant Kumar Pattnaik, Rajib Mall, “Fundamentals of Mobile Computing”, PHI
Learning Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi – 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Jochen H. Schller, “Mobile Communications”, Second Edition, Pearson
Education, New Delhi, 2007.
2. Dharma Prakash Agarval, Qing and An Zeng, “Introduction to Wireless and
Mobile systems”, Thomson Asia Pvt Ltd, 2005.
3. William.C.Y.Lee, “Mobile Cellular Telecommunications-Analog and Digital
Systems”, Second Edition, Tata Mc Graw Hill Edition , 2006.
Program
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 - 3 - - - - - - - - 3 2 - - -
CO 2 - 3 - - 2 - - - - - 2 - - - 3 -
CO 3 - - - 2 3 - - 2 - - - - - 2 - -
CO 4 - - 2 - - - - - 2 - 1 - - - - 1
CO 5 - 3 - - - 1 - - - - 2 - - - 2 -
122
1904602 COMPILER DESIGN LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To learn the various phases of compiler.
 To learn the various parsing techniques.
 To understand intermediate code generation and run-time environment.
 To learn to implement front-end of the compiler.
 To learn to implement code optimization.
UNIT - I: INTRODUCTION TO COMPILERS 9

Phases of a compiler – Lexical Analysis – Role of Lexical Analyzer – Input Buffering – Specification
of Tokens – Recognition of Tokens – Lex – Finite Automata – Regular Expressions to Automata –
NFA to DFA- Minimizing DFA.
UNIT - II: SYNTAX ANALYSIS 9

Role of Parser – Grammars – Error Handling – Context-free grammars – Writing a grammar – Top
Down Parsing - General Strategies Recursive Descent Parser Predictive Parser-LL(1) Parser-Shift
Reduce Parser-LR Parser-LR (0)Item Construction of SLR Parsing Table -Introduction to LALR
Parser - Error Handling and Recovery in Syntax Analyzer-YACC.
UNIT - III: INTERMEDIATE CODE GENERATION 9

Syntax Directed Definitions, Evaluation Orders for Syntax Directed Definitions, Intermediate
Languages: Syntax Tree, Three Address Code, Types and Declarations, Translation of
Expressions, Type Checking.
UNIT - IV: RUN-TIME ENVIRONMENT AND CODE GENERATION 9

Storage Organization, Stack Allocation Space, Access to Non-local Data on the Stack, Heap
Management - Issues in Code Generation - Design of a simple Code Generator.
UNIT - V: CODE OPTIMIZATION 9

Principal Sources of Optimization – Peep-hole optimization - DAG- Optimization of Basic Blocks-
Global Data Flow Analysis - Efficient Data Flow Algorithm.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
123
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Understand the different phases of compiler.
 Design a lexical analyzer for a sample language.
 Apply different parsing algorithms to develop the parsers for a given grammar.
 Understand syntax-directed translation and run-time environment.
 Learn to implement code optimization techniques and a simple code generator.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Alfred V. Aho, Monica S. Lam, Ravi Sethi, Jeffrey D. Ullman, Compilers: Principles,
Techniques and Tools‖, Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. 1. Randy Allen, Ken Kennedy, and Optimizing Compilers for Modern Architectures: A
Dependence based Approach, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2002.
2. Steven S. Muchnick, Advanced Compiler Design and Implementation, Morgan Kaufmann
Publishers - Elsevier Science, India, Indian Reprint 2003.
3. Keith D Cooper and Linda Torczon, Engineering a Compiler, Morgan Kaufmann
Publishers Elsevier Science, 2004.
4. V. Raghavan, Principles of Compiler Design, Tata McGraw Hill Education Publishers,
2010.
5. Allen I. Holub, Compiler Design in C, Prentice-Hall Software Series, 1993.

Program
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 - - 2 - 2 - - - - - - 3 - - -
CO 2 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - 3 -
CO 3 3 - 3 - 2 - - - - - - - - - 3 -
CO 4 3 - - - - - - - - - 2 - - 2 - -
CO 5 3 - - 3 - - - - - 2 - 2 - - - 3
124
1908014 SOFTWARE TESTING LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To learn the criteria for test cases.
 To learn the design of test cases.
 To understand test management.
 To understand test automation techniques.
 To apply test metrics and measurements.
Testing as an Engineering Activity – Testing as a Process – Testing Maturity Model- Testing
axioms – Basic definitions – Software Testing Principles – The Tester‘s Role in a Software
Development Organization – Origins of Defects – Cost of defects – Defect Classes – The
Defect Repository and Test Design –Defect Examples- Developer/Tester Support of
Developing a Defect Repository.
UNIT - II: TEST CASE DESIGN STRATEGIES 9

Test case Design Strategies – Using Black Box Approach to Test Case Design – Boundary
Value Analysis – Equivalence Class Partitioning – State based testing – Cause-effect
graphing – Compatibility testing – user documentation testing – domain testing - Random
Testing – Requirements based testing – Using White Box Approach to Test design – Test
Adequacy Criteria – static testing vs. structural testing – code functional testing – Coverage
and Control Flow Graphs – Covering Code Logic – Paths – code complexity testing.
UNIT - III: LEVELS OF TESTING 9

The need for Levels of Testing – Unit Test – Unit Test Planning – Designing the Unit Tests
– The Test Harness – Running the Unit tests and Recording results – Integration tests –
Designing Integration Tests – Integration Test Planning – Scenario testing – Defect bash
elimination System Testing – Acceptance testing – Performance testing – Regression
Testing – Internationalization testing – Ad-hoc testing – Alpha, Beta Tests – Testing OO
systems – Usability and Accessibility testing – Configuration testing –Compatibility testing
– Testing the documentation – Website testing.
125
UNIT - IV: TEST MANAGEMENT 9
People and organizational issues in testing – Organization structures for testing teams –
testing services – Test Planning – Test Plan Components – Test Plan Attachments –
Locating Test Items – test management – test process – Reporting Test Results –
Introducing the test specialist – Skills needed by a test specialist – Building a Testing Group-
The Structure of Testing Group
UNIT - V: TEST AUTOMATION 9

Software test automation – skills needed for automation – scope of automation – design
and architecture for automation – requirements for a test tool – challenges in automation –
Test metrics and measurements – project, progress and productivity metrics
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Design test cases suitable for a software development for different domains.
 Prepare test planning based on the document.
 Document test plans and test cases designed.
 Use automatic testing tools.
 Develop and validate a test plan.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Srinivasan Desikan and Gopalaswamy Ramesh, ―Software Testing – Principles
and Practices, Pearson Education, 2006.
2. Ron Patton, ―Software Testing‖, Second Edition, Sams Publishing, Pearson
Education, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ilene Burnstein, ―Practical Software Testing‖, Springer International Edition, 2003.
2. Edward Kit, Software Testing in the Real World – Improving the Process, Pearson
Education, 1995.
3. Boris Beizer, Software Testing Techniques‖ – 2nd Edition, Van Nostrand Reinhold,
New York, 1990.
4. Aditya P. Mathur, ―Foundations of Software Testing _ Fundamental Algorithms and
Techniques, Dorling Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd., Pearson Education, 2008.

126
Program
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 - 3 - - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
CO 2 - - - - 2 - - - - 1 - - - - 2 -
CO 3 - - - 2 - - - - 1 - - - - - - 2
CO 4 - - - - - 2 - - - - 2 - - 2 - -
CO 5 - - - - - - - 3 - - - 1 2 - - -
127
1904603 GRID AND CLOUD COMPUTING LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
• To understand the concept of cloud computing.
• To appreciate the evolution of cloud from the existing technologies.
• To have knowledge on the various issues in cloud computing.
• To be familiar with the lead players in cloud.
• To appreciate the emergence of cloud as the next generation computing paradigm.
Evolution of Distributed computing: Scalable computing over the Internet – Technologies
for network based systems – clusters of cooperative computers – Grid computing
Infrastructures – Introduction to Grid Architecture and standards – Elements of Grid –
Overview of Grid Architecture.
UNIT - II: CLOUD ENABLING TECHNOLOGIES 9

Cloud computing –service oriented architecture- Basics of Virtualization – Types of
Virtualization – Implementation Levels of Virtualization – Virtualization Structures – Tools
and Mechanisms – Virtualization of CPU –Memory – I/O Devices –Virtualization Support
and Disaster Recovery.
.
UNIT - III: CLOUD ARCHITECTURE, SERVICES AND STORAGE 8
Layered Cloud Architecture Design – NIST Cloud Computing Reference Architecture –
Public, Private and Hybrid Clouds - laaS – PaaS – SaaS – Architectural Design Challenges
– Cloud Storage – Storage-as-a-Service – Advantages of Cloud Storage – Cloud Storage
Providers – S3.
UNIT - IV: RESOURCE MANAGEMENT AND SECURITY IN CLOUD 10
Inter Cloud Resource Management – Resource Provisioning and Resource Provisioning

Methods – Global Exchange of Cloud Resources – Security Overview – Cloud Security
Challenges – Software-as-a-Service Security – Security Governance – Virtual Machine
Security – IAM – Security Standards.
UNIT - V: CLOUD TECHNOLOGIES AND ADVANCEMENTS 9
Hadoop – MapReduce – Virtual Box -- Google App Engine – Programming Environment

for Google App Engine –– Open Stack – Federation in the Cloud – Four Levels of
Federation – Federated Services and Applications – Future of Federation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
128
COURSE OUTCOMES:

• Apply grid computing techniques to solve large scale scientific problems.
• Learn the key and enabling technologies that help in the development of cloud.
• Develop the ability to understand and use the architecture of compute and
storage cloud, service and delivery models.
• Explain the core issues of cloud computing such as resource management and
security and able to install and use current cloud technologies.
• Evaluate and choose the appropriate technologies, algorithms and approaches
for Implementation and use of cloud.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kai Hwang, Geoffrey C. Fox, Jack G. Dongarra, "Distributed and Cloud
Computing, From Parallel Processing to the Internet of Things", Morgan Kaufmann
Publishers, 2012.
2. Rittinghouse, John W., and James F. Ransome, ―Cloud Computing:
Implementation, Management and Security, CRC Press, 2017.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Rajkumar Buyya, Christian Vecchiola, S. ThamaraiSelvi, ―Mastering Cloud
Computing, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 2013.
2. Toby Velte, Anthony Velte, Robert Elsenpeter, "Cloud Computing - A Practical
Approach, Tata Mcgraw Hill, 2009.
3. George Reese, "Cloud Application Architectures: Building Applications and
Infrastructure in the Cloud: Transactional Systems for EC2 and Beyond (Theory in
Practice), O'Reilly, 2009.

Program
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 2 - - 2 - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
CO 2 - 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - 3 - -
CO 3 2 - 3 - - - - - - - - - - - 3 -
CO 4 - - 3 2 - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
CO 5 - - - 3 3 - - - - - - - - - 3 -
129
1904610 MOBILE APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT LABORATORY LTPC
0042
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 Know the components and structure of mobile application development
frameworks for Android and windows OS based mobiles.
 Understand how to work with various mobile application development
frameworks.
 Learn the basic and important design concepts and issues of development of
mobile applications.
 Understand the capabilities and limitations of mobile devices.
 Using engineering, physics & mathematical concepts critical to mobile application
development
List of experiments
1. Develop an android application to work on GUI components.
2. Write an android application to develop dice roller.
3. Write an android application to develop Native Calculator.
4. Write an android application to develop a Reminder App.
5. Develop an android application to implement Multithreading.
6. Write an android application to implement all the UI design (Widgets, Layouts, UI
Events and Event Listeners).
7. Develop an android application to make use of Database Concepts.
8. Implement an android application to use 2D graphics.
9. Develop an android application to implement multimedia (Audio playback and Media
Player).
10. Develop an android application to make use of Networking Concept.
(i) Making Phone call.
(ii) Sending Emails.
(iii) Sending SMS.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
130
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Design and Implement various mobile applications using emulators.
 Deploy applications to hand-held devices.
 Transfer current knowledge to learning of new technologies.
 Technical skills related to software development, computer programming &
graphic design.
 Using appropriate and accessible digital tools for research and learning.
Program
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 - 2 - 2 - - - - - - - 2 2 - -
CO 2 - 2 - 2 3 - - - - - - - - 2 - -
CO 3 - - 3 - 3 2 - - - - - - - - 3 -
CO 4 - - - - 3 - - 1 - 2 - - - 1 - -
CO 5 - - - - - - - - - - 1 - - 2 - 1
131
1904611 COMPILER DESIGN LABORATORY LTPC
0042
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 Deepen the understanding of compiler design.
 To implement Lexical Analyzer using Lex tool &Syntax Analyzer or parser using
YACC Tool.
 To implement NFA and DFA from a given regular expression.
 To implement front end of the compiler by means of generating Intermediate
codes
 To implement code optimization techniques
List of experiments
1. Implementation of Symbol Table
2. Develop a lexical analyzer to recognize a few patterns in C. (Ex. identifiers, constants,
comments, operators etc.)
3. Implementation of Lexical Analyzer using Lex Tool
4. Generate YACC specification for a few syntactic categories.
a) Program to recognize a valid arithmetic expression that uses operator +, - , * and /.
b) Program to recognize a valid variable which starts with a letter followed by any
number of letters or digits.
c) Implementation of Calculator using LEX and YACC
5. Convert the BNF rules into Yacc form and write code to generate Abstract Syntax
Tree.
6. Implement type checking
7. Implement control flow analysis and Data flow Analysis
8. Implement any one storage allocation strategies (Heap, Stack)
9. Construction of DAG
10. Implementation of Simple Code Optimization Techniques.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 The students shall acquire the generic skills to design
 Implement a compiler along with analysis of practical aspects
 Design Lexical analyzer for given language using C and LEX tools.
 Design and convert BNF rules into YACC form to generate various parsers.
 Generate machine code from the intermediate code forms
132
Program
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 - - - - 2 - - - - 2 - - 2 - - -
CO 2 2 - - - - - 2 - - - - - - 1 - -
CO 3 - - 2 - - - - - - - - - - - 1 -
CO 4 - - - - - 1 - - - - - - - - - 2
CO 5 - - - 2 - - - - - - - - - - - -
133
1919002 PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION LTPC
0021
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
The course aims to:
 Enhance the Employability and Career Skills of students.
 Orient the students towards grooming as a professional
 To learn how to speak in Group discussions.
 Make them employable Graduates and help them attend interviews successfully.
 Develop their confidence and help them express views clearly.
UNIT - I: GENERAL ENGLISH FOR COMPETITIVE EXAMS 6

English for competitive exams —General awareness of Current Affairs – multiple choice
– Cloze – Vocabulary Structure.
UNIT - II: MECHANICS FOR INTERPERSONAL COMMUNICATION 6
Introduction to soft skills - Interpersonal communication - Introducing oneself to the

audience –– answering questions – writing a message – memo –mail – asking for
comments – giving information – agreeing to requests – apologizing – Complaining –
Business proposal – short report – summarizing.
UNIT - III: BASICS OF GROUP DISCUSSION 6

Introduction to Group Discussion— participating in group discussions - questioning and
clarifying –GD strategies –monologues – dialogues – discussions.
UNIT - IV: FUNDAMENTALS OF INTERVIEW SKILLS 6
Interview etiquette – Portfolio development- attending job interviews–FAQs related to job

interviews- Interview types –expressing opinions – present circumstances - past
experiences – future plans.
UNIT - V: SPECIFIC SKILLS FOR CAREER ADVANCEMENT 6

Recognizing differences between groups and teams - networking professionally-
respecting social protocols- understanding career management- developing a long- term
career plan- making career changes. – organizing a larger unit of discourse – expressing
and justifying opinions – negotiating – collaborating – disagreeing – speculating – decision
taking.
TOTAL:30 PERIODS
134
The lab course is offered as an Employability Enhancement Course
The course is offered as a one credit paper with an End Semester Examination.
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Make effective presentations
 Participate confidently in Group Discussions.
 Attend job interviews and interacting in different situations.
 Write business reports, proposals and related correspondence.
 Develop adequate Soft Skills required for the workplace.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Butterfield, Jeff Soft Skills for Everyone. Cengage Learning: New Delhi, 2015
2. Interact English Lab Manual for Undergraduate Students, Orient Blackswan:
Hyderabad, 2016.
3. E. Suresh Kumar et al. Communication for Professional Success. Orient
Blackswan: Hyderabad, 2015
4. Raman, Meenakshi and Sangeeta Sharma. Professional Communication. Oxford
University Press: Oxford, 2014
5. S. Hariharanetal. Soft Skills. MJP Publishers: Chennai, 2010.
6. Successful Presentations: DVD and Student’s Book. A video series teaching
business communication skills for adult professionals by John Huges and Andrew
Mallett- OUP
7. Goodheart-Willcox, "Professional Communication", First Edition, 2017. Online test
book
8. Training in Interpersonal Skills: Tips for Managing People at Work, Pearson
Education, India, 6 edition, 2015
9. English for success in Competitive exams. Philip Sunil Solomon - OUP

Program
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 3 2 3 3 - - - - 3 - 1 2 2 2 2
CO 2 3 2 2 2 2 - 3 - - 2 - 1 2 2 2 2
CO 3 3 2 - 3 - - - - - 3 - 1 1 1 2 2
CO 4 3 3 - - - - 3 - - 3 - 1 1 1 1 1
CO 5 3 2 3 - - - - - - 3 - 1 2 2 2 2
135
SEMESTER – VII
1904005 CRYPTOGRAPHY AND NETWORK SECURITY LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To understand basics of Cryptography and Network Security
 To understand the number theory used for network security
 To understand Cryptography Theories, Algorithms and Systems.
 To understand the design concept of cryptography and authentication
 To understand necessary Approaches and Techniques to build protection
mechanisms in order to secure computer networks.
UNIT - I: INTRODUCTION & NUMBER THEORY 9

Services, Mechanisms and attacks-the OSI security architecture-Network security model-
Classical Encryption techniques (Symmetric cipher model, substitution techniques,
transposition techniques, steganography). FINITE FIELDS AND NUMBER THEORY:
Modular arithmetic- Euclid’s algorithm- Prime numbers-Fermat’s and Euler’s theorem-
Testing for primality -The Chinese remainder theorem- Discrete logarithms
UNIT - II: SYMMETRIC KEY CRYPTOGRAPHY 9

SYMMETRIC KEY CIPHERS: SDES – Block cipher Principles of DES – Strength of DES
– Differential and linear cryptanalysis – Block cipher design principles – Block cipher mode
of operation – Evaluation criteria for AES – Advanced Encryption Standard – RC4 – Key
distribution.
UNIT - III: PUBLIC KEY CRYPTOGRAPHY 9

ASYMMETRIC KEY CIPHERS: RSA cryptosystem – Key distribution – Key management
– Diffie Hellman key exchange – ElGamal cryptosystem – Elliptic curve arithmetic-Elliptic
curve cryptography.
UNIT - IV MESSAGE AUTHENTICATION AND INTEGRITY 9

Authentication requirement – Authentication function – MAC – Hash function – Security of
hash function and MAC – SHA –Digital signature and authentication protocols – DSS-
Authentication applications – Kerberos, X.509
136
UNIT - V: SECURITY PRACTICE AND SYSTEM SECURITY 9
Electronic Mail security – PGP, S/MIME – IP security – Web Security – SYSTEM
SECURITY: Intruders – Malicious software – viruses – Firewalls.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Understand the fundamentals of networks security, security architecture, threats
and vulnerabilities
 Apply the different cryptographic operations of symmetric cryptographic algorithms
 Apply the different cryptographic operations of public key cryptography
 Apply the various Authentication and hash algorithms to simulate different
applications.
 Understand various Security practices and System security standards.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. William Stallings, Cryptography and Network Security: Principles and Practice, PHI
4th Edition, 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Behrouz A. Ferouzan, “Cryptography & Network Security”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2007.
2. Charlie Kaufman and Radia Perlman, Mike Speciner, “Network Security, Second
Edition, Private Communication in Public World”, PHI 2002.

Program
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 2 - 2 - - - - - - - 2 - - - 2 -
CO 2 - 2 2 1 2 - - - - - - 2 2 - - 1
CO 3 - 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 - 2 - 1
CO 4 2 - - 2 - - 1 - - 1 2 - - - 1 -
CO 5 3 - 2 2 2 - - - - 1 - - 2 - 1 -
137
1904006 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To understand the various characteristics of Intelligent agents
 To learn the different search strategies in AI
 To learn to represent knowledge in solving AI problems
 To understand the different ways of designing software agents
 To know about the various applications of AI.
Introduction - Foundation and history of AI. AI Problems and techniques - AI programming
languages – Introduction to LISP and PROLOG – Problem spaces and searches -Blind search
strategies; Breadth first - Depth first –Heuristic search techniques Hill climbing - Best first – A*
algorithm AO* algorithm – game trees Minimax algorithm – Game playing – Alpha beta pruning.
UNIT : II: KNOWLEDGE REPRESENTATION 9

Knowledge representation issues – Predicate logic – logic programming – Sematic nets -
Frames and inheritance - constraint propagation –Representing Knowledge using rules – Rules
based deduction system.
UNIT - III: REASONING UNDER UNCERTAINTY 9

Introduction to uncertain knowledge review of probability – Baye’s Probabilistic inferences and
Dempster Shafer theory –Heuristic methods – Symbolic reasoning under uncertainty- Statistical
reasoning – Fuzzy reasoning – Temporal reasoning- Non monotonic reasoning.
UNIT - IV: PLANNING AND LEARNING 9

Planning - Introduction, Planning in situational calculus - Representation for planning – Partial
order planning algorithm- Learning from examples- Discovery as learning – Learning by analogy
– Explanation based learning –Introduction to Neural nets – Genetic Algorithms.
UNIT - V: APPLICATIONS 9
Principles of Natural Language Processing Rule Based Systems Architecture - Expert systems-
Knowledge Acquisition concepts – AI application to robotics – Current trends in Intelligent
Systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
138
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Use appropriate search algorithms for any AI problem
 Represent a problem using first order and predicate logic
 Provide the apt agent strategy to solve a given problem
 Design software agents to solve a problem
 Design applications for NLP that use Artificial Intelligence
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Patrick Henry Winston,” Artificial Intelligence”, Addison Wesley, Books Third edition, 2000.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. George F Luger, Artificial Intelligence, Pearson Education, 6th edition,2009.
2. Engene Charniak and Drew Mc Dermott,” Introduction to Artificial intelligence, Addison
Wesley 2000.
3. Nils J. Nilsson,”Principles of Artificial Intelligence“, Narosa Publishing House, 2000
Program
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 - 1 - - - 3 - - - - - - 2 - - -
CO 2 - - 2 - - - - - - - - - - 3 - -
CO 3 3 - - 2 - - - - - - - - 1 - - -
CO 4 - 2 - - 3 - - - - - - - - 2 - -
CO 5 2 - 2 - - - - - - - - - 3 - - 2
139
1904008 SECURITY LABORATORY LTPC
0042
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To learn different cipher techniques.
 To implement the algorithms DES.
 To implement the RSA Algorithm.
 To implement the MD5, Digital Signature Algorithms.
 To use network security tools and vulnerability assessment tools
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Perform encryption, decryption using the following substitution techniques
i) Ceaser cipher, ii) playfair cipher , iii) Hill Cipher , iv) Vigenere cipher
2. Perform encryption and decryption using following transposition techniques
i) Rail fence ii) row & Column Transformation
3. Apply DES algorithm for practical applications.
4. Apply AES algorithm for practical applications.
5. Implement RSA Algorithm using HTML and JavaScript
6. Implement the Diffie-Hellman Key Exchange algorithm for a given problem.
7. Calculate the message digest of a text using the SHA-1 algorithm.
8. Implement the SIGNATURE SCHEME - Digital Signature Standard.
9. Demonstrate intrusion detection system (ids) using any tool eg. Snort or any other s/w.
10. Automated Attack and Penetration Tools, Exploring N-Stalker, a Vulnerability
Assessment Tool
11. Defeating Malware
i) Building Trojans ii) Rootkit Hunter
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Develop code for classical Encryption Techniques to solve the problems.
 Build cryptosystems by applying symmetric and public key encryption algorithms.
 Construct code for authentication algorithms.
 Develop a signature scheme using Digital signature standard.
 Demonstrate the network security system using open source tools
140
SOFTWARE: C / C++ / Java or equivalent compiler GnuPG, Snort, N-Stalker or
Equivalent
HARDWARE: Standalone desktops -30 Nos. (or) Server supporting 30 terminals or more.
Program
Course
Outcomes(PSO)
Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 - 3 - 3 - - - - - 2 - - 3 3 -
CO 2 3 - 3 - 3 - - - - - 2 - 3 - 3 2
CO 3 3 - 3 - 3 - - - - - 2 - 3 3 - -
CO 4 3 - 3 - 3 - - - - - 2 - 3 3 - -
CO 5 3 - 3 - 3 2 - - - 2 2 - 3 3 - -
141
1904009 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE LABORATORY LTPC
0042
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 Identify innovative research directions in Artificial Intelligence,
 Identify innovative research directions in Machine Learning and Big Data
analytics.
 Providing quality education and practical skills to the students and faculty.
 Establish, refine and implement strategies to take the idea in to students and
faculty fraternity.
 Create sustainable funding models for GRIET and related efforts.
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Study of PROLOG. Write the following programs using PROLOG
2. Write a program to solve 8 queens problem
3. Solve any problem using depth first search.
4. Solve any problem using best first search.
5. Solve 8-puzzle problem using best first search.
6. Solve Robot (traversal) problem using means End Analysis.
7 .Solve traveling salesman problem.
TOTAL : 60 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Develop code searching Techniques to solve the problems.
 Construct code for Robotics Systems.
 Develop a code for analytical skills.
 Demonstrate the tool for problem solving.
 Develop a code for Optimization problems.

SOFTWARE: C / C++ / Java
HARDWARE: Standalone desktops -30 Nos. (or) Server supporting 30 terminals or more.
142
Program
Course Outcomes(PSO)
Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1
2 - 2 - - 3 - - - - - - - 2 - -
CO 2
- - 2 - 3 - 3 - - - - - - - 3 -
CO 3
- 2 - - 3 - 3 - - - - - - - 3 -
CO 4
1 2 - - - - - 3 - - - - 2 - 2 -
CO 5
- 1 - 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
143
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE - I
1904004 NATURAL LANGUAGE PROCESSING LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To learn the fundamentals of natural language processing.
 To understand the use of CFG and PCFG in NLP.
 To understand the role of semantics of sentences and pragmatics.
 To apply the NLP techniques to IR applications.
 Practice individual investigation in chosen topics.
Origins and challenges of NLP-Language Modeling: Grammar-based LM, Statistical LM -
Regular Expressions, Finite-State Automata -English Morphology, Transducers for lexicon
and rules, Tokenization, Detecting and Correcting Spelling Errors, Minimum Edit Distance.
UNIT - II: WORD LEVEL ANALYSIS 9

Unsmoothed N-grams, Evaluating N-grams, Smoothing, Interpolation and Backoff -Word
Classes, Part-of-Speech Tagging, Rule-based, Stochastic and Transformation-based
tagging, Issues in PoS tagging -Hidden Markov and Maximum Entropy models.
UNIT - III: SYNTACTIC ANALYSIS 9

Context-Free Grammars, Grammar rules for English, Treebanks, Normal Forms for
grammar -Dependency Grammar -Syntactic Parsing, Ambiguity, Dynamic Programming
parsing -Shallow parsing -Probabilistic CFG, Probabilistic CYK, Probabilistic Lexicalized
CFGs -Feature structures, Unification of feature structures.
UNIT – IV: SEMANTICS AND PRAGMATICS 9

Requirements for representation, First-Order Logic, Description Logics-Syntax-Driven
Semantic analysis, Semantic attachments -Word Senses, Relations between Senses,
Thematic Roles, selectional restrictions-Word Sense Disambiguation, WSD using
Supervised, Dictionary & Thesaurus, Bootstrapping methods -Word Similarity using
Thesaurus and Distributional methods.
UNIT - V: DISCOURSE ANALYSIS AND LEXICAL RESOURCES 9
144
Discourse segmentation, Coherence - Reference Phenomena, Anaphora Resolution using
Hobbs and Centering Algorithm - Coreference Resolution –Resources: Porter Stemmer,
Lemmatizer, Penn Treebank, Brill's Tagger, WordNet, PropBank, FrameNet, Brown
Corpus, British National Corpus (BNC). Programming in Python - NLTK (Natural Language
Toolkit)
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 To tag a given text with basic Language features
 To design an innovative application using NLP components
 To implement a rule based system to tackle morphology/syntax of a language
 To design a tag set to be used for statistical processing for real-time applications
 To compare and contrast the use of different statistical approaches for different types
of NLP applications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Daniel Jurafsky, James H. Martin―Speech and Language Processing: An
Introduction to Natural Language Processing, Computational Linguistics and
Speech, Pearson Publication, 2014.
2. Steven Bird, Ewan Klein and Edward Loper, ―Natural Language Processing with
Python, First Edition, O ̳Reilly Media, 2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Breck Baldwin, ―Language Processing with Java and LingPipe Cookbook, Atlantic
Publisher, 2015.
2. Richard M Reese, ―Natural Language Processing with Java‖, O R
̳ eilly Media,
2015.
3. Nitin Indurkhya and Fred J. Damerau, ―Handbook of Natural Language
Processing, Second Edition, Chapman and Hall/CRC Press, 2010.
4. Anveer Siddiqui, U.S. Tiwary, ―Natural Language Processing and Information
Retrieval, Oxford University Press, 2008.
5. http://nltk.sourceforge.net/lite/doc/en/programming.html

145
Program
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 2 3 - 3 2 - - - - - - 2 2 - - -
CO 2 3 - 3 3 - 2 - - - - - - - 2 2 -
CO 3 - 3 - 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 3 -
CO 4 - 3 - 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO 5 - - 3 - 2 2 - - - - - 2 - - - 1
146
1904605 SECURITY GOVERNANCE RISK AND COMPLIANCE LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To learn about security Governance strategies.

 To learn about security architecture and frame work.
 To learn about risk management and compliance.
 Learn how to apply security metrics.
 To learn about security management strategies.
Information Security Governance and the CIA Triad: Confidentiality Integrity and
Availability, Benefits of Good Governance, Security Governance and Regulation, Applying
security Governance principles -Organizational Processes, security roles and
responsibilities, Compliance-Types of Legal System, Understanding legal and regulatory
issues-Computer Crime, ISC code of ethics.
UNIT - II: STRATEGIC METRICS & SECURITY ARCHITECTURE 9

Strategic metrics, Strategic Direction, Information Security Strategic Alignment, Risk
Management, Business process assurance/convergence, Value delivery, Resource
management, Performance measurement, Security architecture, Security Control
Framework- COBIT, OCTAVE, ISO 27000/31000.
UNIT - III: RISK MANAGEMENT 9

Risk management responsibilities, Managing risk appropriately, Current State of Security,
SABSA, CMM, Cyber Security Task Force- Governance Framework, Gap Analysis –
SABSA, CMM.
UNIT – IV: SECURITY STRATEGY 9

Strategy – Failure, Attributes, Resources, Constraints, Sample Strategy Development –
The Process, Implementing Strategy.
UNIT - V: SECURITY METRICS 9

Security program Development metrics, Information Security management metrics, CISO
Decisions, Information Security operational Metrics, Incident Management and Response
Metrics.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
147
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 State the basic concepts of GRC
 Paraphrase security architecture
 Paraphrase strategic metrics for security architecture
 Demonstrate identification of risk
 Demonstrate and Interpret working with Security metrics
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Krag Brotby, “Information Security Governance: A Practical Development and
Implementation Approach”, WILEY, 2009
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Alan Calder, Steve G. Watkins, “Information Security Risk Management for
ISO27001/ISO27002”, itgp, 2010.
2. http://www.freetechbooks.com/managing-risk-and-information-security-protect-to-
enablet 1150.
3. https://www.udemy.com/cissp-domain-1-security-and-risk-management/
4. https://www.coursera.org/learn/cyber-security-domain/lecture/FLyKS/information-
securitygovernance-and-risk-management

Program
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 2 - 3 3 - - - - - - - 2 2 - - -
CO 2 2 - 3 3 - 2 - - - - - - - 2 - -
CO 3 - - 3 3 - - - - - - 3 - - - 2 -
CO 4 - 2 - 3 - - - - - - - 2 - 2 - -
CO 5 2 - - - - 3 - - - - 3 - - - 1 -
148
1904606 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To give an idea about IPR, registration and its enforcement.
 To acquaint the students with basics of intellectual property rights with special
reference to Indian Laws and its practices.
 To provide an overview of the statutory, procedural, and case law underlining these
processes and their interplay with litigation.
 To encourage and protect innovation in the form of intellectual property rights.
 To encourage research, scholarship, and a spirit of inquiry, thereby generating new
knowledge.
Introduction to IPRs, Basic concepts and need for Intellectual Property – Patents,
Copyrights, Geographical Indications, IPR in India and Abroad – Genesis and
Development – the way from WTO to WIPO –TRIPS, Nature of Intellectual Property,
Industrial Property, technological Research, Inventions and Innovations – Important
examples of IPR.
UNIT - II: REGISTRATION OF IPRs 9

Meaning and practical aspects of registration of Copy Rights, Trademarks, Patents,
Geographical Indications, Trade Secrets and Industrial Design registration in India and
Abroad.
UNIT - III: AGREEMENTS AND REGISTRATION 9

International Treaties and Conventions on IPRs, TRIPS Agreement, PCT Agreement,
Patent Act of India, Patent Amendment Act, Design Act, Trademark Act, Geographical
Indication Act.
UNIT - IV: DIGITAL PRODUCTS AND LAW 9

Digital Innovations and Developments as Knowledge Assets – IP Laws, Cyber Law and
Digital Content Protection – Unfair Competition – Meaning and Relationship between
Unfair Competition and IP Laws – Case Studies.
UNIT - V: ENFORCEMENT OF IPRs 9

Infringement of IPRs, Enforcement Measures, Emerging issues – Case Studies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
149
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Skill to understand the concept of intellectual property rights.
 Develops procedural knowledge to Legal System and solving the problem relating
to intellectual property rights.
 Skill to pursue the professional programs in Company Secretaryship, Law. Business
(MBA), International Affairs, Public Administration and Other fields.
 Employability as the Compliance Officer, Public Relation Officer and Liaison Officer.
 Establishment of Legal Consultancy and service provider.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. V. Scople Vinod, Managing Intellectual Property, Prentice Hall of India pvt Ltd,
2012
2. S. V. Satakar, ―Intellectual Property Rights and Copy Rights, Ess Ess
Publications, New Delhi, 2002.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Deborah E. Bouchoux, ―Intellectual Property: The Law of Trademarks,
Copyrights, Patents and Trade Secrets, Cengage Learning, Third Edition, 2012.
2. Prabuddha Ganguli, Intellectual Property Rights: Unleashing the Knowledge
Economy, McGraw Hill Education, 2011.
3. Edited by Derek Bosworth and Elizabeth Webster, The Management of Intellectual
Property, Edward Elgar Publishing Ltd., 2013.

Program
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 1 2 - - - - - - - - 2 - - 2 - -
CO 2 - - 2 - - - 2 - - - - 2 3 - - 2
CO 3 - - - 3 2 - - - 2 - 2 - - 2 - -
CO 4 - - - - - 2 - - - - - - - - 2 -
CO 5 - 2 - - - - 2 - - - 2 - - 2 - -
1904607 DATA SCIENCE LTPC
150
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 Be exposed to basic introduction of big data
 To impart necessary knowledge of the mathematical foundations
 Be familiar with basic concepts on Machine Learning
 Learn the different classification algorithm for appropriate decision making.
 To learn the tools to implement Data science and its application.
UNIT - I: INTRODUCTION TO DATA SCIENCE 9

Introduction to Data Science-Concept of Data Science-Traits of Big data-Web Scraping-
Analysis vs Reporting
UNIT - II: MATHEMATICAL FOUNDATIONS 9

Linear Algebra: Vectors, Matrices- Statistics: Describing a Single Set of Data, Correlation,
Simpson’s Paradox-Correlation and Causation- Probability: Dependence and
Independence, Conditional Probability, Bayes’s-Theorem, Random Variables-Continuous
Distributions- The Normal Distribution-The Central Limit Theorem.
UNIT - III: MACHINE LEARNING 9

Overview of Machine learning concepts –Types of Machine learning - Linear Regression-
model assumptions-Classification and Regression algorithms- Naïve Bayes, K-Nearest
Neighbors, logistic regression- support vector machines (SVM), decision trees, and random
forest.
UNIT - IV: PROGRAMMING TOOLS FOR DATA SCIENCE 9

Introduction to Programming Tools for Data Science-Toolkits using Python: Matplotlib,
NumPy, Scikit-learn, NLTK-Visualizing Data: Bar Charts, Line Charts and Scatterplots-
Working with data: Reading Files, Scraping the Web, Using APIs (Example: Using the
Twitter APIs).
UNIT - V: CASE STUDIES OF DATA SCIENCE APPLICATION 9

Weather forecasting-Stock market prediction-Object recognition- Real Time Sentiment
Analysis.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
151
 Basic foundations of Big data.
 Demonstrate understanding of the mathematical foundations needed for data
science.
 Implement models such as k-nearest Neighbors, Naive Bayes, linear and logistic
regression, decision trees.
 Build data science applications using Python based toolkits.
 Familiar in Data science applications and implementation.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Joel Grus, "Data Science from Scratch: First Principles with Python", O'Reilly Media
First edition (April 30, 2015)
2. Aurélien Géron, "Hands-On Machine Learning with Scikit-Learn and Tensor Flow:
Concepts, Tools, and Techniques to Build Intelligent Systems", 1st Edition,2017,
O'Reilly Media.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Stephen Marsland, ― Machine learning: An Algorithmic Perspective‖, CRC Press,
Second Edition, 2009.
2. G. Strang (2016). Introduction to Linear Algebra, Wellesley-Cambridge Press, Fifth
edition, USA.
3. Ian Good fellow, Yoshua Bengio and Aaron Courville, "Deep Learning", MIT Press,
First Edition (November 18, 2016)
4. Montgomery, D. C. and G. C. Runger (2011). Applied Statistics and Probability for
Engineers. 5th Edition. John Wiley & Sons, Inc., NY, USA.
152
Program
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 - - - - 2 - 2 - - - - - - - - -
CO 2 3 - 3 - - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
CO 3 - - - 2 - - - - - - 2 - - - 3 -
CO 4 3 - - - 3 - - - - - - - - - - -
CO 5 - - - - 2 2 2 - - - 2 - - - - -
1915002 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT LT P C

153
3003
OBJECTIVES:
 To study the principles of management, functions and its application an organization.
 To educate the students on the concept of planning and decision making.
 To understand the dynamics of human relations in organizations.
 To learn about motivation, communication and leadership aspects.
 To study the process controlling and the various techniques involved in controlling
UNIT – I: INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT AND ORGANIZATIONS 9

Definition of Management – Science or Art – Manager Vs Entrepreneur - types of managers
managerial roles and skills – Evolution of Management – Scientific, human relations, system
and contingency approaches – Types of Business organization - Sole proprietorship,
partnership, company-public and private sector enterprises - Organization culture and
Environment – Multinational Corporations - Current trends and issues in Management.
UNIT – II: PLANNING 9

Nature and purpose of planning – planning process – types of planning – objectives – setting
objectives – policies – Planning premises – Strategic Management –types of strategies –
Planning Tools and Techniques – Decision making steps and process.
UNIT – III: ORGANISING 9

Nature and purpose – Formal and informal organization – organization chart – organization
structure – types – Line and staff authority – departmentalization – delegation of authority –
centralization and decentralization – Job Design - Human Resource Management – HR
Planning, Talent Acquisition, Training and Development, Performance Management, Career
planning and management.
UNIT – IV: DIRECTING 9

Motivation – motivation theories – motivational techniques – job satisfaction – job enrichment
– leadership – types and theories of leadership – communication – process of
communication – barrier in communication – effective communication – communication and
IT.
UNIT – V: CONTROLLING 9
System and process of controlling – budgetary and non-budgetary control techniques – use
154
of computers and IT in Management control – Quality control and Inventory Control -
Productivity problems and management – control and performance – direct and preventive
control – Maintenance control and purchase control– reporting.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
 Students will be able to have a clear understanding of managerial functions.
 Students would have knowledge to apply planning techniques and decision making.
 Understand concept of Human Resource Management.
 Students would be able to understand motivation, leadership and communication
principles.
 Students would be able to apply control techniques in the organization.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Stephen P. Robbins & Mary Coulter, “Management”, 14th Edition, Pearson, 2017
2. JAF Stoner, Freeman R.E and Daniel R Gilbert “Management”, 6th Edition, Pearson,
2004.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Stephen A. Robbins & David A. Decenzo & Mary Coulter, “Fundamentals of
Management” 10th Edition, Pearson Education, 2016.
2. Robert Kreitner & Mamata Mohapatra, “Management”, Biztantra, 2008.
3. Harold Koontz & Heinz Weihrich “Essentials of management” Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2006.
Tripathy PC & Reddy PN, “Principles of Management”, Tata McGraw Hill, 6th edition 2017

Program
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 - 1 - - - - - - 1 - 2 - - 1 - -
CO 2 - 2 - - - - - - - - - - 1 - - -
CO 3 - - - - - - - - 2 - - - - 1 - -
CO 4 - - - - - - - - 1 2 - - - - 1 -
CO 5 - - 1 - 1 - 1 - - - 1 - - 1 - -
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE II
155
1908702 SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To understand the Software Project Planning and Evaluation technique.
 To plan and manage projects at each stage of the software development life
cycle (SDLC).
 To learn about the activity planning and risk management principles.
 To manage software projects and control software deliverables.
 To develop skills to manage the various phases involved in project management
and people management and to deliver successful software projects that support
organization‘s strategic goals.
UNIT – I: PROJECT EVALUATION AND PROJECT PLANNING 9

Importance of Software Project Management – Activities Methodologies –
Categorization of Software Projects – Setting Objectives – Management Principles –
Management Control – Project portfolio Management – Cost-benefit evaluation
technology – Risk evaluation – Strategic program Management – Stepwise Project
Planning.
UNIT – II: PROJECT LIFE CYCLE AND EFFORT ESTIMATION 9

Software process and Process Models – Choice of Process models - Rapid Application
development – Agile methods – Dynamic System Development Method – Extreme
Programming– Managing interactive processes – Basics of Software estimation – Effort
and Cost estimation techniques – COSMIC Full function points - COCOMO II - a
Parametric Productivity Model.
UNIT – III: ACTIVITY PLANNING AND RISK MANAGEMENT 9

Activity planning – Project schedules – Activities – Sequencing and scheduling –
Network Planning models – Formulating Network Model – Forward Pass & Backward
Pass techniques – Critical path (CRM) method – Risk identification – Assessment – Risk
Planning –Risk Management – – PERT technique – Monte Carlo simulation – Resource
Allocation – Creation of critical paths – Cost schedules.
UNIT – IV: PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL 9
156
Framework for Management and control – Collection of data – Visualizing progress –
Cost monitoring – Earned Value Analysis – Prioritizing Monitoring – Project tracking –
Change control – Software Configuration Management – Managing contracts – Contract
Management.
UNIT - V: STAFFING IN SOFTWARE PROJECTS 9

Managing people – Organizational behavior – Best methods of staff selection –
Motivation – The Oldham – Hackman job characteristic model – Stress – Health and
Safety – Ethical and Professional concerns – Working in teams – Decision making –
Organizational structures – Dispersed and Virtual teams – Communications genres –
Communication plans – Leadership.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Understand Project Management principles while developing software.
 Gain extensive knowledge about the basic project management concepts,
framework and the process models.
 Obtain adequate knowledge about software process models and software effort
estimation techniques.
 Estimate the risks involved in various project activities.
 Define the checkpoints, project reporting structure, project progress and tracking
mechanisms using project management principles.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bob Hughes, Mike Cotterel and Rajib Mall: Software Project Management – Fifth
Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Robert K. Wysocki ―”Effective Software Project Management” – Wiley Publication,

2011.
2. Walker Royce:- “Software Project Management ”-Addison-Wesley,1998.
3. Gopalaswamy Ramesh,-“Managing Global Software Projects I”- McGraw Hill
Education (India), Fourteenth Reprint 2013.
157
Program
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 - - - 3 - 3 - - - - 3 - 3 - - -
CO 2 - 2 3 - - - 3 - - - 2 - - 2 - -
CO 3 - - 3 3 - - - - - - 2 - - 2 - -
CO 4 - - - - - - 3 - - 3 - - - - 2 -
CO 5 - 2 - - - 3 - - - 2 - - - 1 - -
158
1904011 BIG DATA ANALYTICS LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To understand the competitive advantages of big data analytics
 To understand the big data frameworks
 To learn data analysis methods
 To learn stream computing
 To gain knowledge on Hadoop related tools such as HBase, Cassandra, Pig,
and Hive for big data analytics.
UNIT - I: INTRODUCTION TO BIG DATA 9

Big Data – Definition, Characteristic Features – Big Data Applications - Big Data vs
Traditional Data - Risks of Big Data - Structure of Big Data - Challenges of Conventional
Systems - Web Data – Evolution of Analytic Scalability - Evolution of Analytic Processes,
Tools and methods - Analysis vs Reporting - Modern Data Analytic Tools.
UNIT - II: HADOOP FRAMEWORK 9
Distributed File Systems - Large-Scale File System Organization – HDFS concepts -
MapReduce Execution, Algorithms using Map Reduce, Matrix-Vector Multiplication –
Hadoop YARN.
UNIT - III: DATA ANALYSIS 9
Statistical Methods: Regression modelling, Multivariate Analysis - Classification: SVM &
Kernel Methods - Rule Mining - Cluster Analysis, Types of Data in Cluster Analysis,
Partitioning Methods, Hierarchical Methods, Density Based Methods, Grid Based Methods,
Model Based Clustering Methods, Clustering High Dimensional Data - Predictive Analytics
– Data analysis using R.
UNIT - IV: MINING DATA STREAMS 9
Streams: Concepts – Stream Data Model and Architecture - Sampling data in a stream -
Mining Data Streams and Mining Time-series data - Real Time Analytics Platform (RTAP)
Applications - Case Studies - Real Time Sentiment Analysis, Stock Market Predictions.
UNIT - V: BIG DATA FRAMEWORKS 9

Introduction to NoSQL – Aggregate Data Models – Hbase: Data Model and Implementations
– Hbase Clients – Examples – .Cassandra: Data Model – Examples – Cassandra Clients –
Hadoop Integration. Pig – Grunt – Pig Data Model – Pig Latin – developing and testing Pig
Latin scripts. Hive – Data Types and File Formats – HiveQL Data Definition – HiveQL Data
Manipulation – HiveQL Queries.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
159
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Understand how to leverage the insights from big data analytics.
 Analyze data by utilizing various statistical and data mining approaches.
 Perform analytics on real-time streaming data.
 Understand the various NoSql alternative database models.
 To understand the Big Data framework.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bill Franks, ―Taming the Big Data Tidal Wave: Finding Opportunities in Huge Data
Streams with Advanced Analytics, Wiley and SAS Business Series, 2012
2. Chris Eaton, Dirk deroos et al. , “Understanding Big data ”, McGraw Hill, 2012.
3. Vignesh Prajapati, ”Big Data Analytics with R and Hadoop”, Packt Publishing Ltd.,
2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. David Loshin, "Big Data Analytics: From Strategic Planning to Enterprise Integration
with Tools, Techniques, NoSQL, and Graph", 2013.
2. Michael Berthold, David J. Hand, ―Intelligent Data Analysis‖, Springer, Second
Edition, 2007.
3. Michael Minelli, Michelle Chambers, and Ambiga Dhiraj, "Big Data, Big Analytics:
Emerging Business Intelligence and Analytic Trends for Today's Businesses", Wiley,
2013.
4. P. J. Sadalage and M. Fowler, "NoSQL Distilled: A Brief Guide to the Emerging
World of Polyglot Persistence", Addison-Wesley Professional, 2012.
5. Richard Cotton, "Learning R – A Step-by-step Function Guide to Data Analysis, ,
O‘Reilly Media, 2013.

Program
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 - - - - 3 - - - 2 - - - - - 2
CO 2 - - - - 3 3 - - - 3 - - - 3 - -
CO 3 - 3 2 - - 3 - - 2 2 - - - - 3 -
CO 4 3 2 - - - 3 - - - 2 - - - 2 - -
CO 5 2 - - - 3 3 - - - 2 - - - - 3 2
160
1904706 INTRODUCTION TO MACHINE LEARNING AND LTPC
ALGORITHMS 3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To understand the need for machine learning for various problem solving
 To study the various supervised, semi-supervised and unsupervised learning
algorithms in machine learning
 To understand the latest trends in machine learning
 To design appropriate machine learning algorithms for problem solving
 To understand the concepts of Reinforcement learning, Genetic algorithms and
Instant based learning.
Learning Problems – Perspectives and Issues – Concept Learning – Version Spaces and
Candidate Eliminations – Inductive bias – Decision Tree learning – Representation –
Algorithm – Heuristic Space Search.
UNIT - II: NEURAL NETWORKS AND GENETIC ALGORITHMS 9

Neural Network Representation – Problems – Perceptrons – Multilayer Networks and
Back Propagation Algorithms – Advanced Topics – Genetic Algorithms – Hypothesis
Space Search – Genetic Programming – Models of Evaluation and Learning.
UNIT - III: BAYESIAN AND COMPUTATIONAL LEARNING 9

Bayes Theorem – Concept Learning – Maximum Likelihood – Minimum Description
Length Principle – Bayes Optimal Classifier – Gibbs Algorithm – Naïve Bayes Classifier
– Bayesian Belief Network – EM Algorithm – Probability Learning – Sample Complexity
– Finite and Infinite Hypothesis Spaces – Mistake Bound Model.
UNIT - IV: INSTANT BASED LEARNING 9

K- Nearest Neighbour Learning – Locally weighted Regression – Radial Basis
Functions – Case Based Learning.
UNIT - V: ADVANCED LEARNING 9

Learning Sets of Rules – Sequential Covering Algorithm – Learning Rule Set – First Order
Rules – Sets of First Order Rules – Induction on Inverted Deduction – Inverting Resolution
– Analytical Learning – Perfect Domain Theories – Explanation Base Learning – FOCL
Algorithm – Reinforcement Learning – Task – Q-Learning – Temporal Difference
Learning.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
161
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Differentiate between supervised, unsupervised, semi-supervised machine
learning approaches
 Discuss the decision tree algorithm and identity and overcome the problem of
over fitting
 Discuss and apply the back propagation algorithm and genetic algorithms to
various problems
 Apply the Bayesian concepts to machine learning
 Analyse and suggest appropriate machine learning approaches for various types
of Problems
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Tom M. Mitchell, ―Machine Learning‖, McGraw-Hill Education (India) Private
Limited, 2017.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ethem Alpaydin, ―Introduction to Machine Learning (Adaptive Computation and
Machine Learning),The MIT Press 2004.
2. Stephen Marsland, ―Machine Learning: An Algorithmic Perspective‖, CRC Press,
2009.
Program
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 - - - - - - - - - - - 3 - - -
CO 2 3 3 - - 2 - - - - - - - 3 - - -
CO 3 3 - - 3 - 2 - - - - - - - 2 - -
CO 4 3 - 3 - - - - - - - - - - - 3 -
CO 5 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - - - - 3 2
162
1904707 NEURAL NETWORKS & FUZZY LOGIC LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
• Survey of attractive applications of artificial neural networks.
• Practical approach for using artificial neural networks in various technical,

organizational and economic applications.
• Prospects for use of artificial neural networks in products
• Artificial neural network provides design based on solid mathematical difference
• Enables Neural networks processing of sensorial data such as signal

processing, image processing, pattern recognition, robot control, non-linear
modeling and prediction
UNIT - I: INTRODUCTION TO NEURAL NETWORKS 9

Introduction, Humans and Computers, Organization of the Brain, Biological Neuron,
Biological and Artificial Neuron Models, Hodgkin-Huxley Neuron Model, Integrate-and-
Fire Neuron Model, Spiking Neuron Model, Characteristics of ANN, McCulloch-Pitts
Model, Historical Developments, Potential Applications of ANN.
UNIT - II: ESSENTIALS OF ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS 9

Artificial Neuron Model, Operations of Artificial Neuron, Types of Neuron Activation
Function, ANN Architectures, Classification Taxonomy of ANN – Connectivity, Neural
Dynamics (Activation and Synaptic), Learning Strategy (Supervised, Unsupervised,
Reinforcement), Learning Rules, Types of Application.
UNIT - III: SINGLE LAYER FEED FORWARD & MULTILAYER 9

FEED FORWARD NEURAL NETWORKS
Introduction, Perceptron Models: Discrete, Continuous and Multi-Category, Training

Algorithms: Discrete and Continuous Perceptron Networks, Perceptron Convergence
theorem, Limitations of the Perceptron Model, Applications. Credit Assignment Problem,
Generalized Delta Rule, Derivation of Backpropagation (BP) Training, Summary of
Backpropagation Algorithm, Kolmogorov Theorem, Learning Difficulties and
Improvements.
163
UNIT - IV: CLASSICAL & FUZZY SETS 9
Introduction to classical sets – properties, Operations and relations; Fuzzy sets,
Membership, Uncertainty, Operations, properties, fuzzy relations, cardinalities,
membership functions.
UNIT - V: FUZZY LOGIC SYSTEM COMPONENTS AND 9

APPLICATIONS
Fuzzification, Membership value assignment, development of rule base and decision

making system, Defuzzification to crisp sets, Defuzzification methods. Neural network
applications: Process identification, control, fault diagnosis and load forecasting. Fuzzy
logic applications: Fuzzy logic control and Fuzzy classification.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Comprehend the concepts of feed forward neural networks
 Analyze the various feedback networks.
 Understand the concept of fuzziness involved in various systems and fuzzy set
theory.
 Comprehend the fuzzy logic control and adaptive fuzzy logic and to design the fuzzy
control using genetic algorithm.
 Analyze the application of fuzzy logic control to real time systems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Neural Networks, Fuzzy logic, Genetic algorithms: synthesis and applications by
Rajasekharan and Rai - PHI Publication.
2. Introduction to Neural Networks using MATLAB 6.0 – S.N.Sivanandam, S.Sumathi,
S.N.Deepa, TMH, 2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Jack M. Zurada, “Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems”, PWS Publishing Co.,
Boston, 2002.
2. Klir G.J. &Folger T.A., “Fuzzy sets, Uncertainty and Information”, Prentice –Hall of
India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2008.
164
3. Zimmerman H.J., “Fuzzy set theory and its Applications”, Kluwer Academic
Publishers Dordrecht, 2001.
4. Laurance Fausett, Englewood cliffs, N.J., “Fundamentals of Neural Networks”,
Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2008.
Program
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 2 - - 2 - - - - 2 - - - 2 - - -
CO 2 - 2 - - 2 - 3 - - - 2 - - 2 - -
CO 3 - - 3 - - 2 1 - 2 - - - - 1 -
CO 4 - - - 2 - 2 2 - 2 - - - - - 2 -
CO 5 - 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 - 2 - 2
165
1904708 INTERNET OF THINGS LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 Basic knowledge about IoT
 To Gain knowledge of hardware and fundamentals of Arduino.
 Evaluate and study suitable development protocols, technologies and tools.
 Evaluate methods of interface.
 Exposure to industrial applications.
Introduction to IoT concept, Objective, IoT History , Introduction to IoT communication, Why
IoT, IoT Architecture, Telemetry Vs IoT, IoT Technologies behind smart & Intelligence
devices, IoT Application: Home Automation, Health monitoring system, Smart
Transportation and Smart Shopping.
UNIT - II: INTRODUCTION IOT HARDWARE/DEVICES 9

Basics Of Microcontroller, Microprocessor Vs Microcontroller, Types of Sensor, actuators
and their application, Programming Fundamentals(C Programming), Introduction to
Arduino microcontroller, hands on Arduino, Arduino board layout and LED Blinking
temperature sensor application.
UNIT - III: BASICS OF NETWORKING/COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL 9

Types of IoT Network and topology, Communication protocol-MQTT, Introduction to cloud
services-Blynk. Introduction to IoT security.
UNIT - IV: DATA ANALYTICS AND SUPPORTING SERVICES 9

Structured Vs Unstructured Data and Data in Motion Vs Data in Rest – Role of Machine
Learning – No SQL Databases – Hadoop Ecosystem – Apache Kafka, Apache Spark –
Edge Streaming Analytics and Network Analytics – Xively Cloud for IoT, Python Web
Application Framework – Django – AWS for IoT – System Management with NETCONF-
YANG.
UNIT - V: CASE STUDIES/INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS 9

Cisco IoT system - IBM Watson IoT platform – Manufacturing - Converged Plantwide
Ethernet Model (CPwE) – Power Utility Industry – GridBlocks Reference Model - Smart and
Connected Cities: Layered architecture, Smart Lighting, Smart Parking Architecture and
Smart Traffic Control.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
166
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Understand the basics of internet of Things.
 Understand IoT hardware and software components.
 Evaluate methods of interface.
 Evaluate and study suitable development protocols.
 Develop real life IoT based projects.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. David Hanes, Gonzalo Salgueiro, Patrick Grossetete, Rob Barton and Jerome
Henry, ―IoT Fundamentals: Networking Technologies, Protocols and Use Cases
for Internet of Things, Cisco Press, 2017.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. "Internet of Things: A Hands-on Approach", by Arshdeep Bahga and Vijay
Madisetti (Universities Press)
2. "The Internet of Things: Enabling Technologies, Platforms, and Use Cases", by
Pethuru Raj and Anupama C. Raman (CRC Press)
3. “Getting Started With The Internet Of Things: Connecting Sensors and
Microcontrollers to the Cloud” By Cuno Pfister (O REILLY).
4. Introduction to Open Source Software & Open Standards (IBM ICE Publication)

Program
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 2 1 - 2 - - - - 2 - - - 2 - - -
CO 2 - 2 - - 2 - - - - - - - - 2 - -
CO 3 - - 3 - - - 3 - - - 2 - - - 1 -
CO 4 - - - 2 - 2 2 1 - 2 - - - - 2 -
CO 5 - 2 - - - - 2 - 2 - - 2 - 2 - 2
167
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE III
1904709 CYBER SECURITY & FORENSICS LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 Learn the security issues involving information stored in computers
 Learn about the investigations related to the information theft and attacks related to
it.
 Learn computer forensics
 Be familiar with forensics tools
 Learn to analyze and validate forensics data
History of Information Security, Critical Characteristics of Information, NSTISSC Security
Model, Components of an Information System, Securing the Components, Balancing
Security and Access, The SDLC, The Security SDLC.
UNIT - II: SECURITY INVESTIGATION 9

Need for Security, Business Needs, Threats, Attacks, Legal, Ethical and Professional
Issues – An Overview of Computer Security – Access Control Matrix, Policy-Security
policies, Confidentiality policies, Integrity policies and Hybrid policies.
UNIT - III: INTRODUCTION TO CYBER FORENSICS 9

Introduction to Traditional Computer Crime, Traditional Problems associated with
Computer Crime, Introduction to Identity Theft & Identity Fraud. Types of CF Techniques-
Incident and Incident Response Methodologies- Forensic Duplication and Investigation.
Preparation for IR: Creating response tool kit and IR team – Forensics Technology and
Systems – Understanding Computer Investigation- Data Acquisition.
UNIT - IV: EVIDENCE COLLECTION AND FORENSIC TOOLS 9

Processing Crime and Incident Scenes – Working with Windows and DOS Systems,
Current Computer Forensics Tools: Software / Hardware Tools.
UNIT - V: ANALYSIS AND VALIDATION 9

Validating Forensics Data – Data Hiding Techniques – Performing Remote Acquisition-
Network Forensics – Email Investigations – Cell Phone and Mobile Devices Forensics.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
168
COURSE OUTCOMES :
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
 Discuss the importance of network information and to maintain its confidentiality.
 Detailed information to deal with the security against attacks in the network layers.
 Explain computer forensics
 Understand the Use forensics tools
 Analyze and validate forensics data
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Michael E Whitman and Herbert J Mattord, ―Principles of Information Security, Vikas

Publishing House, New Delhi, 2003.
2. Nelson, Phillips, Enfinger, Steuart, “Computer Forensics and Investigations”,
Cengage Learning, India Edition, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. John R.Vacca, “Computer Forensics”, Cengage Learning, 2005
2. Richard E.Smith, “Internet Cryptography”, 3rd Edition Pearson Education, 2008.
3. Marjie T.Britz, “Computer Forensics and Cyber Crime”: An Introduction”, 3rd Edition,

Program
Outcomes(PSO)
Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 2 - - - - 1 - 1 - - - - 3 - - -
CO 2 - - 2 - - - - - 2 - - - - 3 - -
CO 3 - 3 - 3 - - 2 - - 1 - - - - 2 -
CO 4 - - - - 3 - - - - - 2 - - - - 1
CO 5 - - - - - - - 3 - - - 1 - - - -
169
1904710 AGILE SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To learn about fundamentals of agile software’s.
 To learn about agile scrum frame work.
 To learn about agile testing techniques.
 To learn about corba and its application.
 To learn about future trends in industries.
UNIT - I: FUNDAMENTALS OF AGILE 9

The Genesis of Agile, Introduction and background, Agile Manifesto and Principles,
Overview of Scrum, Extreme Programming, Feature Driven development, Lean Software
Development, Agile project management, Design and development practices in Agile
projects, Test Driven Development, Continuous Integration, Refactoring, Pair
Programming. Simple Design, User Stories, Agile Testing, Agile Tools.
UNIT - II: AGILE SCRUM FRAMEWORK 9

Introduction to Scrum, Project phases, Agile Estimation, Planning game, Product backlog,
Sprint backlog, Iteration planning, User story definition, Characteristics and content of user
stories, Acceptance tests and Verifying stories, Project velocity, Burn down chart and
Sprint planning. And retrospective, Daily scrum, Scrum roles – Product Owner, Scrum
Master, Scrum Team. Scrum case study, Tools for Agile project management.
UNIT - III: AGILE TESTING 9

The Agile lifecycle and its impact on testing, Test-Driven Development (TDD), xUnit
framework and tools for TDD, Testing user stories - acceptance tests and scenarios,
Planning and managing testing cycle, Exploratory testing, Risk based testing, Regression
tests, Test Automation, Tools to support the
Agile tester.
UNIT - IV: CORBA 9

Agile design practices, Role of design Principles including Single Responsibility Principle,
Open Closed Principle, Liskov Substitution Principle, Interface Segregation Principles,
Dependency Inversion Principle in Agile Design, Need and significance of Refactoring,
Refactoring Techniques, Continuous Integration, Automated build tools, Version control.
UNIT - V: INDUSTRY TRENDS 9
170
Market scenario and adoption of Agile, Agile ALM, Roles in an Agile project, Agile
applicability, Agile in Distributed teams, Business benefits, Challenges in Agile, Risks and
Mitigation, Agile projects on Cloud, Balancing Agility with Discipline, Agile rapid
development technologies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Recognize the business value of adopting Agile approaches
 Drive development with unit tests using Test Driven Development
 Apply design principles and refactoring to achieve Agility
 Deploy automated build tools, version control and continuous integration
 Perform testing activities within an Agile project
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ken Schawber, Mike Beedle, “Agile Software Development with Scrum”, Pearson
Publications, 2008.
2. Robert C. Martin, “Agile Software Development, Principles, Patterns and
Practices”, Prentice Hall Publications, 2002.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Lisa Crispin, Janet Gregory, “Agile Testing: A Practical Guide for Testers and
Agile Teams”, Addison Wesley Publications, 2008.
2. Alistair Cockburn, “Agile Software Development: The Cooperative Game”, Addison
Wesley Publications, 2006.
3. Mike Cohn, “User Stories Applied: For Agile Software”, Addison Wesley
Publications, 2004.

171
Program
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 2 - 3 3 - - - - - - - 2 2 - - -
CO 2 2 - 3 3 - 2 - - - - - - - 2 - -
CO 3 - - 3 3 - - - - - - 3 - - - 2 -
CO 4 - 2 - - - - - - - 2 - - - 2 - -
CO 5 - 2 - - - 3 - - - - 3 - - - 1 -
1904711 ETHICAL HACKING LTPC
172
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
To understand the Software Project Planning and Evaluation techniques.
 To understand and analyze Information security threats & counter measures.
 To perform security auditing & testing to understand issues relating to ethical
hacking.
 To study & employ network defense measures to understand penetration and
security testing issues.
 To provide technical foundation of cracking and ethical hacking.
 To re-enforce and apply theory to encourage an analytical and problem based
approach to ethical hacking.
UNIT - I: ETHICAL HACKING OVERVIEW & VULNERABILITIES 9

Understanding the importance of security, Concept of ethical hacking and essential
Terminologies Threat, Attack, Vulnerabilities, Target of Evaluation, Exploit. Phases
involved in hacking.
UNIT - II: FOOTPRINTING & PORT SCANNING 9

Foot printing - Introduction to foot printing, Understanding the information gathering
methodology of the hackers, Tools used for the reconnaissance phase. Port Scanning
- Introduction, using port scanning tools, ping sweeps, Scripting Enumeration-
Introduction.
UNIT - III: SYSTEM HACKING 9

Aspect of remote password guessing, Role of eavesdropping ,Various methods of
password cracking, Keystroke Loggers, Understanding Sniffers ,Comprehending
Active and Passive Sniffing, ARP Spoofing and Redirection.
UNIT - IV: HACKING WEB SERVICES & SESSION HIJACKING 9

Web application vulnerabilities, application coding errors, SQL injection into Back-end
Databases, cross-site scripting, cross-site request forging, authentication bypass, web
services and related flaws, protective http headers Understanding Session Hijacking,
Phases involved in Session Hijacking, Types of Session Hijacking.
UNIT - V: HACKING WIRELESS NETWORKS 9
173
Introduction to 802.11, Role of WEP, Cracking WEP Keys, Sniffing Traffic, Wireless
DOS attacks, WLAN Scanners, WLAN Sniffers, Hacking Tools, Securing Wireless
Networks.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Understand vulnerabilities, mechanisms to identify vulnerabilities/threats/attacks.
 Perform penetration & security testing.
 Become a professional ethical hacker.
 Critically evaluate security techniques used to protect system and user data.
 Identify tools and techniques to carry out a penetration testing.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Kimberly Graves, "Certified Ethical Hacker", Wiley India Pvt Ltd, 2010
2. Michael T. Simpson, "Hands-on Ethical Hacking & Network Defense", Course
Technology, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Rajat Khare, "Network Seuciryt and Ethical Hacking", Luniver Press, 2006
2. Ramachandran V, BackTrack 5 Wireless Penetration Testing Beginner’s Guide
(3rd ed.). Packt Publishing, 2011 5. Thomas Mathew, "Ethical Hacking", OSB
publishers, 2003

Program
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 2 3 - - - - - - - - - - 2 - -
CO 2 - - - - 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2
CO 3 - - - 2 - - - - 1 - - - - - 2 -
CO 4 - - - - - 2 - - - - 2 - - 2 - -
CO 5 - - - - - - - - - - - 1 2 - - -
174
1908707 WIRELESS ADHOC & SENSOR NETWORKS LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
To understand the Software Project Planning and Evaluation techniques.
 To learn about the issues and challenges in the design of wireless ad hoc
networks.
 To understand the working of MAC and Routing Protocols for ad hoc and sensor
networks
 To learn about Transport Layer protocols & their QoS for adhoc and sensor
networks.
 To understand various security issues in ad hoc and sensor networks and the
corresponding solution
 To know the challenges in wireless sensor networks
UNIT - I: MAC & ROUTING IN AD HOC NETWORKS 9

Introduction – Issues and challenges in ad hoc networks – MAC Layer Protocols for
wireless ad hoc networks – Contention-Based MAC protocols – MAC Protocols Using
Directional Antennas – Multiple-Channel MAC Protocols – Power-Aware MAC
Protocols – Routing in Ad hoc Networks – Design Issues – Proactive, Reactive and
Hybrid Routing Protocols.
UNIT - II: TRANSPORT & QOS IN AD HOC NETWORKS 9

TCP‟s challenges and Design Issues in Ad Hoc Networks – Transport protocols for ad
hoc networks – Issues and Challenges in providing QoS – MAC Layer QoS solutions
– Network Layer QoS solutions – QoS Model.
UNIT - III: MAC & ROUTING IN WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS 9

Introduction – Applications – Challenges – Sensor network architecture – MAC
Protocols for wireless sensor networks – Low duty cycle protocols and wakeup
concepts – Contention-Based protocols – Schedule-Based protocols – IEEE 802.15.4
Zigbee – Topology Control – Routing Protocols.
UNIT - IV: TRANSPORT & QOS IN WIRELESS SENSOR 9

NETWORKS
Data-Centric and Contention-Based Networking – Transport Layer and QoS in
Wireless Sensor Networks – Congestion Control in network processing – Operating
systems for wireless sensor networks – Examples.
UNIT - V: SECURITY IN AD HOC AND SENSOR NETWORKS 9
175
Security Attacks – Key Distribution and Management – Intrusion Detection – Software
based Anti-tamper techniques – Water marking techniques – Defense against routing
attacks – Secure Ad hoc routing protocols – Broadcast authentication WSN protocols
– TESLA – Biba – Sensor Network Security Protocols – SPINS
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Identify different issues in wireless ad hoc networks
 Understand the challenges and network architecture in wireless sensor
networks.
 Analyze protocols developed for ad hoc and sensor networks.
 Identify and understand security issues in ad hoc and sensor networks.
 Know the transport layer and its services for Wireless ad hoc and sensor
networks.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. C.Siva Ram Murthy and B.S.Manoj, ―Ad Hoc Wireless Networks –
Architectures and Protocols, Pearson Education, 2006.
2. Holger Karl, Andreas Willing, ―Protocols and Architectures for Wireless Sensor
Networks, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2005.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Subir Kumar Sarkar, T G Basavaraju, C Puttamadappa, ―Ad Hoc Mobile

Wireless Networks , Auerbach Publications, 2008.
2. Carlos De Morais Cordeiro, Dharma Prakash Agrawal, ―Ad Hoc and Sensor
Networks: Theory and Applications (2nd Edition), World Scientific Publishing,
2011.
3. Waltenegus Dargie, Christian Poellabauer, ―Fundamentals of Wireless Sensor
Networks Theory and Practice, John Wiley and Sons, 2010
4. Xiang-Yang Li , “Wireless Ad Hoc and Sensor Networks: Theory and
Applications, 7 th edition, Cambridge university Press,2008.

176
Program
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 - - - - 3 - - - 2 - - - - - 2
CO 2 - - - - 3 3 - - - 3 - - - 3 - -
CO 3 - 3 2 - - 3 - - 2 2 - - - - - -
CO 4 3 2 - - - 3 - - - 2 - - - 2 - -
CO 5 2 - - - 3 3 - - - 2 - - - - 3 2
177
1915003 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To understand the need and evolution of quality concepts, contribution of quality
gurus.
 To understand the TQM Principles and Models.
 To learn and apply the traditional tools and techniques of TQM.
 To educate students to apply the modern tools and techniques in TQM.
 To understand and apply QMS and EMS in any organization
Introduction - Definition of quality - Need for quality - Evolution of quality - Dimensions
of product and service quality - Definition of TQM - Basic concepts of TQM – Principles
of TQM - TQM Framework- Barriers to TQM – Benefits of TQM – Cost of Quality.
UNIT - II: TQM PRINCIPLES 9

Leadership--The Deming Philosophy, Quality council, Quality statements and Strategic
planning- Hoshin Planning - Customer Satisfaction –Customer Perception of Quality,
Feedback, Customer complaints, Service Quality, Kano Model and Customer retention
– Employee involvement – Motivation, Empowerment, Team and Teamwork,
Recognition & Reward - Continuous process improvement –Juran Trilogy, PDSA cycle,
5S and Kaizen - Supplier partnership – Partnering, Sourcing, Supplier selection, Supplier
Rating and Relationship development
UNIT - III: TQM TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES I 9

The seven traditional tools of quality – New management tools – Six-sigma Process
Capability–Bench marking – Reasons to bench mark, Bench marking process, Criticisms
of Bench Marking – FMEA –FMEA Documentation, Stages.
UNIT - IV: TQM TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES II 9

Quality Circles – Quality Function Deployment (QFD) – House of Quality – QFD Process,
Benefits – Total Productive Maintenance – Concepts, Benefits – Business Process
Reengineering – Concepts, Process and Applications – Business Process Improvement.
178
UNIT - V: QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 9
Introduction—Benefits of ISO Registration—ISO 9000 Series of Standards—Sector-
Specific Standards—AS 9100, TS16949 and TL 9000-- ISO 9001 Requirements—
Implementation— Documentation—Internal Audits—Registration--Environmental
Management System: Introduction—ISO 14000 Series Standards—Concepts of ISO
14001 -Requirements of ISO 14001—Benefits of EMS – National and International
Awards.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Students would understand the basic concepts, contribution of quality guru’s and TQM
framework.
 Students would become acquainted with TQM Principles.
 Student would be able to apply the tools and techniques of quality management.
 Students will be able to apply Quality philosophy to facilitate business processes and
understand customer requirements.
 Students can apply QMS and EMS in any organization.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Dale H.Besterfiled, Carol B.Michna, Glen H. Besterfield, Mary B.Sacre, Hemant
Urdhwareshe and Rashmi Urdhwareshe, ―Total Quality Management‖, Pearson
Education Asia, Revised Third Edition, Indian Reprint, Sixth Impression, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. James R. Evans and William M. Lindsay, "The Management and Control of Quality",
8th Edition, First Indian Edition, Cengage Learning, 2012.
2. Janakiraman. B and Gopal .R.K., "Total Quality Management - Text and Cases",
Prentice Hall (India) Pvt. Ltd., 2006.
3. Suganthi.L and Anand Samuel, "Total Quality Management", Prentice Hall (India) Pvt.
Ltd., 2006.
4. ISO9001-2015 standards
179
Program
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1
- - - - - - - - - - 1 - - - - -
CO 2
- - - - - - - - - - 1 - - 1 - -
CO 3
- - - 2 - - - - - - - - - - -
CO 4
- 1 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - 1
CO 5
- - - - - - 2 - - - 1 - - - - -
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE - IV
1904801 DEEP LEARNING LTPC
180
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 Gain in-depth knowledge of tensor flow along with its functions, operations, and the
execution pipeline.
 Implement linear regression and gradient descent in tensor flow.
 Understand the concept of artificial neural networks, convolutional neural networks, and
recurrent neural networks.
 Discuss how to speed up neural networks along with regularization techniques to reduce
overfitting.
 Implement deep learning algorithms, and learn how to train deep networks.
UNIT - I: INTRODUCTION TO MACHINE LEARNING BASICS 9

Scalars – Vectors – Matrices – Tensors – Identity and Inverse Matrices – Linear Dependence
and Span – Eigen Decomposition – Probability – Random Variables – Conditional Probability
– Expectation – Variance – Covariance –Bayes’ Rule – Supervised Learning Algorithm –
Unsupervised Learning Algorithm –Stochastic Gradient Descent.
UNIT - II: DEEP NETWORKS 9

Deep Feed Forward Network: Learning XOR – Gradient Based Learning- Hidden Units –
Architecture Design – Back Propagation Algorithms. Regularization for Deep Learning:
Parameter Norm Penalties – Regularization and unconstrained Problems – Dataset
Augmentation – Noise Robustness – Semi supervised Learning – Challenges in Neural Network
Optimization.
UNIT - III: CONVOLUTIONAL NETWORKS 9

The Convolution Operation – Motivation – Pooling – Variants of the Basic Convolution
Function – Structured Outputs – Data types – Efficient Convolution Algorithm – Random or
Unsupervised Features.
UNIT - IV: SEQUENCE MODELING: RECURRENT AND RECURSIVE NETS 9
Unfolding Computational Graphs – Recurrent Neural Networks – Bidirectional RNNs – Encoder

Decoder Sequence to Sequence Architectures – Deep Recurrent Networks – Recursive Neural
181
Networks – The Challenge of Long- Term Dependencies – Echo State Networks – The Long-
tem memory and other Gated RNNs – Optimization for Long Term Dependencies – Explicit
Memory.
UNIT - V: DEEP LEARNING APPLICATION 9

Linear Factor Models – Auto Encoders - Representation Learning – Structured Probabilistic
Models for Deep Learning - Monte Carlo Methods.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Identify the deep learning algorithms which are more appropriate for various types of
learning tasks in various domains.
 Implement deep learning algorithms and solve real-world problems.
 To understand the theory behind deep learning methods such as Convolutional Neural
Networks and auto encoders.
 To have a grasp of the open issues and trends in deep learning research,
 To have a feeling of when to use or avoid deep learning methods
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ian GoodFellow, Yoshua Bengio , Aaron Courville, “Deep Learning” MIT Press,
Cambridge Massachusetts, London England 2017.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. www.deeplearningbook.org
2. Adam Gibson and Josh Patterson’s Deep Learning: A Practitioners Approach
3. https://github.com/janishar/mit-deep-learning-book-pdf
4. http://deeplearning.net/tutorial/
5. https://www.guru99.com/deep-learning-tutorial.html
6. Francois Chollet, Google AI researcher and creator of the popular Keras deep learning
library, published his book, Deep Learning with Python in October 2017.
182
Program
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1
2 - - - - 2 - - - - - - 2 - - -
CO 2 2
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
CO 3 2 2 - 2 -
- - - - - - - - - - -
CO 4 2 - - 2
- - - - - - - - - - - -
CO 5 3 2 - 2 - 2 - 2 - -
- - - - - -
1904802 GPU ARCHITECTURE & PROGRAMMING LTPC
183
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To understand the basics of GPU architectures and CUDA programming.
 To analyze about the various programming issues.
 To write programs for massively parallel processors.
 To understand the issues in mapping algorithms for GPUs.
 To introduce different GPU programming models.
UNIT - I: GPU ARCHITECTURE 9

Evolution of GPU architectures - Understanding Parallelism with GPU –Typical GPU
Architecture - CUDA Hardware Overview - Threads, Blocks, Grids, Warps, Scheduling -
Memory Handling with CUDA: Shared Memory, Global Memory, Constant Memory and
Texture Memory.
UNIT - II: CUDA PROGRAMMING 9

Using CUDA - Multi GPU - Multi GPU Solutions - Optimizing CUDA Applications: Problem
Decomposition, Memory Considerations, Transfers, Thread Usage, Resource Contentions.
UNIT - III: PROGRAMMING ISSUES 9

Common Problems: CUDA Error Handling, Parallel Programming Issues, Synchronization,
Algorithmic Issues, Finding and Avoiding Errors.
UNIT - IV: OPENCL BASICS 9

OpenCL Standard – Kernels – Host Device Interaction – Execution Environment – Memory
Model – Basic OpenCL Examples.
UNIT - V: ALGORITHMS ON GPU 9

Parallel Patterns: Convolution, Prefix Sum, Sparse Matrix - Matrix Multiplication -
Programming Heterogeneous Cluster.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
184
 Describe GPU Architecture
 Write programs using CUDA, identify issues and debug them
 Implement efficient algorithms in GPUs for common application kernels, such as
matrix multiplication
 Write simple programs using OpenCL
 Identify efficient parallel programming patterns to solve problems
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Shane Cook, CUDA Programming: ―A Developer's Guide to Parallel Computing
with GPUs (Applications of GPU Computing), First Edition, Morgan Kaufmann,
2012.
2. David R. Kaeli, Perhaad Mistry, Dana Schaa, Dong Ping Zhang, ―Heterogeneous
computing with OpenCL‖, 3rd Edition, Morgan Kauffman, 2015.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Nicholas Wilt, ―CUDA Handbook: A Comprehensive Guide to GPU Programming,
Addison - Wesley, 2013.
2. Jason Sanders, Edward Kandrot, ―CUDA by Example: An Introduction to General
Purpose GPU Programming, Addison - Wesley, 2010.
3. David B. Kirk, Wen-mei W. Hwu, Programming Massively Parallel Processors - A
Hands-on Approach, Third Edition, Morgan Kaufmann, 2016.
4. http://www.nvidia.com/object/cuda_home_new.html
5. http://www.openCL.org

Program
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 2 - - 2 1 - - - - - - - 3 - - -
CO 2 - 1 2 2 3 - - - - - - - - 3 2 -
CO 3 - - 3 - 2 - - - - - - - - - 3 -
CO 4 - - 2 - 2 - - - - - - 2 - - - 2
CO 5 - 2 2 1 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 2
1908012 SOCIAL NETWORK ANALYSIS LTPC
185
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To understand the concept of semantic web and related applications.
 To learn knowledge representation using ontology.
 To understand human behavior in social web and related communities.
 To understand privacy issues in online social networks.
 To learn visualization of social networks.
Introduction to Semantic Web: Limitations of current Web - Development of Semantic Web
- Emergence of the Social Web - Social Network analysis: Development of Social Network
Analysis - Key concepts and measures in network analysis - Electronic sources for
network analysis: Electronic discussion networks, Blogs and online communities - Web-
based networks
UNIT - II: MODELLING, AGGREGATING AND KNOWLEDGE 9

REPRESENTATION
Ontology and their role in the Semantic Web: Ontology-based knowledge Representation
- Ontology languages for the Semantic Web: Resource Description Framework - Web
Ontology Language - Modelling and aggregating social network data: State-of-the-art in
network data representation - Ontological representation of social individuals - Ontological
representation of social relationships - Aggregating and reasoning with social network data.
UNIT - III: EXTRACTION AND MINING COMMUNITIES IN WEB SOCIAL 9

NETWORKS
Extracting evolution of Web Community from a Series of Web Archive - Detecting

communities in social networks - Definition of community - Evaluating communities -
Methods for community detection and mining - Applications of community mining
algorithms - Tools for detecting communities social network infrastructures and
communities - Decentralized online social networks.
UNIT - IV: PREDICTING HUMAN BEHAVIOUR AND PRIVACY ISSUES 9

Understanding and predicting human behavior for social communities - User data
management - Inference and Distribution - Enabling new human experiences - Reality
186
mining - Context - Awareness - Privacy in online social networks - Trust in online
environment - Trust models based on subjective logic - Trust network analysis - Trust
transitivity analysis - Combining trust and reputation - Trust derivation based on trust
comparisons - Attack spectrum and countermeasures.
UNIT - V: VISUALIZATION AND APPLICATIONS OF SOCIAL 9

NETWORKS
Graph theory - Centrality - Clustering - Node-Edge Diagrams - Matrix representation -

Visualizing online social networks, Visualizing social networks with matrix-based
representations - Matrix and Node-Link Diagrams - Hybrid representations - Cover
networks - Community welfare - Collaboration networks - Co-Citation networks..
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Develop semantic web related applications.
 Represent knowledge using ontology.
 Predict human behavior in social web and related communities.
 Learn Visualize social networks.
 Understand privacy issues in online social networks, the knowledge representation
and applications of social networks.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Peter Mika, - Social Networks and the Semantic Web, First Edition, Springer 2007.
2. Borko Furht, Handbook of Social Network Technologies and Applications, 1st
Edition, Springer, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Guandong Xu, Yanchun Zhang and Lin Li, - Web Mining and Social Networking -
Techniques and applications, First Edition, Springer, 2011.
2. Dion Goh and Schubert Foo, - Social information Retrieval Systems: Emerging
Technologies and Applications for Searching the Web Effectively, IGI Global
Snippet, 2008.
3. Max Chevalier, Christine Julien and Chantal Soulé-Dupuy, - Collaborative and

Social Information Retrieval and Access: Techniques for Improved user Modelling,
IGI Global Snippet, 2009.
187
4. John G. Breslin, Alexander Passant and Stefan Decker, - The Social Semantic
Web, Springer, 2009.

Program
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 - 3 - - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
CO 2 - - - - 2 - - - - 1 - - - - 2 -
CO 3 - - - 2 - - - - 1 - - - - - 2
CO 4 - - - - - 2 - - - - 2 - - 2 - -
CO 5 - - - - - - - 3 - - - 1 2 - - -
1908010 COMPUTER GRAPHICS AND MULTIMEDIA LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
188
 To understand the two-dimensional graphics and their transformations.
 To understand the three-dimensional graphics and their transformations.
 To appreciate illumination and color models
 To become familiar with understand clipping techniques
 To become familiar with Blender Graphics.
UNIT - I: OUTPUT PRIMITIVES AND COLOR MODELS 9

Introduction to computer graphics and applications- Output primitives – points and lines, line
drawing algorithms, circle and ellipse generating algorithms, filled are aprimitives. Light
sources - basic illumination models – halftone patterns and dithering techniques; Properties
of light - Standard primaries and chromaticity diagram; Intuitive colour concepts - RGB colour
model - YIQ colour model - CMY colour model - HSV colour model - HLS colour model; Colour
selection.
UNIT - II: TWO-DIMENSIONAL GRAPHICS 9

Two dimensional geometric transformations – Matrix representations and homogeneous
coordinates, composite transformations; Two dimensional viewing – viewing pipeline, viewing
coordinate reference frame; window-to-viewport coordinate transformation, Two dimensional
viewing functions; clipping operations – point, line, and polygon clipping algorithms.
UNIT - III: THREE-DIMENSIONAL GRAPHICS 9

Three dimensional concepts; Three dimensional object representations – Polygon surfaces-
Polygon tables- Plane equations - Polygon meshes; Curved Lines and surfaces, Quadratic
surfaces; Blobby objects; Spline representations – Bezier curves and surfaces -B-Spline
curves and surfaces. TRANSFORMATION AND VIEWING: Three dimensional geometric and
modeling transformations – Translation, Rotation, Scaling, composite transformations; Three
dimensional viewing – viewing pipeline, viewing coordinates, Projections, Clipping; Visible
surface detection methods.
UNIT - IV: MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM DESIGN & MULTIMEDIA FILE 9

HANDLING
Multimedia basics − Multimedia applications − Multimedia system architecture − Evolving

technologies for multimedia − Defining objects for multimedia systems − Multimedia data
189
interface standards − Multimedia databases. Compression and decompression − Data and
file format standards − Multimedia I/O technologies − Digital voice and audio − Video image
and animation − Full motion video − Storage and retrieval technologies.
UNIT - V: HYPERMEDIA 9
Multimedia authoring and user interface - Hypermedia messaging -Mobile messaging −
Hypermedia message component − Creating hypermedia message − Integrated multimedia
message standards − Integrated document management − Distributed multimedia systems.
CASE STUDY: BLENDER GRAPHICS Blender Fundamentals – Drawing Basic Shapes –
Modelling – Shading & Textures
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Apply Illumination and color models
 Design two dimensional graphics and apply two dimensional transformations
 Design three dimensional graphics and apply three dimensional transformations.
 Apply clipping techniques to graphics
 Understood Different types of Multimedia File Format
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Donald Hearn and Pauline Baker M, ―Computer Graphics", Prentice Hall, New
Delhi, 2007 [ UNIT - I: – III ]
2. Andleigh, P. K and Kiran Thakrar, ―Multimedia Systems and Design‖, PHI, 2003.
[ UNIT IV,V ]
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Judith Jeffcoate, ―Multimedia in practice: Technology and Applications‖, PHI, 1998.
2. Foley, Vandam, Feiner and Hughes, ―Computer Graphics: Principles
and Practice‖, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2003.
3. Jeffrey McConnell, ―Computer Graphics: Theory into Practice‖, Jones and Bartlett
Publishers,2006.
4. Hill F S Jr., "Computer Graphics", Maxwell Macmillan , 1990.
5. Peter Shirley, Michael Ashikhmin, Michael Gleicher, Stephen R Marschner, Erik
Reinhard, KelvinSung, and AK Peters, ―Fundamentals of Computer Graphics‖,
CRC Press, 2010.
190
6. William M. Newman and Robert F.Sproull, ―Principles of Interactive Computer
Graphics‖ Mc Graw Hill 1978.
7. https://www.blender.org/support/tutorials/.

Program
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 2 2 1 2
CO 2 2 2 2 2
CO 3 2 2 2
CO 4 2 2
CO 5 2 2 2 2
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE - V
1904803 GREEN COMPUTING LTPC

3003
191
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To gain basic knowledge about fundamentals of green computing.
 To know about green assets and models.
 To minimize the inclusion of harmful materials.
 To use as many biodegradable materials as possible.
 To explore green frame work and compliance.
UNIT – I: FUNDAMENTALS 9
Green IT Fundamentals: Business, IT, and the Environment –Green computing: carbon
foot print, scoop on power –Green IT Strategies: Drivers, Dimensions, and Goals –
Environmentally Responsible Business: Policies, Practices, and Metrics.
UNIT – II: GREEN ASSETS AND MODELING 9

Green Assets: Buildings, Data Centers, Networks, and Devices - Green Business Process
Management: Modeling, Optimization, and Collaboration – Green Enterprise Architecture
–Environmental Intelligence Green Supply Chains – Green Information Systems: Design
and Development Models.
UNIT - III: GREEN FRAMEWORK 9

Virtualizing of IT systems –Role of electric utilities, Telecommuting, teleconferencing and
teleporting -Materials recycling –Best ways for Green PC –Green Data center –Green
Grid framework.
UNIT - IV: GREEN COMPLIANCE 9

Socio-cultural aspects of Green IT –Green Enterprise Transformation Roadmap –Green
Compliance: Protocols, Standards, and Audits –Emergent Carbon Issues: Technologies
and Future.
UNIT - V: CASE STUDIES 9

The Environmentally Responsible Business Strategies (ERBS) –Case Study Scenarios
for Trial Runs – calculating the carbon footprint – greening mobile devices - CASE
STUDIES –Applying Green IT Strategies and Applications to a Home, Hospital, Packaging
Industry and Telecom Sector.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 To gain basic knowledge about fundamentals of green computing.
192
 To minimize the inclusion of harmful materials.
 To apply changing government policy to encourage recycling.
 To preserve resources which use less energy to produce use and dispose of
product.
 To save resources and environment.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhuvan Unhelkar, Green IT Strategies and Applications-Using Environmental
Intelligence, CRC Press, June 2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Alin Gales, Michael Schaefer, Mike Ebbers, Green Data Center: steps for the
Journey, Shoff/IBM rebook, 2011.
2. John Lamb, The Greening of IT, Pearson Education, 2009.
3. Jason Harris, Green Computing and Green IT-Best Practices on regulations &
industry, Lulu.com, 2008.
4. Carl Speshocky, Empowering Green Initiatives with IT, John Wiley & Sons, 2010.
5. Wu Chun Feng (editor), Green computing: Large Scale energy efficiency, CRC
Press, 2012
6. Woody Leonhard, Katherrine Murray, Green Home computing for dummies,
August 2009.

Program
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 3
CO 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO 4 3 3
CO 5 3
1904804 HUMAN COMPUTER INTERACTION LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
193
 To learn the foundations of Human Computer Interaction.
 To become familiar with the design technologies for individuals and persons with
disabilities.
 To be aware of mobile HCI.
 To learn the guidelines for user interface.
 Highlights the effects of different model of interaction.
UNIT - I: FOUNDATIONS OF HCI 9

The Human: I/O channels – Memory – Reasoning and problem solving; The Computer:
Devices – Memory – processing and networks; Interaction: Models – frameworks –
Ergonomics – styles – elements – interactivity- Paradigms. - Case Studies
UNIT - II: DESIGN & SOFTWARE PROCESS 9

Interactive Design: Basics – process – scenarios – navigation – screen design – Iteration
and prototyping. HCI in software process: Software life cycle – usability engineering –
Prototyping in practice – design rationale. Design rules: principles, standards, guidelines,
rules. Evaluation Techniques – Universal Design
UNIT - III: MODELS AND THEORIES 9

HCI Models: Cognitive models: Socio-Organizational issues and stakeholder
requirements –Communication and collaboration models-Hypertext, Multimedia and
WWW.
UNIT - IV: MOBILE HCI 9

Mobile Ecosystem: Platforms, Application frameworks- Types of Mobile Applications:
Widgets, Applications, Games- Mobile Information Architecture, Mobile 2.0, Mobile
Design: Elements of Mobile Design, Tools. - Case Studies
UNIT - V: WEB INTERFACE DESIGN 9

Designing Web Interfaces – Drag & Drop, Direct Selection, Contextual Tools, Overlays,
Inlays and Virtual Pages, Process Flow - Case Studies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
194
 Design effective dialog for HCI
 Design effective HCI for individuals and persons with disabilities.
 Assess the importance of user feedback.
 Explain the HCI implications for designing multimedia/ ecommerce/ e-learning
Web sites.
 Develop meaningful user interface.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Alan Dix, Janet Finlay, Gregory Abowd, Russell Beale, ―Human Computer
Interaction, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education, 2004 (UNIT - I:, II & III)
2. Brian Fling, Mobile Design and Development, First Edition, O‘Reilly Media Inc., 2009
(UNIT – IV)
3. Bill Scott and Theresa Neil, ―Designing Web Interfaces, First Edition, O‘Reilly, 2009.
(UNIT-V)
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Interaction Design: Beyond Human-Computer Interaction, Jenny Preece, Yvonne
Rogers, Helen Sharp, 2002.
2. Designing Interactive Systems: A Comprehensive Guide to HCI, UX and Interaction
Design, David Benyon, 2010.
Program
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 1 3 1 1 3 3
CO 2 1 3 2 3 2
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
CO 4 3 1 2 3 2
CO 5 3 3
1908803 SERVICE ORIENTED ARCHITECTURE LTPC

3 00 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
195
 Learn XML fundamentals.
 Be exposed to build applications based on XML.
 Understand the key principles behind SOA.
 Be familiar with the web services technology elements for realizing SOA.
 Learn the various web service standards.
UNIT – I: INTRODUCTION TO XML 9

XML document structure – Well formed and valid documents – Namespaces – DTD – XML
Schema – X-Files.
UNIT – II: BUILDING XML- BASED APPLICATIONS 9

Parsing XML – using DOM, SAX – XML Transformation and XSL – XSL Formatting –
Modeling Databases in XML
UNIT – III: SERVICE ORIENTED ARCHITECTURE 9

Characteristics of SOA, Comparing SOA with Client-Server and Distributed architectures –
Benefits of SOA -- Principles of Service orientation – Service layers.
UNIT – IV: WEB SERVICES 9

Service descriptions – WSDL – Messaging with SOAP – Service discovery – UDDI –
Message Exchange Patterns – Orchestration – Choreography –WS Transactions.
UNIT - V: BUILDING SOA-BASED APPLICATIONS 9

Service Oriented Analysis and Design – Service Modeling – Design standards and
guidelines -- Composition – WS-BPEL – WS-Coordination – WS-Policy – WS-Security –
SOA support in J2EE
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Understand XML technologies and service orientation
196
 Understand web services and WS standards
 Use web services extensions to develop solutions
 Understand and apply service modeling and service oriented analysis
 Design SOA based application development
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ron Schmelzer et al. “ XML and Web Services”, Pearson Education, 2002
2. Thomas Erl, “Service Oriented Architecture: Concepts, Technology, and Design”,
Pearson Education, 2005.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Frank P.Coyle, “XML, Web Services and the Data Revolution”, Pearson Education,
2002.
2. Eric Newcomer, Greg Lomow, “Understanding SOA with Web Services”, Pearson
Education, 2005.
3. Sandeep Chatterjee and James Webber, “Developing Enterprise Web Services: An
Architect's Guide”, Prentice Hall, 2004.
4. James McGovern, Sameer Tyagi, Michael E.Stevens, Sunil Mathew, ”Java Web
Services Architecture”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2003.

Program
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 2 1 2
CO 2 3 3 2 3 2
CO 3 2 3 1
CO 4 1 3 2 3
CO 5 1
1908009 INFORMATION STORAGE AND MANAGEMENT LTPC

3 003
197
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To understand the basic components of Storage System Environment.
 To understand the Storage Area Network Characteristics and Components.
 To examine emerging technologies including IP-SAN.
 To describe the different backup and recovery topologies and their role in
providing disaster recovery and business continuity capabilities.
 To understand the local and remote replication technologies.
UNIT – I: STORAGE SYSTEMS 9
Introduction to Information Storage and Management: Information Storage, Evolution of
Storage Technology and Architecture, Data Center Infrastructure, Key Challenges in
Managing Information, Information Lifecycle. Storage System Environment: Components
of the Host. RAID: Implementation of RAID, RAID Array Components, RAID Levels, RAID
Comparison, RAID Impact on Disk Performance, Hot Spares.
UNIT – II: STORAGE NETWORKING TECHNOLOGIES 9

Direct-Attached Storage and Introduction to SCSI: Types of DAS, DAS Benefits and
Limitations, Disk Drive Interfaces, Introduction to Parallel SCSI, SCSI Command Model.
Storage Area Networks: Fiber Channel, SAN Evolution, SAN Components, Fiber
Channel Connectivity, Fiber Channel Ports, Fiber Channel Architecture, Zoning, Fiber
Channel Login Types, Fiber Channel Topologies.
UNIT – III: ADVANCED STORAGE NETWORKING AND VIRTUALIZATION 9

IP SAN: iSCSI, FCIP. Content-Addressed Storage: Fixed Content and Archives, Types
of Archives, Features and Benefits of CAS, CAS Architecture, Object Storage and
Retrieval in CAS, CAS Examples. Storage Virtualization: Forms of Virtualization, NIA
Storage Virtualization Taxonomy, Storage Virtualization Configurations, Storage
Virtualization Challenges, Types of Storage Virtualization.
UNIT – IV: BUSINESS CONTINUITY 9

Introduction to Business Continuity: Information Availability, BC Terminology, BC
Planning Lifecycle, Failure Analysis, Business Impact Analysis, BC Technology
Solutions. Backup and Recovery: Backup Purpose, Considerations, Granularity,
Recovery Considerations, Backup Methods and Process.
UNIT - V: REPLICATION 9
Local Replication: Source and Target, Uses of Local Replicas, Data Consistency, Local
Replication Technologies, Restore and Restart Considerations, Creating Multiple
Replicas, Management Interface.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
198
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Understand the logical and physical components of a Storage infrastructure.
 Evaluate storage architectures, including storage subsystems, DAS, SAN, NAS,
and CAS.
 Understand the various forms and types of Storage Virtualization.
 Understand the business continuity capabilities.
 Distinguish different remote replication technologies.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. EMC Corporation, Information Storage and Management, Wiley, India.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Robert Spalding, ―Storage Networks: The Complete Reference ―, Tata
McGraw Hill, Osborne, 2003.
2. Marc Farley, ―Building Storage Networks, Tata McGraw Hill, Osborne,
2001.
3. Meeta Gupta, Storage Area Networks Fundamentals, Pearson Education
Limited, 2002.
Program
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 3
CO 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO 4 3 3 3
CO 5 3 1
1908807 BLOCKCHAIN LTPC

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
199
 The objective of this course is to provide conceptual understanding of how blockchain
technology can be used to innovate and improve business processes.
 The course covers the technological underpinning of blockchain operations.
 To learn the practical implementation of solutions using blockchain technology.
 To understand the critical evaluation of existing “smart contract” capabilities and
platforms, and examines their future directions, opportunities, risks and challenges.
 To develop familiarity of current technologies, tools, and implementation strategies.
UNIT – I: INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction: Overview of Blockchain, Public Ledgers, Bitcoin, Smart Contracts, Block in a
Blockchain, Transactions, Distributed Consensus, Public vs Private Blockchain,
Understanding Crypto currency to Blockchain, Permissioned Model of Blockchain, Overview
of Security aspects of Blockchain, Basic Crypto Primitives: Cryptographic Hash Function,
Properties of a hash function, Hash pointer and Merkle tree, Digital Signature, Public Key
Cryptography, A basic cryptocurrency.
UNIT – II: UNDERSTANDING BLOCKCHAIN WITH CRYPTO CURRENCY 9

Bitcoin and Blockchain: Creation of coins, Payments and double spending, Bitcoin Scripts,
Bitcoin P2P Network, Transaction in Bitcoin Network, Block Mining, Block propagation and
block relay. Working with Consensus in Bitcoin: Distributed consensus in open environments,
Consensus in a Bitcoin network, Proof of Work (PoW) – basic introduction, HashcashPoW,
Bitcoin PoW, Attacks on PoW and the monopoly problem, Proof of Stake, Proof of Burn and
Proof of Elapsed Time, The life of a Bitcoin Miner, Mining Difficulty, Mining Pool.
UNIT – III: UNDERSTANDING BLOCKCHAIN FOR ENTERPRISES 9

Permissioned Blockchain: Permissioned model and use cases, Design issues for
Permissioned blockchains, Execute contracts, State machine replication, Overview of
Consensus models for permissioned blockchain- Distributed consensus in closed
environment, Paxos, RAFT Consensus, Byzantine general problem, Byzantine fault tolerant
system, Lamport-Shostak-Pease BFT Algorithm, BFT over Asynchronous systems.
UNIT – IV: ENTERPRISE APPLICATION OF BLOCK 9

Cross border payments, Know Your Customer (KYC), Food Security, Mortgage over
Blockchain, Blockchain enabled Trade, We Trade – Trade Finance Network, Supply Chain
Financing, Identity on Blockchain.
200
UNIT - V: BLOCKCHAIN APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT9 9
Hyperledger Fabric- Architecture, Identities and Policies, Membership and Access Control,
Channels, Transaction Validation, Writing smart contract using Hyperledger Fabric, Writing
smart contract using Ethereum, Overview of Ripple and Corda
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Understand block chain technology.
 Develop blockchain based solutions and write smart contract using Hyper ledger Fabric
and Ethereum frameworks.
 Build and deploy blockchain application for on premise and cloud based architecture.
 Integrate ideas from various domains and implement them using blockchain
technology in different perspectives.
 Analyze the incentive structure in a blockchain based system and critically assess its
functions, benefits and vulnerabilities
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Melanie Swan, “Blockchain: Blueprint for a New Economy”, O’Reilly, 2015.
2. Josh Thompsons, “Blockchain: The Blockchain for Beginners- Guide to Blockchain
Technology and Leveraging Blockchain Programming”.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Daniel Drescher, “Blockchain Basics”, Apress; 1stedition, 2017.
2. Anshul Kaushik, “Blockchain and Crypto Currencies”, Khanna Publishing House, Delhi.
3. Imran Bashir, “Mastering Blockchain: Distributed Ledger Technology, Decentralization
and Smart Contracts Explained”, Packt Publishing.
4. Ritesh Modi, “Solidity Programming Essentials: A Beginner’s Guide to Build Smart
Contracts for Ethereum and Blockchain”, Packt Publishing.
5. Salman Baset, Luc Desrosiers, Nitin Gaur, Petr Novotny, Anthony O’Dowd,
Venkatraman Ramakrishna, “Hands-On Blockchain with Hyperledger: Building
Decentralized Applications with Hyperledger Fabric and Composer”, Import, 2018.
Program
Outcomes
201
Course (PSO)
Outcomes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 3 2 2
CO 2 3 3 3 3
CO 3 3 2 3 2 2 3
CO 4 3 2 3 2 2
CO 5 2 3 3 2 3 2
OPEN ELECTIVE - I
1902512 ENVIRONMENT AND AGRICULTURE LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
202
 To emphasize on the importance of environment and agriculture on changing global
Scenario and the emerging issues connected to it.
 To understand the ecological context of agriculture and its concerns.
 To study the context of climate change and emerging global issues.
 To gain knowledge on water balance.
 To understand the importance of virtual water.
UNIT - I : ENVIRONMENTAL CONCERNS 9
Environmental basis for agriculture and food – Land use and landscape changes – Water quality
issues – Changing social structure and economic focus – Globalization and its impacts – Agro
ecosystems.
UNIT - II : ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS 9
Irrigation development and watersheds – mechanized agriculture and soil cover impacts –
Erosion and problems of deposition in irrigation systems – Agricultural drainage and downstream
impacts – Agriculture versus urban impacts.
UNIT - III : CLIMATECHANGE 9
Global warming and changing environment – Ecosystem changes – Changing blue green-grey
water cycles – Water scarcity and water shortages – Desertification.
UNIT - IV : ECOLOGICAL DIVERSITY AND AGRICULTURE 9
Ecological diversity, wild life and agriculture – GM crops and their impacts on the environment –
Insets and agriculture – Pollination crisis – Ecological farming principles – Forest fragmentation
and agriculture – Agricultural biotechnology concerns.
UNIT - V : EMERGING ISSUES 9
Global environmental governance – alternate culture systems – Mega farms and vertical farms –
Virtual water trade and its impacts on local environment – Agricultural environment policies and
its impacts – Sustainable agriculture.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Students may be able to know how the environment and agriculture are related and the
changes in the environmental due to agriculture.
203
 Students will be able to gather idea on about how the mechanization helps and impacts
of soil erosion due to agricultural activities.
 Students will have a wide knowledge of changing environment due to global warming and
climate change and its impact on water.
 Students are exposed to the ecological diversity in agriculture and different technologies
used in farming activities.
 Students are able to understand the global governance system and agricultural policies
involved in the sustainable agricultural systems.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. M.Lakshmi Narasaiah, Environment and Agriculture, Discovery Pub. House, 2006. 2.

Arvind Kumar, Environment and Agriculture, ABH Publications, New Delhi, 2005
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. T.C. Byerly, Environment and Agriculture, United States Dept. of Agriculture, Economic
Research Service, 2006. 2. Robert D. Havener, Steven A. Breth, Environment and
agriculture: rethinking development issues for the 21st century: proceedings of a
symposium, Winrock International Institute for Agricultural Development, 1994.
2. Environment and agriculture: environmental problems affecting agriculture in the Asia and
Pacific region; World Food Day Symposium, Bangkok, Thailand. 1989.
Program
Outcomes Outcomes
(PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1
CO 2 2 3 1 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
CO 3 1 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 1
CO 4 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 1 2 3 3 1 1
CO 5 3 2 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 1
1902513 PRODUCTION TECHNOLOGY OF AGRICULTURE MACHINERY LTPC

3003
OBJECTIVES:
204
 To understand the mechanical properties of engineering materials and their classifications
 To understand the basic principles of lathe and the corresponding machines.
 To gain knowledge on various welding techniques available.
 To understand the importance of advanced manufacturing process.
 To emphasize on the importance of accuracy on machine operation.
UNIT- I: ENGINEERING MATERIALS 9
Engineering materials - their classification - Mechanical properties of materials, strength,
elasticity, plasticity, stiffness, malleability, ductility, brittleness, toughness, hardness, resilience,
machinability, formability, weldability. Steels and cast irons: Carbon steels, their classification
based on percentage of carbon as low, mild, medium & high carbon steel, their properties &
applications. Wrought iron, cast iron. Alloy steels: Stainless steel, tool steel.
UNIT- II: MACHINING 9

Basic principles of lathe - machine and operations performed on it. Basic description of machines
and operations of Shaper-Planner, Drilling, Milling & Grinding.
UNIT- III: WELDING 9

Introduction, classification of welding processes. Gas welding, types of flames and their
applications. Electric Arc welding. Resistance welding, Soldering & Brazing processes and their
uses.
UNIT-IV: ADVANCED MANUFACTURING PROCESS 9

Abrasive flow machining - abrasive jet machining - water jet machining - Electro Discharge
Machining (EDM) - Wire cut EDM - Electro Chemical Machining (ECM) - Ultrasonic Machining /
Drilling (USM / USD) - Electron Beam Machining (EBM) - Laser Beam Machining (LBM).
UNIT- V: CNC MACHINE 9

Numerical control (NC) machine tools - CNC: types, constitutional details, special features -
design considerations of CNC machines for improving machining accuracy - structural members
- slide ways - linear bearings - ball screws - spindle drives and feed drives. Part programming
fundamentals - manual programming.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
 Students can able to apply the different manufacturing process and use this in industry
for component production.
205
 Students will be able to understand the working principle of lathe and various operations
done on it.
 Students will be able to gather idea on welding and soldering process.
 Students will gain wide knowledge on various advance manufacturing process.
 Students will gain knowledge in CNC machine and improving the machining accuracy.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. “Manufacturing Engineering and Technology”, Kalpakjian and Schmid, Pearson, 2010.
2. Hajra Choudry, “Elements of workshop technology - Vol II”, Media promoters, 2002.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Gupta. K.N., and Kaushik, J.P., 1998, Workshop Technology Vol I and II, New Heights,
Daryaganj, New Delhi.
2. Arthur. D., et. al. 1998, General Engineering Workshop Practice, Asia Publishing House,
Bombay.
3. Chapman W.A.J., Workshop Technology, 1992, Part I, II, III, E.L.B.S. and Edward Amold
Publishers Ltd, London.
Programme Outcomes (PO) Program
Course Specific
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
1 3 - 2 1 1 3 - 2 - - - 2 1 - 2 2
2 2 2 - - 1 2 - - 2 - 1 - 2 2 - 3
3 3 2 - 2 2 - - 2 - - - - 1 - 3 2
4 2 - 2 3 3 - 2 - 2 1 1 2 2 3 - 2
5 - 2 - 2 3 - 2 - 3 1 - - - 2 2 3
1903514 AIR POLLUTION AND CONTROL ENGINEERING LTPC

3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
206
 To impart knowledge on the principle and design of control of Indoor/ particulate/
gaseous air pollutant and its emerging trends.
 To gain knowledge of characteristics of air pollution and noise pollution.
 To create awareness among the sources and effects of air pollution.
 To gain knowledge on air pollution control equipment’s.
 To develop a knowledge on air quality standards.
UNIT - I : INTRODUCTION 9
Structure and composition of Atmosphere – Definition, Scope and Scales of Air Pollution –
Sources and classification of air pollutants and their effect on human health, vegetation,
animals, property, aesthetic value and visibility- Ambient Air Quality and Emission
standards – Ambient and stack sampling and Analysis of Particulate and Gaseous
Pollutants.
UNIT - II : METEOROLOGY 9
Effects of meteorology on Air Pollution - Fundamentals, Atmospheric stability, Inversion,

Wind profiles and stack plume patterns- Atmospheric Diffusion Theories – Dispersion
models, Plume rise.
UNIT - III : CONTROL OF PARTICULATE CONTAMINANTS 9
Factors affecting Selection of Control Equipment – Gas Particle Interaction – Working

principle, Design and performance equations of Gravity Separators, Centrifugal separators
Fabric filters, Particulate Scrubbers, Electrostatic Precipitators – Operational
Considerations.
UNIT - IV : CONTROL OF GASEOUS CONTAMINANTS 9
Factors affecting Selection of Control Equipment – Working principle, Design and

performance equations of absorption, Adsorption, condensation, Incineration, Bio
scrubbers, Bio filters – Process control and Monitoring - Operational Considerations.
UNIT - V : INDOOR AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT 9
Air quality standards - Sources, types and control of indoor air pollutants, sick building
syndrome and Building related illness - Town planning regulations of industries-Sources
and Effects of Noise Pollution – Measurement – Standards –Control and Preventive
measures.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 An understanding of the nature and characteristics of air pollutants, noise pollution

and basic concepts of air quality management.
207
 Ability to identify, formulate and solve air and noise pollution problems.
 Ability to design stacks and particulate air pollution control devices to meet applicable
standards.
 Ability to select control equipment’s.
 Ability to control effects of noise pollution and indoor air pollution.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Lawrence K. Wang, Norman C. Pareira, Yung Tse Hung, "Air Pollution Control
Engineering", Tokyo, springer science , science media LLC,2004.
2. Noel de Nevers, "Air Pollution Control Engineering", Waveland press,Inc 2017.
3. Anjaneyulu. Y, "Air Pollution and Control Technologies", Allied Publishers (P) Ltd.,
India 2002.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. David H.F. Liu, Bela G. Liptak, "Air Pollution", Lweis Publishers, 2000. 2. Arthur C.
Stern, "Air Pollution (Vol.I – Vol.VIII)", Academic Press, 2006.
2. Wayne T.Davis, "Air Pollution Engineering Manual", John Wiley & Sons, Inc, 2000.
3. M.N Rao and HVN Rao, "Air Pollution", Tata Mcgraw Hill Publishing Company
limited,2007.

Program
Course
Outcomes
Outcomes
(PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 3 2
CO 2
CO 3 3 1 3
CO 4
CO 5 2 2 2
1903515 PARTICIPATORY WATER RESOURCES MANAGEMENT LTPC

3003
208
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To gain an insight on local and global perceptions and approaches on participatory

water resource management
 To know the role of farmers in socio economic issues and challenges.
 To bring the knowledge of water conservation.
 To gain knowledge on issues of water management.
 To develop knowledge on global challenges and solutions.
UNIT - I : FUNDAMENTALS: SOCIOLOGY AND PARTICIPATORY APPROACH 9
Sociology – Basic concepts – Perspectives- Social Stratification – Irrigation as a Socio

technical Process - Participatory concepts– Needs for participatory -Course Objectives : of
participatory approach.
UNIT - II : UNDERSTANDING FARMERS PARTICIPATION 9
Farmers participation - Need and Benefits - Comparisons of cost and benefit -Sustained
system performance - Kinds of participation - Context of participation, factors in the
environment - WUA - Constraints in organizing FA - Role of Community Organizer – socio
economic - Case Studies.
UNIT - III : ISSUES IN WATER MANAGEMENT 9
Multiple use of water – Issues in Inter-sectoral Water Allocation - domestic, irrigation, industrial
sectors - Modernization techniques and its challenges – Command Area Development - Water
delivery systems – Advantages and disadvantages.
UNIT - IV : PARTICIPATORY WATER CONSERVATION 9
Global Challenges -Social – Economic – Environmental - Solutions –Political - Water

Marketing –Water Rights -Consumer education – Success Stories Case Studies.
UNIT - V : PARTICIPATORY WATERSHED DEVELOPMENT 9
Concept and significance of watershed - Basic factors influencing watershed development –

Principles of watershed management - Definition of watershed management – Identification
of problems - Watershed approach in Government programmes – People’s participation –
Entry point activities - Evaluation of watershed management measures.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
209
 Gain knowledge on various processes involved in participatory water resource
management.
 Understand farmer's participation in water resources management.
 Aware of the issues related to water conservation and watershed Development.
 Get knowledge in participatory water conservation.
 Understand concept, principle and approach of watershed management.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Sivasubramaniyan, K. “Water Management”, SIMRES Publication, Chennai, 2011.
2. Uphoff.N, “Improving International Irrigation management with Farmer Participation –

Getting the process Right – Studies in water Policy and Management”, No.11, West
view press, Boulder, CO, 1986.
3. Tideman E.M., “Watershed Management”, Omega Scientific Publishers, New Delhi,

1996.
REFERENCE BOOK:
1. Chambers Robert, “Managing canal irrigation”, Cambridge University Press, 1989.

Program
Course
Outcomes
Outcomes
(PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 2 2 2
CO 2
CO 3 2 2 2 1 3 2
CO 4
CO 5 2 3 3 2 3 2
1905001 ENERGY CONSERVATION AND MANAGEMENT LTPC
30 03
210
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 Understand and analyze the energy data of industries.

 Carryout energy accounting and balancing.
 Conduct energy audit and suggest methodologies for energy savings.
 Utilize the available resources in optimal ways
 Understand and analyze of Energy Economics.
Energy - Power – Past & Present scenario of World; National Energy consumption Data –
Environmental aspects associated with energy utilization – Energy Auditing: Need,
Types, Methodology and Barriers. Role of Energy Managers. Instruments for energy
auditing.
UNIT - II : ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 9

Components of EB billing – HT and LT supply, Transformers, Cable Sizing, Concept of
Capacitors, Power Factor Improvement, Harmonics, Electric Motors - Motor Efficiency
Computation, Energy Efficient Motors, Illumination – Lux, Lumens, Types of lighting,
Efficacy, LED Lighting and scope of Encon in Illumination.
UNIT - III : THERMALSYSTEMS 9

Stoichiometry, Boilers, Furnaces and Thermic Fluid Heaters – Efficiency computation
and encon measures. Steam: Distribution &U sage: Steam Traps, Condensate Recovery,
Flash Steam Utilization, Insulators & Refractories.
UNIT - IV : ENERGY CONSERVATION IN MAJOR UTILITIES 9

Pumps, Fans, Blowers, Compressed Air Systems, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning
Systems – Cooling Towers – D.G. sets.
UNIT - V : ECONOMICS 9
Energy Economics – Discount Rate, Payback Period, Internal Rate of Return, Net Present
Value, Life Cycle Costing –ESCO concept.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Can able to analyze the energy data.
211
 Can carry out energy accounting and balancing.
 Can suggest methodologies for energy savings.
 Can carry out Energy Conservation in Major Utilities.
 Can suggest methodologies for Energy Economics.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Energy Manager Training Manual (4 Volumes) available at www.energymanager
training.com, a website administered by Bureau of Energy Efficiency (BEE), a
statutory body under Ministry of Power, Government of India, 2004
REFERENCE BOOKS :
1. Witte. L.C., P.S. Schmidt, D.R. Brown, “Industrial Energy Management and
Utilisation” Hemisphere Publ, Washington, 1988.
2. Callaghn, P.W. “Design and Management for Energy Conservation”, Pergamon
Press, Oxford,1981.
3. Dryden. I.G.C., “The Efficient Use of Energy” Butterworths, London, 1982.
4. Turner. W.C., “Energy Management Hand book”, Wiley, New York, 1982.
5. Murphy. W.R. and G. Mc KAY, “Energy Management”, Butterworths, London 1987.

Program
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 1 1 1 3 2 2
CO 2 2 1 2 1 1 3
CO 3 1 3 2 1 1 2
CO 4 3 3 2 2 1
CO 5 2 3 2 1 2 2 2
1905508 RENEWABLE ENERGY SOURCES LTPC

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
• To get exposure on solar radiation and its environmental impact to power.
212
• To know about the various collectors used for storing solar energy.
• To know about the various applications in solar energy.
• To learn about the wind energy and biomass and its economic aspects.
• To know about geothermal energy with other energy sources.
UNIT - I : PRINCIPLES OF SOLAR RADIATION 10

Role and potential of new and renewable source, the solar energy option, Environmental
impact of solar power, physics of the sun, the solar constant, extraterrestrial and terrestrial
solar radiation, solar radiation on titled surface, instruments for measuring solar radiation
and sun shine, solar radiation data.
UNIT - II : SOLAR ENERGY COLLECTION 8

Flat plate and concentrating collectors, classification of concentrating collectors,
orientation and thermal analysis, advanced collectors.
UNIT - III : SOLAR ENERGY STORAGE AND APPLICATIONS 8

Different methods, Sensible, latent heat and stratified storage, solar ponds. Solar
Applications- solar heating/cooling technique, solar distillation and drying, photovoltaic
energy conversion.
UNIT - IV : WIND ENERGY 10

Sources and potentials, horizontal and vertical axis windmills, performance
characteristics, Betz criteria BIO-MASS: Principles of Bio-Conversion, Anaerobic/aerobic
digestion, types of Bio-gas digesters, gas yield, combustion characteristics of bio-gas,
utilization for cooking, I.C.Engine operation and economic aspects.
UNIT - V : GEOTHERMAL ENERGY 9

Resources, types of wells, methods of harnessing the energy, potential in India. OCEAN
ENERGY: OTEC, Principles utilization, setting of OTEC plants, thermodynamic cycles.
Tidal and wave energy: Potential and conversion techniques, mini-hydel power plants,
and their economics. DIRECT ENERGY CONVERSION: Need for DEC, Carnot cycle,
limitations, principles of DEC-Magneto Hydro Dynamic power generation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Understanding the physics of solar radiation.
213
 Ability to classify the solar energy collectors and methodologies of storing solar
energy.
 Knowledge in applying solar energy in a useful way.
 Knowledge in wind energy and biomass with its economic aspects.
 Knowledge in capturing and applying other forms of energy sources like wind, biogas
and geothermal energies.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rai G.D., “Non-Conventional Energy Sources”, Khanna Publishers, 2011.
2. Twidell & Wier, “Renewable Energy Resources”, CRC Press (Taylor & Francis),
2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Tiwari and Ghosal, “Renewable energy resources”, Narosa Publishing House, 2007.
2. Ramesh R & Kumar K.U, “Renewable Energy Technologies”, Narosa Publishing
House, 2004.
3. Mittal K M, “Non-Conventional Energy Systems”, Wheeler Publishing Co. Ltd, New
Delhi, 2003.

Program
Course Outcomes
(PSO)
Outcomes
1 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 12
0
CO 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2
CO 2 1 2 1 3 1 1 3 2
CO 3 1 2 3 1 2 2 1 2
CO 4 2 3 2 3 2 1 2 1
CO 5 2 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 2
1905509 SCADA SYSTEM MANAGEMENT LTPC

300 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
214
 To provide knowledge about the SCADA system and its architecture
 To provide knowledge about SCADA system components
 To provide knowledge about SCADA communication protocols
 To provide knowledge about SCADA monitoring and control in power system
 To provide knowledge about SCADA applications in power system
Evolution of SCADA, SCADA definitions, SCADA Functional requirements and
Components, SCADA Hierarchical concept, SCADA architecture, General features,
SCADA Applications, Benefits
UNIT - II : SCADA SYSTEM COMPONENTS 9

Remote Terminal Unit (RTU), Interface units, Human- Machine Interface Units (HMI),
Display Monitors/Data Logger Systems, Intelligent Electronic Devices (IED),
Communication Network, SCADA Server, SCADA Control systems and Control panels
UNIT - III : COMMUNICATION 9

SCADA Communication requirements, Communication protocols: Past, Present and
Future, Structure of a SCADA Communications Protocol, Comparison of various
communication protocols, IEC61850 based communication architecture, Communication
media like Fiber optic, PLCC etc. Interface provisions and communication extensions,
synchronization with NCC, DCC.
UNIT - IV : MONITORING AND CONTROL 9

Online monitoring the event and alarm system, trends and reports, Blocking list, Event
disturbance recording. Control function: Station control, bay control, breaker control and
disconnector control.
UNIT - V : APPLICATIONS IN POWER SYSTEM 9

Applications in Generation, Transmission and Distribution sector, Substation SCADA
system Functional description, System specification, System selection such as Substation
configuration, IEC61850 ring configuration, SAS cubicle concepts, gateway interoperability
list, signal naming concept. System Installation, Testing and Commissioning.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 This course gives knowledge about SCADA SYSTEM and its architecture
 This course gives knowledge about various system components of SCADA System
215
 This course gives knowledge about various communication protocols of SCADA
System
 This course gives knowledge about SCADA monitoring and control in power System
 This course gives knowledge about SCADA system applications
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Stuart A. Boyer: SCADA-Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition, Instrument
Society of America Publications,USA,2004
2. Gordon Clarke, Deon Reynders: Practical Modern SCADA Protocols: DNP3,
60870.5 and Related Systems, Newnes Publications, Oxford, UK,2004
3. William T. Shaw, Cyber security for SCADA systems, PennWell Books, 2006
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. David Bailey, Edwin Wright, Practical SCADA for industry, Newnes3 William T.
Shaw, Cybersecurity for SCADA systems, PennWell Books, 2006, 2003
2. Michael Wiebe, A guide to utility automation: AMR, SCADA, and IT systems for
electric Power, PennWell 1999
3. Dieter K. Hammer, Lonnie R. Welch, Dieter K. Hammer, “Engineering of
Distributed Control Systems”, Nova Science Publishers, USA, 1st Edition, 2001

Program
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 1 2 3 2 2 1 3 1
CO 2 3 2 3 1 2
CO 3 2 3 3 2 1 3 1 3 3
CO 4 2 3 3 2 1 2 1
CO 5 3 1 1 2
1906507 ENTERTAINTRONICS LT P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the student to understand the basics of display devices.
 To enhance the student knowledge in Audio broadcasting systems.
 To enable the student to learn about Television systems.
216
 To develop the student knowledge in Interactive Gaming Applications.
 To understand the Consumer Electronic Applications.
UNIT – I : DISPLAY DEVICES 9

Introduction – Underlying technologies of displays -Types of Electronic displays – Segment
displays –Two dimensional displays: Liquid Crystal display, Light emitting diode display –
Three dimensional displays: Laser display, Holographic display – Applications.
UNIT – II : AUDIO BROADCASTING SYSTEMS 9

Loud Speakers: construction, working principles and applications of crystal, condenser and
dynamic loudspeakers – Tweeters, Squawkers & Woofers - Public address system -
Requirements of Public Addressing system -Microphones: construction, working principles
and applications of Carbon, Moving coil and Crystal microphones. Headphones: Principle
of operation of crystal and dynamic and Bluetooth based headphones.
UNIT – III : TELEVISION SYSTEMS 9

Basics of Television: Television standards, frequency bands, Scanning method, interlacing
and synchronization, bandwidth, Advanced TV systems: LCD, LED, HDTV, 3DTV, Smart
TV. Color concepts, concepts of luminance, Hue and Saturation, Color TV (PAL Systems).
Cable TV concepts, Closed Circuit Television.
UNIT – IV : INTERACTIVE GAMING APPLICATIONS 9

Fundamental of game design - Gaming scenarios – Interfaces- Multi player interactive
gaming – Programming concepts – educational games – Privacy and security in games –
Introduction to Android games and its development – Online games.
UNIT – V : CONSUMER ELECTRONIC APPLICATIONS 9

Principle of operation of digital clocks, electronic calculator, cellular phones- smart
phonesmicrowave ovens, washing machines, air conditioners, ATMs and set-top-boxes –
Compact Ultrafast Fiber lasers for Consumer electronics – Virtual reality applications,
Alexa.
TOTAL PERIODS: 45
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Understand the basic applications of display devices.
 Understand the operation of Audio devices and its applications.
 Know the basic TV Standards and the basics of Television.
 Design the Gaming scenarios and knowing programming concepts.
217
 Understand the Applications of Consumer electronics.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Shoichi Matsumoto, “Electronic display devices”, Wiley.
2. Ajay Sharma, “Audio video and TV Engineering-Consumer Electronics”, Dhanpat
Rai and co.
3. R.G. Gupta, Audio and Video systems, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing Co.Ltd.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. R. Gulati, Monochrome and Color Television, New Age International (P) Ltd, New
Delhi.
2. S P Bali, Consumer Electronics, Pearson.

Program
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - 1 2 - -
CO 2 2 2 2 1 - - - - - - - - 1 2 - -
CO 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - 2 3 - -
CO 4 2 2 1 1 - - - - - - - - 1 2 - -
CO 5 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - 2 3 - -
1906505 PHOTONIC NETWORKS LT PC

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To enable the students to manifest the components used is the optical system,
propagation of signals and their impairments in optical fiber.
218
 To enable the student to understand the importance of the backbone infrastructure
for our present and future communication needs.
 To familiarize the students about the optical network architectures and the protocol
stack in use.
 To enable the student to understand the differences in the design of data plane and
the control plane and the routing, switching and the resource allocation methods and
the network management and protection methods in vogue.
 To expose the student to the advances in networking and switching domains and
the future trends.
UNIT – I : OPTICAL SYSTEM COMPONENTS 9
Light Propagation in optical fibers – Loss & bandwidth, System limitations, Nonlinear
effects; Solitons; Optical Network Components – Couplers, Isolators & Circulators,
Multiplexers & Filters, Optical Amplifiers, Switches, Wavelength Converters.
UNIT – II : OPTICAL NETWORK ARCHITECTURES 9
Introduction to Optical Networks; Wavelength Division Multiplexing, optical add/drop

multiplexer, SONET / SDH, Metropolitan-Area Networks, Layered Architecture; Broadcast
and Select Networks – Topologies for Broadcast Networks, Media-Access Control
Protocols, Wavelength Routing Architecture.
UNIT – III : WAVELENGTH ROUTING NETWORKS 9

The optical layer, Optical Network Nodes, Routing and wavelength assignment, Traffic
Grooming in Optical Networks, Architectural variations- Linear Light wave networks,
Logically Routed Networks.
UNIT – IV : PACKET SWITCHING AND ACCESS NETWORKS 9
Photonic Packet Switching – OTDM, Multiplexing and Demultiplexing, Synchronization,

Broadcast OTDM networks, Switch-based networks, Contention Resolution Access
Networks – Network Architecture overview, Optical Access Network Architectures and
OTDM networks, OTDR.
UNIT - V: NETWORK DESIGN AND MANAGEMENT 9
Transmission System Engineering – System model, Power penalty - transmitter, receiver,

Optical amplifiers, crosstalk, dispersion, Wavelength stabilization, Overall design
considerations, Control and Management – Network management functions, Configuration
219
management, Performance management, Fault management, Optical safety, Service
interface.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:

 Elucidate the components in an optical system.
 Use the backbone infrastructure for our present and future communication needs.
 Analyze the architectures and the protocol stack,
 Compare the differences in the design of data plane, control plane, routing,
switching, and resource allocation methods.
 Annotate the network management and protection methods in vogue.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rajiv Ramaswami and Kumar N. Sivarajan, “Optical Networks: A Practical
Perspective”, Second Edition, Harcourt Asia Pte Ltd., 2004.
2. Siva Ram Moorthy and Mohan Gurusamy, “WDM Optical Networks: Concept,
Design and Algorithms”, 1st Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2002.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. John M. Senior ,“Optical Fiber Communication”,3rd edition, Prentice Hall,2009.
2. Uyless N. Black, “Optical Networks, Third Generation Transport Systems”,1st
Edition, Prentice hall of India, 2002.
3. Biswanath Mukherjee, “Optical WDM Networks”, Springer Series, 2006.
4. Govind P. Agrawal, “Fiber Optic Communication Systems”, 3rd Edition, Wiley India
(P) Ltd, 2002.
5. Gerd Keiser , “Optical Fiber Communication” , 5th Edition , McGraw Hill Education
(India) Pvt. Ltd. , 2013.
Program
Course Specific
Outcomes Outcomes
(PSO)
220
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 - - 2 1 - 1 - - - - 2 - 1 - - -
CO 2 2 - 2 - 1 1 - - - - - - - - 1 -
CO 3 2 2 - 1 - - - - - - - 2 - 1 - -
CO 4 2 2 - 2 1 - - - - - - - - - - -
CO 5 2 2 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1906506 TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK MANAGEMENT LT P C

3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To understand the concept of network management standards.
221
 To design the common management information service element model.
 To understand the various concept of information modelling.
 To analyze the concept of SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 protocol.
 To analyze the concept of examples of network management
UNIT - I: BASIC FOUNDATIONS AND NETWORK MANAGEMENT APPLICATIONS 9
Network management standards–Network management model– Organization model–

Information model - Abstract syntax notation One (ASN.1) – Encoding structure– Macros –
Functional model. Network management applications functional requirements:
Configuration management– Fault management–Performance management–Error
correlation technology– Security management–Accounting management– Common
management–report management– Policy based management – Service level
management– Management service– Community definitions– capturing the requirements–
simple and formal approaches–semi formal and formal notations.
UNIT - II: COMMON MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SERVICE ELEMENT 9

CMISE model–service definitions–errors–scooping and filtering features– synchronization–
functional units– association services– common management information protocol
specification
UNIT - III: INFORMATION MODELING FOR TMN 9

Rationale for information modeling–management information model–object oriented
modeling paradigm– structure of management information–managed object class
definition–management information base.
UNIT - IV: SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL 9

SNMPv1: Managed networks–SNMP models– organization model– Information model–
SNMPv1 communication model–functional model. SNMPv2-major changes in SNMPv2–
structure of management information, MIB–SNMPv2 protocol– compatibility with SNMPv1.
SNMPv3– architecture–applications–MIB- security, SNMP Management: remote
monitoring–SMI and MIB– RMON1 and RMON2.
UNIT - V: NETWORK MANAGEMENT EXAMPLES 9

ATM integrated local management interface–ATM MIB–M1– M2–M3–M4–interfaces–ATM
digital exchange interface management–digita1 subscriber loop and asymmetric DSL
technologies–ADSL configuration management–performance management Network
222
management tools: Network statistics management–network management system–
management platform case studies: OPENVIEW–ALMAP.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Design and analyze of fault management.
 Analyze the common management information protocol specifications.
 Design and analyze of management information model.
 Design the simple network management protocol.
 Design the various types of network management tools
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Mani Subramanian, “Network Management: Principles and Practice” Pearson

Education, Second edition, 2010.
2. Lakshmi G Raman, “Fundamentals of Telecommunications Network Management”,
Wiley, 1999.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Henry Haojin Wang, “Telecommunication Network Management”, Mc- Graw Hill,

1999.
2. Salah Aidarous & Thomas Plevyak, “Telecommunication Network Management:
Technologies and Implementations”, Wiley, 1997.
3. Singh B, “Network Security and Management”, Eastern Economy Edition, 2012.

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 2 2 1 - -
CO 2 3 3 3 1 - - 2 2 - - - 2 1 2 - -
CO 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - 2 1 1 - -
CO 4 3 3 2 3 - 2 2 - - 2 3 2 - -
CO 5 2 2 1 1 - 2 2 2 2 - - 2 2 2 - -
1907503 SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS LTPC

3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
223
 To understand the concepts of measurement technology.
 To learn the applications and working of motion and ranging sensors.
 To explore the latest sensor technologies like MEMS & nano sensors, smart
sensors
 To learn the various sensors used to measure various physical parameters.
 To learn the fundamentals of signal conditioning, data acquisition and
communication systems used in mechatronics system development.
Basics of Measurement – Classification of errors – Error analysis – Static and dynamic
characteristics of transducers – Performance measures of sensors – Classification of
sensors – Sensor calibration techniques – Sensor Output Signal Types.
UNIT – II: MOTION, PROXIMITY AND RANGING SENSORS 9

Motion Sensors – Potentiometers, Resolver, Encoders – Optical, Magnetic, Inductive,
Capacitive, LVDT – RVDT – Synchro – Microsyn, Accelerometer.,– GPS, Bluetooth, Range
Sensors – RF beacons, Ultrasonic Ranging, Reflective beacons, Laser Range Sensor
(LIDAR).
UNIT –III : FORCE, MAGNETIC AND HEADING SENSORS 9

Strain Gage, Load Cell, Magnetic Sensors –types, principle, requirement and advantages:
Magneto resistive – Hall Effect – Current sensor Heading Sensors – Compass, Gyroscope,
Inclinometers.
UNIT –IV : OPTICAL, PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE SENSORS 9

Photo conductive cell, photo voltaic, Photo resistive, LDR – Fiber optic sensors – Pressure
– Diaphragm, Bellows, Piezoelectric – Tactile sensors, Temperature – IC, Thermistor, RTD,
Thermocouple. Acoustic Sensors – flow and level measurement, Radiation Sensors - Smart
Sensors - Film sensor, MEMS & Nano Sensors, LASER sensors.
UNIT – V : SIGNAL CONDITIONING and DAQ SYSTEMS 9

Amplification – Filtering – Sample and Hold circuits – Data Acquisition: Single channel and
multi channel data acquisition – Data logging - applications - Automobile, Aerospace, Home
appliances, Manufacturing, Environmental monitoring.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Explain various calibration techniques and signal types for sensors.
 Understand the basic principles of various sensors.
224
 Illustrate the basic principles of various smart sensors.
 Apply the various sensors in the Automotive and Mechatronics applications
 Implement the DAQ systems with different sensors for real time applications
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ernest O Doebelin, Dhanesh N.Manik “Measurement Systems – Applications and

Design”, seventh Edition McGraw-Hill, 2019.
2. Sawney A K and Puneet Sawney, “A Course in Mechanical Measurements and
Instrumentation and Control”, 12th edition, Dhanpat Rai & Co, New Delhi, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Patranabis D, “Sensors and Transducers”, 2nd Edition, PHI, New Delhi, 2010.
2. John Turner and Martyn Hill, “Instrumentation for Engineers and Scientists”, Oxford
Science Publications, 1999.
3. Richard Zurawski, “Industrial Communication Technology Handbook” 2nd edition,
CRC Press, 2015.

Program
Specific
Course
Outcomes
Outcomes
(PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 2 2 2 1
CO 2
CO 3 3 2 1
CO 4 2 2 1
CO 5 3 2 2 2 2 1
1907504 INSTRUMENTATION IN BIOMEDICAL ENGINEERING LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To study about the different bio potential and its propagation
225
 To understand the different types of electrodes and its placement for various
recording
 To study the design of bio amplifier for various physiological recording
 To learn the different measurement techniques for non-physiological parameters.
 To familiarize the different biochemical measurements.
UNIT - I: BIO POTENTIAL GENERATION AND ELECTRODES TYPES 9

Origin of bio potential and its propagation. Types of electrodes - surface, needle and micro
electrodes and their equivalent circuits. Recording problems - measurement with two
electrodes
UNIT - II: BIOSIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS AND ELECTRODECONFIGURATIONS 9

Biosignals characteristics – frequency and amplitude ranges. ECG – Einthoven’s triangle,
standard 12 lead system. EEG – 10-20 electrode system, unipolar, bipolar and average
mode. EMG– unipolar and bipolar mode.
UNIT - III: SIGNAL CONDITIONING CIRCUITS 9

Need for bio-amplifier - differential bio-amplifier, Impedance matching circuit, isolation
amplifiers, Power line interference, Right leg driven ECG amplifier, Band pass filtering
UNIT- IV: MEASUREMENT OF NON-ELECTRICALPARAMETERS 9

Temperature, respiration rate and pulse rate measurements. Blood Pressure: indirect
methods - Auscultatory method, direct methods: electronic manometer, Systolic, diastolic
pressure, Blood flow and cardiac output measurement: Indicator dilution, and dye dilution
method, ultrasound blood flow measurement.
UNIT- V: BIO-CHEMICAL MEASUREMENT 9

Blood gas analyzers and Non-Invasive monitoring, colorimeter, Sodium Potassium
Analyser, spectrophotometer, blood cell counter, auto analyzer (simplified schematic
description).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Understand the different bio potential and its propagation.
226
 Explain the different electrode placement for various physiological recording
 Design bio amplifier for various physiological recording
 Understand various technique of non electrical physiological measurements
 Understand the different biochemical measurements
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Leslie Cromwell, “Biomedical Instrumentation and measurement”, Prentice hall of
India, New Delhi, 2007.
2. John G. Webster, “Medical Instrumentation Application and Design”, John Wiley and
sons, New York, 2004. (Units I, II & V)
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Myer Kutz, “Standard Handbook of Biomedical Engineering and Design”, McGraw
Hill Publisher, 2003.
2. Khandpur R.S, “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New
Delhi, 2003.(Units II & IV)
3. Joseph J. Carr and John M. Brown, “Introduction to Biomedical Equipment
Technology”, Pearson Education, 2004.

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 1 1
CO 2 1 1
CO 3 3 1 2 1 1 1
CO 4 2 1 1 1
CO 5 2 1 1 1
1908001 3D PRINTING AND DESIGN LTPC

3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
227
 The course is designed to impart knowledge and skills related to 3D printing technologies.
 Selection of material and equipment and develop a product using this technique.
 To understand Industry 4.0 environment.
 To understand CAD and Additive manufacturing
 To understand Additive Equipment.
UNIT - I: 3D PRINTING AND ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING 9

Introduction, Process, Classification, Advantages, Additive V/s Conventional Manufacturing
processes, Applications.
UNIT - II: CAD AND ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING 9

CAD for Additive Manufacturing-CAD Data formats, Data translation, Data loss, STL format.
Additive Manufacturing Techniques - Stereo- Lithography, LOM, FDM, SLS, SLM, Binder
Jet technology.
UNIT - III: PROCESS 9

Process, Process parameter, Process Selection for various applications. Additive
Manufacturing Application Domains: Aerospace, Electronics, Health Care, Defence,
Automotive, Construction, Food Processing, Machine Tools
UNIT - IV: MATERIALS 9

Polymers, Metals, Non-Metals, Ceramics, Various forms of raw material- Liquid, Solid,
Wire, Powder; Powder Preparation and their desired properties, Polymers and their
properties. Support Materials.
UNIT - V: ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING EQUIPMENT 9

Process Equipment- Design and process parameters-Governing Bonding Mechanism-
Common faults and troubleshooting - Process Design- Post Processing: Requirement and
Techniques- Product Quality.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
1. Develop CAD models for 3D printing.
2. Import and Export CAD data and generate .stl file.
228
3. Select a specific material for the given application.
4. Select a 3D printing process for an application.
5. Produce a product using 3D Printing or Additive Manufacturing (AM) .
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Khanna Editorial, “3D Printing and Design”, Khanna Publishing House, Delhi.
2. CK Chua, Kah Fai Leong, “3D Printing and Rapid Prototyping- Principles and
Applications”, World Scientific, 2017.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Lan Gibson, David W. Rosen and Brent Stucker, “Additive Manufacturing
Technologies: Rapid Prototyping to Direct Digital Manufacturing”, Springer, 2010.
2. Andreas Gebhardt, “Understanding Additive Manufacturing: Rapid Prototyping, Rapid
Tooling, Rapid Manufacturing”, Hanser Publisher, 2011.
3. J.D. Majumdar and I. Manna, “Laser-Assisted Fabrication of Materials”, Springer
Series in Material Science, 2013.
4. L. Lu, J. Fuh and Y.S. Wong, “Laser-Induced Materials and Processes for Rapid
Prototyping”, Kulwer Academic Press, 2001.
5. Zhiqiang Fan And Frank Liou, “Numerical Modelling of the Additive Manufacturing (AM)
Processes of Titanium Alloy”, InTech, 2012.

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO 2 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO 4 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 3
CO 5 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 3
1908002 SCRIPTING LANGUAGES LTPC

3003
229
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 The principles of scripting languages.

 Difference between scripting languages and non- scripting languages.
 Types of scripting languages.
 Scripting languages such as PERL, TCL/TK, python and BASH.
 Creation of programs in the Linux environment and usage of scripting languages in
IC design flow.
UNIT - I: LINUX BASICS 9

Introduction to Linux , File System of the Linux, General usage of Linux kernel & basic
commands, Linux users and group, Permissions for file, directory and users, searching a
file & directory, zipping and unzipping concepts.
UNIT - II: LINUX NETWORKING 9

Introduction to Networking in Linux, Network basics & Tools, File Transfer Protocol in Linux,
Network file system, Domain Naming Services, Dynamic hosting configuration Protocol &
Network information Services.
UNIT - III: PERL SCRIPTING 9

Introduction to Perl Scripting, working with simple values, Lists and Hashes, Loops and
Decisions, Regular Expressions, Files and Data in Perl Scripting, References &
Subroutines, Running and Debugging Perl, Modules, Object – Oriented Perl.
UNIT - IV: TCL / TK SCRIPTING 9

Tcl Fundamentals, String and Pattern Matching, Tcl Data Structures, Control Flow
Commands, Procedures and Scope, Evel, Working with Unix, Reflection and Debugging,
Script Libraries, Tk Fundamentals, Tk by examples, The Pack Geometry Manager,
Binding Commands to X Events, Buttons and Menus, Simple Tk Widgets, Entry and List
box Widgets Focus, Grabs and Dialogs.
UNIT - V: PYTHON SCRIPTING 9

Introduction to Python, using the Python Interpreter, More Control Flow Tools, Data
Structures, Modules, Input and Output, Errors and Exceptions, Classes, Brief Tour of the
Standard Library.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Create and run scripts using PERL in IC design flow.
230
 Create and run scripts using TCl in IC design flow
 Create and run scripts using Python in IC design flow
 Use Linux environment and write programs for automation of scripts in VLSI tool design
flow.
 Usage of scripting languages in IC design flow.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Python Tutorial by Guido Van Rossum, Fred L. Drake Jr. editor , Release 2.6.4
2. Practical Programming in Tcl and Tk by Brent Welch, Updated for Tcl 7.4 and Tk4.0.
3. Teach Yorself Perl in 21 days by David Till.
4. Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 : System Administration Guide Copyright, 2005 Red Hat
Inc.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Learning Python – 2nd Ed., Mark Lutz and David Ascher, 2003, O’Reilly.
2. Perl in 24 Hours – 3rd Ed., Clinton Pierce, 2005, Sams Publishing.
3. Learning Perl – 4th Ed. Randal Schwartz, Tom Phoenix and Brain d foy. 2005.
4. Jython Essentials – Samuele Pedroni and Noel Pappin.2002. O’Reilly.
5. Programming Perl – Larry Wall, Tom Christiansen and John Orwant, 3rd Edition,
O’Reilly, 2000. (ISBN 0596000278)

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 2 1 1
CO 2 2 2 1 2
CO 3 3 2 2 1 2 1
CO 4 3 2 3 2 2 2
CO 5 2 3 3 2 3 2
1909510 PRODUCT DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT L T P C
231
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 Product design and development
 Apply the concept of prototyping in a real life problem.
 Reduce the waste by using product architecture.
 Understand the concepts of industrial design.
 Understand the concepts of DFM
UNIT – I : INTRODUCTION 9
Need for IPPD – Strategic importance of Product development – integration of customer,
designer, material supplier and process planner, Competitor and customer – Behaviour
analysis. Understanding customer – prompting customer understanding – involve customer
in development and managing requirements.
UNIT – II : CONCEPT GENERATION AND SELECTION 9

Task – Structured approaches – clarification – search – externally and internally – explore
systematically – reflect on the solutions and processes – concept selection – methodology
– benefits.
UNIT – III : PRODUCT ARCHITECTURE 9

Implications – Product change – variety – component standardization – product
performance – manufacturability – product development management – establishing the
architecture – creation – clustering – geometric layout development – fundamental and
incidental interactions.
UNIT– IV : INDUSTRIAL DESIGN 9

Need for industrial design – impact – design process – investigation of for industrial design
– impact – design process – investigation of customer needs – conceptualization –
refinement – management of the industrial design process – technology driven products –
user – driven products – assessing the quality of industrial design.
UNIT–V : DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURING AND PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT 9

Definition – Estimation of Manufacturing cost – reducing the component costs and
assembly costs – Minimize system complexity – Prototype basics – principles of prototyping
– planning for prototypes – Economic Analysis.
TOTAL PERIODS: 45
COURSE OUTCOMES :
232
 Understand the product design concepts.
 Apply the concept of prototyping in a real life problem.
 Reduce the waste by using product architecture.
 Understand the concepts of industrial design.
 Understand the concepts of DFM.
TEXT BOOK :
1. Kari T.Ulrich and Steven D.Eppinger, ”Product Design and Development”, McGraw-
Hill International Edn.2017.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Kemnneth Crow, “Concurrent Engg./Integrated Product Development”, DRM
Associates, 26/3,Via Olivera, Palos Verdes, CA 90274(310) 377-569, Workshop
Book.
2. Stephen Rosenthal, “Effective Product Design and Development”, Business One
Orwin, Homewood, 1992, ISBN 1-55623-603-4.

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO 4 1 1 1 1 1 1
CO 5 2 2 1 1
1909511 VIBRATION AND NOISE CONTROL L T P C

233
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 Apply the fundamental concepts of vibration.

 Apply the fundamentals of noise.
 Describe the various sources of noise for automotive applications.
 Determine the natural frequencies and mode shapes of the two degree
freedom systems.
 Describe the different types of noise and its control measures
UNIT - I : BASICS OF VIBRATION 9
Introduction, classification of vibration: free and forced vibration, undamped and damped
vibration, linear and non linear vibration, response of damped and undamped systems
under harmonic force, analysis of single degree and two degree of freedom systems,
torsional vibration, determination of natural frequencies.
UNIT - II : BASICS OF NOISE 9

Introduction, amplitude, frequency, wavelength and sound pressure level, addition,
subtraction and averaging decibel levels, noise dose level, legislation, measurement and
analysis of noise, measurement environment, equipment, frequency analysis, tracking
analysis, sound quality analysis.
UNIT - III : AUTOMOTIVE NOISE SOURCES 9

Noise Characteristics of engines, engine overall noise levels, assessment of combustion
noise, assessment of mechanical noise, engine radiated noise, intake and exhaust noise,
engine necessary contributed noise, transmission noise, aerodynamic noise, tire noise,
brake noise.
UNIT - IV : CONTROLTECHNIQUES 9
Vibration isolation, tuned absorbers, un-tuned viscous dampers, damping treatments,
application dynamic forces generated by IC engines, engine isolation, crank shaft damping,
modal analysis of the mass elastic model shock absorbers.
UNIT - V : SOURCE OF NOISE AND CONTROL 9

Methods for control of engine noise, combustion noise, mechanical noise, predictive
analysis, palliative treatments and enclosures, automotive noise control principles, sound
in enclosures, sound energy absorption, sound transmission through barriers.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
234
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Apply the fundamental concepts of vibration.
 Apply the fundamentals of noise.
 Describe the various sources of noise for automotive applications.
 Determine the natural frequencies and mode shapes of the two degree
freedom systems.
 Describe the different types of noise and its control measures.
TEXT BOOK:
1. Singiresu S.Rao, “Mechanical Vibrations”, 6th Edition, Pearson Education, 2016.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Balakumar Balachandran and Edward B. Magrab, “Fundamentals of Vibrations”, 1st
Editon, Cengage Learning, 2009
2. Benson H. Tongue, “Principles of Vibrations”, 2nd Edition, Oxford University, 2007.
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 2 2 2 1 1 2 2
CO 2 3 2 2 2 1 1 2 2
CO 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 2 2
CO 4 3 2 2 2 1 1 2 2
CO 5 3 2 2 2 1 1 2 2
235
1909512 INDUSTRIAL SAFETY ENGINEERING L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 Identify unsafe conditions and recognize unsafe alerts.
 Interpret the rules and regulations for safety operations.
 Capable of solving problem of accidents.
 Capable of solving the present for criticizing the present for improved safety.
 Collaborate and modify processes / procedures for safety.
Evolution of modern safety concepts – Fire prevention – Mechanical hazards – Boilers,
Pressure vessels, Electrical Exposure.
UNIT - II : CHEMICAL HAZARDS 9

Chemical exposure – Toxic materials – Radiation Ionizing and Non-ionizing Radiation -
Industrial Hygiene – Industrial Toxicology.
UNIT - III : ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL 9

Industrial Health Hazards – Environmental Control – Industrial Noise - Noise
measuring instruments, Control of Noise, Vibration, - Personal Protection.
UNIT - IV : HAZARD ANALYSIS 9

System Safety Analysis –Techniques – Fault Tree Analysis (FTA), Failure Modes and
Effects Analysis (FMEA), HAZOP analysis and Risk Assessment.
UNIT - V : SAFETY REGULATIONS 9

Explosions – Disaster management – catastrophe control, hazard control, Factories Act,
Safety regulations Product safety – case studies.
TOTAL :45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Identify and prevent chemical, environmental mechanical, fire hazard.
 Collect, analyze and interpret the accidents data based on various safety
techniques.
 Apply proper safety techniques on safety engineering and management.
 Able to perform hazard analysis.
 Aid to design the system with environmental consciousness by implementing safety
regulation.
236
TEXT BOOK:
1. John V.Grimaldi, “Safety Management”, AITB S Publishers, 2003.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. David L.Goetsch, “Occupational Safety and Health for Technologists”,
Engineers and Managers, Pearson Education Ltd. 5th Edition, 2005.
2. Deshmukh L M, “Industrial Safety Management”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
Company Ltd.,2005
3. Safety Manual, “EDEL Engineering Consultancy”, 2000.
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO 3 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO 4 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO 5 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 1
237
1910504 PRINCIPLES OF FOOD PRESERVATION L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn about the shelf life of food products.
 To gain knowledge on the storage of food products.
 To know about the thermal processing methods of food products.
 To design different types of Dryers.
 To understand the non-thermal methods of food preservation.
UNIT – I: FOOD PRESERVATION AND ITS IMPORTANCE 9

Introduction to food preservation. Wastage of processed foods; Shelf life of food products;
Types of food based on its perishability. Traditional methods of preservation.
UNIT – II: METHODS OF FOOD HANDLING AND STORAGE 9

Nature of harvested crop, plant and animal; storage of raw materials and products using
low temperature, refrigerated gas storage of foods, gas packed refrigerated foods, sub
atmospheric storage, Gas atmospheric storage of meat, grains, seeds and flour, roots and
tubers; freezing of raw and processed foods.retort pouch packing, Aseptic packaging.
UNIT – III: THERMAL METHODS 9

Newer methods of thermal processing; batch and continuous; In container sterilization-
canning; application of infra-red microwaves; ohmic heating; control of water activity;
preservation by concentration and dehydration; osmotic methods.
UNIT – IV: DRYING PROCESS FOR TYPICAL FOODS 9

Rate of drying for food products; design parameters of different type of dryers; properties
of air-water mixtures. Psychrometric chart, freezing and cold storage. freeze concentration,
dehydro-freezing, freeze drying, IQF; calculation of refrigeration load, design of freezers
and cold storages.
UNIT – V: NON-THERMAL METHODS 9

Super Critical Technology for Preservation - Chemical preservatives, preservation by
ionizing radiations, ultrasonics, high pressure, fermentation, curing, pickling, smoking,
membrane technology. Hurdle technology,
238
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Be aware of the different thermal processing methods of food products.
 Understand the concept of food storage.
 Be familiarize with shelf life of food products.
 Recognize the different types of dryers.
 Acquire knowledge on non thermal methods of food preservation.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Karnal, Marcus and D.B. Lund “Physical Principles of Food Preservation”. Rutledge,
2003.
2. VanGarde, S.J. and Woodburn. M “Food Preservation and Safety Principles and
Practice”.Surbhi Publications, 2001.
3. Sivasankar, B. “Food Processing & Preservation”, Prentice Hall of India, 2002.
4. Khetarpaul, Neelam, “Food Processing and Preservation”, Daya Publications, 2005.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Rahman, M. Shafiur. “Handbook of Food Preservation”. Marcel & Dekker, 2006.
2. Zeuthen, Peter and Bogh-Sarensen, Leif. “Food Preservation Techniques”. CRC /
Wood Head Publishing, 2003.
3. Ranganna, S. “Handbook of Canning and Aseptic Packaging”. Tata McGraw-Hill,
2000.
4. Ranganna, S. “Handbook of Canning and Aseptic Packaging”. Tata McGraw-Hill,
2000.
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 2 - - 3 - 1 1 - - - - - 2 2 - 2
CO 2 2 3 1 2 - - - 2 - - - 2 2 3 - 3
CO 3 3 2 1 2 - 1 1 - - - - 2 1 3 2 -
CO 4 3 2 1 2 - 1 1 - - - - 2 1 3 - -
CO 5 3 1 2 - - 1 1 - - - - 2 - 3 - 1
239
1920501 NANOTECHNOLOGY LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 Make the students to understand the fundamentals of nano materials.
 To acquire the knowledge on different classifications in nano materials.
 To educate the different synthesis techniques.
 To provide information on different fabrication and characterization techniques.
 Make the students to understand and apply the techniques to different systems.
UNIT - I : BASICS OF NANOTECHNOLOGY 9

Introduction –Scientific revolutions –Time and length scale in structures –Definition of a
nanosystem –Dimensionality and size dependent phenomena –Surface to volume ratio -
Fraction of surface atoms-Properties at nanoscale (optical, mechanical, electronic and
magnetic).
UNIT - II : DIFFERENT CLASSES OF NANOMATERIALS 9

Classification based on dimensionality-Quantum Dots, Wells and Wires-Carbon-based
nano materials (buckyballs, nanotubes, graphene)–Metal based nano materials (nanogold,
nanosilver and metal oxides) –Nanocomposites- Nanopolymers –Nanoglasses –Nano
ceramics.
UNIT - III : SYNTHESIS OF NANOMATERIALS 9

Classification of synthesis: Top down and bottom up nanofabrication. Chemical Methods:
Solvothermal Synthesis-Photochemical Synthesis –Sonochemical Routes-Chemical Vapor
Deposition (CVD) –Metal Oxide -Chemical Vapor Deposition (MOCVD). Physical Methods:
Ball Milling –Electrodeposition -Spray Pyrolysis -Flame Pyrolysis - DC/RF Magnetron
Sputtering -Molecular Beam Epitaxy (MBE).
UNIT - IV : FABRICATION AND CHARACTERIZATION OF NANOSTRUCTURES 9

Nanofabrication: Photolithography and its limitation-Electron-beam lithography (EBL)-
Nanoimprint –Softlithography patterning. Characterization: Environmental Scanning
Electron Microscopy (ESEM) High Resolution Transmission Electron Microscope (HRTEM)
–Scanning Tunneling Microscope (STM)-Surface enhanced Raman spectroscopy (SERS)-
X-ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy (XPS) -Auger electron spectroscopy (AES).
240
UNIT - V : APPLICATIONS 9
Solar energy conversion and catalysis -Molecular electronics and printed electronics –
Nanoelectronics -Polymers with a special architecture -Liquid crystalline systems -optical
properties, Applications in displays and other devices -Photonics, Plasmonics-Chemical
and biosensors –Nanomedicine and Nanobiotechnology –Nanotoxicology challenges.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Able to understand the basics of nanoscience.
 Able to differentiate the materials based on their structures.
 Ability to understand the different synthesis techniques of nanomaterials.
 Ability to identify various fabrication techniques and characterization of
nanostructures.
 Able to apply them for suitable applications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Bhusan, Bharat (Ed), “Springer Handbook of Nanotechnology”, 2nd Edition, 2007.
2. Hari Singh Nalwa, “Nanostructured Materials and Nanotechnology”, Academic
3. Press, 2002.
4. Pradeep T., “A Textbook of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology”, Tata McGraw Hill
5. Education Pvt. Ltd., 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Charles P. Poole Jr., Frank J. Ownes, ‘Introduction to Nanotechnology”, Wiley
Interscience, 2003.
2. Dupas C., Houdy P., Lahmani M., “Nanoscience: Nanotechnologies and
Nanophysics”,Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg, 2007.
3. Mark Ratner and Daniel Ratner, “Nano Technology”, Pearson Education, New Delhi,
2003.
4. Nabok A., “Organic and Inorganic Nanostructures”, Artech House, 2005.
241
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 - 3 3 3 1 - - - - - 1 - - 1 -
CO 2 2 - 3 3 3 - - - - - - 1 - - 1 -
CO 3 2 - 3 3 3 - - - - - - 1 - - 1 -
CO 4 2 - 3 3 3 1 1 - - - - 1 - 1 -
CO 5 3 - 3 3 3 1 1 - - - - 1 - - 1
1920502 MICROSCOPY LTPC
242
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To introduce the basic principles of optical and electron microscopy.
 To elucidate the different microscopic techniques.
 To explore the knowledge on electron microscopy
 Make the students to learn the sample preparation techniques for the micro
structural analysis.
 To investigate on different chemical analysis techniques.
History of Microscopy, Overview of current microscopy techniques. Light as particles and
waves, Fundamental of optics: Diffraction and interference in image formation, real and
virtual images, Resolution, Depth of field and focus, Magnification, Numerical aperture,
Aberration of lenses. Components of Light Microscopy, Compound light microscopy and its
variations.
UNIT - II : MICROSCOPY 9
Phase contrast microscopy: optical design, theory, image interpretation, Dark-field
microscopy: optical design, theory, image interpretation, Polarization Microscopy: Polarized
light, optical design, theory, image interpretation, Differential Interference Contrast (DIC):
equipment and optics, image interpretation, Modulation contrast microscopy: contrast
methods using oblique illumination.
UNIT - III : ELECTRON MICROSCOPY 9

Interaction of electrons with matter, elastic and inelastic scattering, secondary effects,
Components of electron microscopy: Electron sources, pumps and holders, lenses,
apertures, and resolution. Scanning Electron and Transmission Electron Microscopy:
Principle, construction, applications and limitations.
UNIT - IV : SAMPLE PREPARATION FOR MICROSTRUCTURAL ANALYSIS 9

Optical Microscopy sample preparation: Grinding, polishing and etching, SEM sample
preparation: size constrains, TEM sample preparation: Disk preparation, electro polishing,
ion milling, lithography, storing specimens.
UNIT - V : CHEMICAL ANALYSIS 9

Surface chemical composition (Principle and applications) - Mass spectroscopy and X-ray
emission spectroscopy - Energy Dispersive Spectroscopy- Wave Dispersive Spectroscopy.
Electron spectroscopy for chemical analysis (ESCA), X ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy
(XPS), Auger Electron Spectroscopy (AES)- Applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
243
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Able to understand the physics behind the microscopy.
 Ability to describe the principle, construction and working of light microscopy.
 Ability to describe electron microscopy.
 Ability to understand about the important of sample preparation technique.
 Ability to identify the appropriate spectroscopy technique for chemical analysis.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Douglas B. Murphy, Fundamentals of light microscopy and electronic imaging,
2001,
Wiley- Liss, Inc. USA
2. David B. Williams and C. Barry Carter, Transmission Electron Microscopy-A
Textbook for Materials Science, Springer US, 2nd edition, 2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Brandon D. G, “Modern Techniques in Metallography”, Von Nostrand Inc. NJ,
USA,1986.
2. Whan R E (Ed), ASM Handbook, Volume 10, Materials Characterization“, Ninth
Edition, ASM international, USA, 1986.
3. Thomas G., “Transmission electron microscopy of metals”, John Wiley, 1996.

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 - - - 1 1 - - 1 -
CO 2 2 2 2 1 2 - 1 - - - - 1 - - 2 -
CO 3 3 3 2 - 3 2 - - - - - 1 - - 1 -
CO 4 3 2 3 1 3 2 - - - - - 1 - - 1 -
CO 5 3 3 2 2 3 2 - - - - 1 1 - - 1 -
244
1921501 ADVANCED ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY L TPC
3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To make the students conversant with basics of polymer chemistry.
 Principles and generation of energy in batteries, nuclear reactors, solar cells, wind
mills and fuel cells.
 To acquaint the student with concepts of important photophysical and
photochemical processes and spectroscopy.
 To make the student acquire sound knowledge of second law of thermodynamics
and second law based derivations of importance in engineering applications in all
disciplines.
 To develop and understand the basic concepts of phase rule and its applications
to single and two component systems and appreciate the purpose and significance
of alloys.
UNIT - I : POLYMERS AND SPECIALITY POLYMER 9

Polymers – Types of polymerization – Degree of polymerization – Plastics and types –
Mechanism of polymerization (free radical mechanism) properties of polymers - Tg and
tacticity – Compounding of plastics – Fabrication of plastics – Blow and extrusion
mouldings. Speciality polymers-Conducting polymers: Polyacetylene, polyaniline,
synthesis, mechanism of conduction – Applications of conducting polymers. Bio-
degradable polymers: Requirements, factors affecting degradation – PLA– preparation,
properties –applications.
UNIT - II : ENERGY SOURCES AND STORAGE DEVICES 9
Solar energy conversion – Solar cells: Types – Wind energy. Batteries: Types of batteries
– Primary battery (alkaline battery), secondary battery (lead acid battery, NICAD battery,
lithium, lithium-ion & lithium-sulphur battery), fuel cells – H2-O2 fuel cell.
UNIT - III : PHOTOCHEMISTRY & ANALYTICAL TECHNIQUES 9

Photochemistry: Laws of photochemistry - Grothuss–Draper law, Stark–Einstein law and
Beer-Lambert’s Law. Quantum efficiency – determination - Photophysical processes
(Jablonski diagram) - photosensitization - Chemiluminescence and bioluminescence.
Analytical techniques: IR, UV – principle, Instrumentation and applications. Thermal
analysis: TGA & DTA - principle, instrumentation and applications. Chromatography:
Basic principles of column & TLC – principles and applications.
245
UNIT - IV : THERMODYNAMICS 9
Terminology of thermodynamics - Second law: Entropy - entropy change for an ideal gas,
reversible and irreversible processes; Entropy of phase transitions; Clausius inequality.
Free energy and work function- Helmholtz and Gibbs free energy functions (problems);
Criteria of spontaneity; Gibbs-Helmholtz equation (problems); Clausius-Clapeyron
equation; Maxwell relations – Van’t Hoff isotherm and isochore.
UNIT - V : PHASE RULE AND ALLOYS 9

Phase rule: Introduction, definition of terms with examples, One component system -
Water system – Reduced phase rule – Thermal analysis and cooling curves – Two
component systems – Lead-silver system – Pattinson process, Zn-Mg System. Alloys:
Introduction- Definition- properties of alloys- Significance of alloying, functions and effect
of alloying elements- Nichrome and stainless steel (18/8) – heat treatment of steel.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Gain knowledge on polymer chemistry and its developments.
 Understand the process of advanced energy storage devices.
 Analyze the materials using spectroscopic techniques.
 Explain the various state of thermodynamics.
 Outline the nature of alloys by drawing phase rule.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Shikha Agarwal, “Engineering Chemistry-Fundamentals and Applications”,
Cambridge University Press, Delhi, 2016.
2. S. Vairam, P. Kalyani and Suba Ramesh, “Engineering Chemistry”, Wiley India
PVT, LTD, New Delhi, 2015.
3. Sivasankar B., “Engineering Chemistry”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company
Ltd., 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS :
1. P. C. Jain and Monika Jain, “Engineering Chemistry” Dhanpat Rai Publishing
Company (P) LTD, New Delhi, 2019.
2. S. S. Dara and S. S. Umare, “A Textbook of Engineering Chemistry”, S. Chand &
Company LTD, New Delhi, 2015.
3. B. K. Sharma, “Engineering Chemistry”, Krishna Prakashan Media (P) Ltd,
Meerut, 2012.
246
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 3 2 2 2 3 2
CO 2 2 1 2 1
CO 3 2 2 1 1
CO 4 1 1 2 1 1
CO 5 3 2 2 3 1 1 2 2
1921502 INDUSTRIAL NANOTECHNOLOGY LTPC
247
30 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To elucidate on advantages of nanotechnology based applications in each
industry
 To provide instances of contemporary industrial applications of nanotechnology
 To provide an overview of future technological advancements and increasing
role of nanotechnology in each i9ndustry
 To provide an awareness on the nanomaterial synthesis for electronic materials
 To make the student conversant with the latest characterization techniques.
UNIT - I : NANO ELECTRONICS 9

Micro and Nano electromechanical systems – Sensors, Actuators, Data memory –
Lighting and Displays – Applications of piezoelectric and ferroelectric materials- Nano
for energy systems - Fuel cells and Photo-voltaic cells – Electric double layer capacitors
–Nanoparticle coatings for electrical products
UNIT - II : BIONANOTECHNOLOGY 9
Nanoparticles in bone substitutes and dentistry – Implants and Prosthesis –
Nanorobotics in Surgery –Nanosensors in Diagnosis– Neuro-electronic Interfaces–
Therapeutic applications.
UNIT - III : NANOTECHNOLOGY IN CHEMICAL INDUSTRY 9

Nanocatalyts – Smart materials – Heterogenous nanostructures and composites –
Nanostructures for Molecular recognition (Quantum dots, Nanorods, Nanotubes) –
Molecular Encapsulation and its applications – Nanoporous zeolites – Self-assembled
Nanoreactors.
UNIT - IV: NANOTECHNOLOGY IN AGRICULTURE AND FOOD 9

TECHNOLOGY
Nanotechnology in Agriculture -Precision farming, Smart delivery system – Insecticides
using nanotechnology – Potential of nano-fertilizers - Nanotechnology in Food industry.
UNIT - V : CHARACTERIZATION TECHNIQUES 9

X-ray Diffraction technique, Scanning Electron Microscopy - environmental techniques,
Transmission Electron Microscopy including High-resolution imaging, Surface Analysis
techniques-AFM, SPM, STM, SNOM, ESCA, SIMS-Nano indentation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
248
 Analyze the nanoparticle coatings for electrical products.
 Define various therapeutic applications of bio nanotechnology.
 Explain the process of molecular encapsulation and nanoreactors.
 Ability to understand the uses of nanotechnology in food industry.
 Outline the nanofiber production and formulation of gels.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. V.A. Rai and J.A. Bai, Nanotechnology Applications in the Food Industry, CRC
Press, 2018.
2. S. Thomas, Y. Grohens and Y.B. Pottathara, Industrial Applications of
Nanomaterials, Elsevier Press, 2019.
3. N John Dinardo, Nanoscale Characterization of surfaces & Interfaces, 2 nd edition,
Weinheim Cambridge, Wiley-VCH, 2000.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Neelina H. Malsch, Biomedical Nanotechnology, CRC Press, 2005.
2. Udo H. Brinker, Jean-Luc Mieusset, Molecular Encapsulation: Organic Reactions
in Constrained Systems, Wiley Publishers, 2010.
3. Jennifer Kuzma and Peter VerHage, Nanotechnology in Agriculture and Food
Production, Woodrow Wilson International Center, 2006.
4. P. J. Brown and K. Stevens, Nanofibers and Nanotechnology in Textiles,
Woodhead Publishing Limited, Cambridge, 2007.
5. Y-W. Mai, Polymer Nano composites, Woodhead Publishing Limited, 2006.
6. W.N. Chang, Nanofibres fabrication, performance and applications, Nova Science
Publishers Inc, 2009.
Course Programme Outcomes (PO) Program

Outcomes Specific
Outcomes
(PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO 2 1 2 3 1 3 1 1 1
CO 3 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1
CO 4 3 2 1 2 1 1 1 1
CO 5 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1
249
OPEN ELECTIVE – II
1903706 GREEN BUILDING DESIGN LTPC
30 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To develop buildings which use the natural resources to the minimal at the time of
construction as well as operation.
 To ensure minimum negative impact on the environment by the construction and
operation of a building.
 To gain knowledge on natural lighting and temperature control.
 To develop a design to further reduce the carbon footprint as well as reduce cost of
operation.
 To preserve the external environment to the building location.
UNIT - I : ENVIRONMENTAL IMPLICATIONS OF BUILDINGS 9
Energy use, carbon emissions, water use, waste disposal; Building materials: sources,
methods of production and environmental Implications. Embodied Energy in Building
Materials: Transportation Energy for Building Materials; Maintenance Energy for
Buildings.
UNIT - II : IMPLICATIONS OF BUILDING TECHNOLOGIES EMBODIED 9

ENERGY OF BUILDINGS
Framed Construction, Masonry Construction. Resources for Building Materials, Alternative

concepts. Recycling of Industrial and Buildings Wastes. Biomass Resources for buildings.
UNIT - III : COMFORTS IN BUILDING 9
Thermal Comfort in Buildings – Issues; Heat Transfer Characteristic of Building Materials

and Building Techniques. Incidence of Solar Heat on Buildings – Implications of
Geographical Locations.
UNIT - IV : UTILITY OF SOLAR ENERGY IN BUILDINGS 9
Utility of Solar energy in buildings concepts of Solar Passive Cooling and Heating of
Buildings. Low Energy Cooling. Case studies of Solar Passive Cooled and Heated
Buildings.
250
UNIT - V : GREEN COMPOSITES FOR BUILDINGS 9
Concepts of Green Composites. Water Utilization in Buildings, Low Energy Approaches to

Water Management. Management of Solid Wastes. Management of Sullage Water and
Sewage. Urban Environment and Green Buildings. Green Cover and Built Environment.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Describe the concepts of sustainable design and green building techniques
including energy efficiency and indoor environmental quality management.
 Create drawings and models of their own personal green building project.
 Reducing waste, pollution and environmental degradation.
 Efficiently using energy, water, and other resources.
 Protecting occupant health and improving employee productivity.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. K.S.Jagadish, B. U. Venkatarama Reddy and K. S. Nanjunda Rao. "Alternative

Building Materials and Technologies". New Age International, 2007.
2. "Low Energy Cooling For Sustainable Buildings". John Wiley and Sons Ltd, 2009.
3. Sustainable Building Design Manual. Vol 1 and 2, Teri, New Delhi, 2004.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Osman Attmann, Green Architecture Advanced Technologies and Materials,

McGraw Hill, 2010.
2. Jerry Yudelson, Green building Through Integrated Design, McGraw Hill, 2009.
3. Fundamentals of Integrated Design for Sustainable Building by Marian Keeler, Bill
Burke.

Outcomes Specific
Outcomes
(PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 3 2
CO 2
CO 3 2
CO 4
CO 5 2 1 2 1 2 2 1
251
1903716 ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To impart the knowledge of screening of environmental and social assessment.
 To gain the knowledge of methods for impact assessment.
 To mitigate the environmental and social impacts of developmental projects.
 To develop knowledge on Assessment of Impact on land, water, air, noise and

energy, flora and fauna.
 To study on report preparation of EIA.
UNIT - I :INTRODUCTION 9
Impacts of Development on Environment – Rio Principles of Sustainable Development

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) – COURSE OBJECTIVES : – Historical
development – EIA Types – EIA in project cycle –EIA Notification and Legal Framework–
Stakeholders and their Role in EIA– Selection & Registration Criteria for EIA Consultants
UNIT - II :ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT 9
Screening and Scoping in EIA – Drafting of Terms of Reference, Baseline monitoring,

Prediction and Assessment of Impact on land, water, air, noise and energy, flora and
fauna - Matrices – Networks – Checklist Methods - Mathematical models for Impact
prediction – Analysis of alternatives.
UNIT - III :ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN 9
Plan for mitigation of adverse impact on water, air and land, water, energy, flora and
fauna – Environmental Monitoring Plan – EIA Report Preparation – Review of EIA
Reports – Addressing the issues related to the Project Affected People -Environmental
Clearance Post Project Monitoring.
UNIT - IV : SOCIO ECONOMIC ASSESSMENT 9
Baseline monitoring of Socio economic environment – Identification of Project Affected

Personal – Rehabilitation and Resettlement Plan- Economic valuation of Environmental
impacts – Cost benefit Analysis.
252
UNIT - V : CASE STUDIES 9
EIA case studies pertaining to Infrastructure Projects – Real Estate Development - Roads
and Bridges – Multi-storey Buildings Mass Rapid Transport Systems - Ports and Harbor –
Airports - Dams and Irrigation projects - Power plants – Water supply and drainage
projects- Waste water treatment plants, STP – Mining Projects.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Carry out scoping and screening of developmental projects for environmental and
social assessments.
 To explain different methodologies for environmental impact prediction and
assessment.
 Plan environmental impact assessments and environmental management plans.
 Evaluate environmental impact assessment reports.
 Analyze case studies on various projects.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Canter, R.L, "Environmental impact Assessment", 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill Inc,
New Delhi, 1995.
2. Lohani, B., J.W. Evans, H. Ludwig, R.R. Everitt, Richard A. Carpenter, and S.L. Tu,
"Environmental Impact Assessment for Developing Countries in Asia", Volume 1 –
Overview, Asian Development Bank,1997.
3. Peter Morris, RikiTherivel "Methods of Environmental Impact Assessment",
Routledge Publishers, 2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Becker H. A., Frank Vanclay , “The International handbook of social impact
assessment” conceptual and methodological advances, Edward Elgar Publishing,
2003.
2. Barry Sadler and Mary McCabe, “Environmental Impact Assessment Training
Resource Manual”, United Nations Environment Programme, 2002.
3. Judith Petts, “Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment Vol. I and II”,
Blackwell Science New York, 1998.
4. Ministry of Environment and Forests EIA Notification and Sectoral Guides,
Government of India, New Delhi, 2010.
253

Outcomes Specific
Outcomes
(PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 1 1 2 2
CO 2
CO 3 2 1
CO 4
CO 5 2 3 2 1 2 1
254
1905711 ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To introduce electric circuits and its analysis

 To impart knowledge on solving circuit equations using network theorems
 To introduce the phenomenon of resonance in coupled circuits.
 To introduce Phasor diagrams of three phase circuits
 To analysis the three phase circuits
UNIT - I : BASIC CIRCUITS ANALYSIS 9
Resistive elements - Ohm’s Law Resistors in series and parallel circuits – Kirchhoff’s laws –
Mesh current and node voltage - methods of analysis.
UNIT - II : NETWORK REDUCTION AND THEOREMS FOR DC CIRCUITS 9
Network reduction: voltage and current division, source transformation – star delta
conversion. Theremins’ and Norton Theorems – Superposition Theorem – Maximum power
transfer theorem –Reciprocity Theorem – Millman's theorem.
UNIT - III : AC CIRCUITS 9
Introduction to AC circuits, inductance reactance, capacitive reactance, Phasor diagrams,

real power, reactive power, apparent power, power factor, R-L R-C , RLC networks,
Network reduction: voltage and current division, source transformation –mesh and node
analysis, Theremins’ and Norton Theorems – Superposition Theorem – Maximum power
transfer theorem –Reciprocity Theorem – Millman's theorem.
UNIT - IV : THREE PHASE CIRCUITS 9
A.C. circuits – Average and RMS value - Phasor Diagram – Power, Power Factor and
Energy.-Analysis of three phase 3-wire and 4-wire circuits with star and delta connected
loads, balanced & un balanced – phasor diagram of voltages and currents – power
measurement in three phase circuits.
255
UNIT - V : RESONANCE AND COUPLED CIRCUITS 9
Series and parallel resonance – their frequency response – Quality factor and Bandwidth –
Self and mutual inductance – Coefficient of coupling – Tuned circuits – Single tuned circuits
– SMPS.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Ability to introduce electric circuits and its analysis

 Ability to impart knowledge on solving circuit equations using network theorems.
 Ability to introduce the phenomenon of resonance in coupled circuits.
 Ability to introduce Phasor diagrams of three phase circuits
 Ability to analysis of three phase circuits
TEXTBOOKS:
1. William H. HaytJr, Jack E. Kemmerly and Steven M. Durbin, “Engineering Circuits
Analysis”, McGraw Hill publishers, edition, New Delhi, 2013.
2. Charles K. Alexander, Mathew N.O. Sadiku, “Fundamentals of Electric Circuits”,
Second Edition, McGraw Hill, 2013.
3. Allan H. Robbins, Wilhelm C. Miller, “Circuit Analysis Theory and Practice”, Cengage
Learning India, 2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Chakrabarti A, “Circuits Theory (Analysis and synthesis), DhanpathRai& Sons, New

Delhi, 1999.
2. Jegatheesan, R., “Analysis of Electric Circuits,” McGraw Hill, 2015.
3. Joseph A. Edminister, MahmoodNahri, “Electric circuits”, Schaum‟s series, McGraw-
Hill, New Delhi, 2010.
4. M E Van Valkenburg, “Network Analysis”,Prentice-Hall of India Pvt Ltd, New Delhi,
2015.
5. Richard C. Dorf and James A. Svoboda, “Introduction to Electric Circuits”, 7th
Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 2015
6. Sudhakar A and Shyam Mohan SP, “Circuits and Network Analysis and Synthesis”,
McGraw Hill, 2015.
256

Outcomes Specific
Outcomes
(PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 1 3 2 2 1 1 2 2
CO 2 1 3 2 1 1 1 2
CO 3 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 3
CO 4 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 1
CO 5 1 3 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 3
257
1905712 RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 About the stand alone and grid connected renewable energy systems. .
 Design of power converters for renewable energy applications.
 Wind electrical generators.
 Solar energy systems.
 Power converters used for renewable energy systems.
Environmental aspects of electric energy conversion: impacts of renewable energy

generation on environment (cost-GHG Emission) - Qualitative study of different
renewable energy resources: Solar, wind, ocean, Biomass, Fuel cell, Hydrogen energy
systems and hybrid renewable energy systems.
UNIT – II : ELECTRICAL MACHINES FOR RENEWABLE ENERGY 9

CONVERSION
Reference theory fundamentals-principle of operation and analysis: IG and PMSG.
UNIT - III : POWER CONVERTERS 9
Solar: Block diagram of solar photo voltaic system -Principle of operation: line
commutated converters (inversion-mode) - Boost and buck-boost converters- selection
of inverter, battery sizing, array sizing Wind: Three phase AC voltage controllers
UNIT - IV : ANALYSIS OF WIND AND PV SYSTEMS 9
Standalone operation of fixed and variability speed wind energy conversion systems
and solar system-Grid connection Issues -Grid integrated PMSG, SCIG Based WECS,
grid Integrated solar system.
UNIT - V : HYBRID RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS 9
Need for Hybrid Systems- Range and type of Hybrid systems- Case studies of Wind-PV
Maximum Power Point Tracking (MPPT).
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
258
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Ability to understand and analyze power system operation, stability, control and
protection.
 Ability to handle the engineering aspects of electrical energy generation and
utilization.
 Ability to understand the stand alone and grid connected renewable energy
systems.
 Ability to design of power converters for renewable energy applications.
 Ability to acquire knowledge on wind electrical generators and solar energy
systems.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. S. N. Bhadra, D.Kastha, S.Banerjee, “Wind Electrical Systems”, Oxford

University Press, 2005.
2. B.H.Khan Non-conventional Energy sources Tata McGraw-hill Publishing
Company New Delhi, 2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Rashid .M. H “power electronics Hand book”, Academic press, 2001.

2. Ion Boldea, “Variability speed generators”, Taylor & Francis group, 2006.
3. Rai. G.D, “Non conventional energy sources”, Khanna publishes, 1993.
4. Gray, L. Johnson, “Wind energy system”, prentice hall linc, 1995.
5. Andrzej M. Trzynnadlowski, „Introduction to Modern Power Electronics‟, Second
edition, wiley India Pvt. Ltd, 2012.
Program
Course Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 3 1 2 2 1 1 3
CO 2 3 2 2 1 1 2 3 1 1 2
CO 3 3 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1
CO 4 3 3 3 2 2 1 2 2 1 2
CO 5 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 3
259
1905713 ELECTRIC VEHICLES AND POWER L T P C
MANAGEMENT 3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Toimpart knowledgeonthefollowingTopics
• To understand the concept of electrical vehicles and its operations.

•To provide knowledge about Power train components.
•To understand the various Control strategies in AC and DC drives.
•To understand the need for energy storage in hybrid vehicles.
•To provide knowledge about alternative energy storage technologies that can
beused in electric vehicles.
UNIT-I: ELECTRIC VEHICLES AND VEHICLE MECHANICS 9
Electric Vehicles (EV), Hybrid Electric Vehicles (HEV), Engine ratings, Comparisons of
EV with internal combustion Engine vehicles, Fundamentals of vehicle mechanics – EV
Testing.
UNIT-II: ARCHITECTURE OF EV’s AND POWER TRAIN COMPONENTS 9
Architecture of EV’s and HEV’s – Plug-n Hybrid Electric Vehicles (PHEV) - Standards -
Power train components and sizing, Gears, Clutches, Transmission and Brakes.
UNIT-III: CONTROL OF DC AND AC DRIVES 9
DC/DC chopper based four quadrant operations of DC drives – Inverter based V/f
Operation (motoring and braking) of induction motor drive system – Induction motor
and permanent motor-based vector control operation – Switched reluctance motor
(SRM) drives
UNIT-IV: BATTERY ENERGY STORAGE SYSTEM 9
Battery Basics, Different types, Battery Parameters, Battery modeling, Traction

Batteries, Energy management system in Electric vehicle – Battery Management
Systems.
260
UNIT-V: ALTERNATIVE ENERGY STORAGE SYSTEMS 9
Fuel cell – Characteristics- Types – hydrogen Storage Systems and Fuel cell EV –
Ultra Capacitors.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Learners will understand the operation of Electric vehicles and Hybrid Electric
vehicles.
 Learners will gain knowledge on Power train components.
 Learners can analyze the control strategies in AC and DC drives.
 Learners will gain knowledge on various energy storage technologies for
electrical vehicles.
 Learners know about alternative energy storage technologies for electric
vehicles.
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Iqbal Hussain, “Electric and Hybrid Vehicles: Design Fundamentals, Second
Edition” CRC Press, Taylor & Francis Group, Second Edition (2011).
2. Ali Emadi, MehrdadEhsani, John M.Miller, “Vehicular Electric Power Systems”,
Special Indian Edition, Marcel dekker, Inc 2010.
3. James Larminie and John Loury, “Electric Vehicle Technology – Explained”,
John Wiley & Sons Ltd, 2003.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. MehrdadEhsani, YiminGao, Ali Emadi, “Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric and
Fuel cell Vehicles” CRC Press, Taylor & Francis Group, Second Edition (2010).
2. EmanueleCrisostomi, Robert Shorten, SonjaStudli& Fabian Wirth “Electric
and Plug-in Hybrid Vehicle Networks” Taylor & Francis group 2018.
3. Ronald K Jurgen, “Electric and Hybrid – Electric Vehicles”, SAE, 2002.
261
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 1 2 2 2 1 2 1
CO 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 2
CO 3 3 2 1 2 2 3 1
CO 4 3 2 2 1 2 2 2
CO 5 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 2
262
1906705 ACOUSTICS LT P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To learn the origin of sound.

 To understand the knowledge in sound propagation.
 To enhance the concepts in Sound analysis.
 To acquire basic knowledge in Physiological acoustics.
 To enable the student to understand the analysis of acoustics.
UNIT-I: INTRODUCTION 9
Origin of sound. Objective and subjective sound. Sound vibrations, Amplitude, form, and
period. Sound waves and their wavelength and speed. Sound pressure level. Energy
parameters of sound. Dynamical range. Sound envelope, Sound frequency, Relation
between frequency and period.
UNIT-II: PROPAGATION OF SOUND 9

Sound propagation. Spherical and plane waves. Change of intensity of a propagating
sound wave. Sound reflections, echo, absorption, diffraction, refraction. Relation between
pitch and frequency. Pitch standard. Sound spectrum. Types of Public Addressing system.
Hi.fi speakers. Microphones: types and its applications.
UNIT-III: SOUND ANALYSIS 9

Natural scales. Origin of musical scale. Tonal material and modal scale. Pythagorean
tuning, Temperaments. Non-equal temperaments. Equal temperaments. Relation of
musical scale and kind of music. Sound Pre-Processing and analysis, Audio analysis tools.
UNIT-IV: PHYSIOLOGICAL ACOUSTICS 9

Physiological and psychological acoustics. Loudness. Loudness level. Fletcher-Munson
diagram. Range of hearing. Masking. Compression of sound information, Pitch, timbre,
subjective duration. Absolute pitch. Acoustics instruments. Peripheral auditory system.
UNIT-V: ACOUSTICAL ANALYSIS 9

Sound phenomena in rooms. Direct sound. Early reflections. Reverberation and its
formation, Criteria for good acoustics of a room and methods of their realization,
Reverberation time. Dependence of reverberation time on room volume and surfaces (area
and absorption), Evaluation of reverberation time. Optimal reverberation times for various
types of music and room sizes.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
263
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Analyze the basic parameters of sound.
 Understand the effects of propagation.
 Know the basic functions of sound analysis.
 Derive the output using Physiological acoustics.
 Understand the Applications of acoustics.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rossing T. D., Moore R. F., Wheeler P. A.,” The Science of Sound” 3rd edition San
Francisco: Addison Wesley.
2. Hall D. E.,” Musical Acoustics” 3rd edition Pacific Grove, CA: Brooks/Cole.
3. Howard D. M., Angus J. A. S.,” Acoustics and psychoacoustics” 5th edition New
York, London: Routledge 2017.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Everest F. A., Pohlmann K. C.,” Master Handbook of Acoustics” 5th edition New
York: McGraw-Hill.
2. Rossing T. D., ed.,” Springer Handbook of Acoustics” 2nd edition Berlin, Heidelberg:
SpringerVerlag 2014.
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 - - - - 2 2 - - - - - 3 - - -
CO 2 2 2 - 2 - 2 3 - - - - - 2 - - -
CO 3 2 2 2 - - 2 3 - - - - - 2 - - -
CO 4 2 3 2 2 - 2 2 - - - - - 3 3 - -
CO 5 2 2 1 2 - 2 - 2 - - - - 2 - - -
264
1906706 VISUAL COMMUNICATION LT P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To know about the basics of communication.

 To learn and acquire the art of visual communication.
 To understand and relate the importance of visual communication
 To gain knowledge about the basic of Visual Communication.
 To acquire idea and concepts of various forms of Media
Need for and the Importance of Human and Visual Communication. Communication a
expression, skill and process, Understanding Communication: SMRC-Model.
UNIT - II: PROCESS IN COMMUNICATION 9

Communication as a process. Message, Meaning, Connotation, Denotation Culture/Codes
etc Levels of communication: Technical, Semantic, and Pragmatic. The semiotic
landscape: language and visual communication, narrative representation
UNIT - III: METHODOLOGY 9

Fundamentals of Design: Definition. Approaches to Design, Centrality of Design,
EIements/Elements of Design: Line, Shape, Space, Color, Texture. Form Etc. Principles of
Design: Symmetry. Rhythm, Contrast, Balance Mass/Scale etc. Design and Designers
(Need, role, process, methodologies etc.)
UNIT - IV: DESIGN PROCESS 9

Principles of Visual and other Sensory Perceptions. Color psychology and theory (some
aspects) Definition, Optical / Visual Illusions Etc Various stages of design process- problem
identification, search for solution refinement, analysis, decision making, Implementation.
UNIT - V: GRAPHIC DESIGN 9

Basics of Graphic Design. Definition, Elements of GD, Design process-research, a source
of concept, the process of developing ideas-verbal, visual, combination & thematic, visual
thinking, associative techniques, materials, tools (precision instruments etc.) design
execution, and presentation.
TOTAL PERIODS: 45
265
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Learn about the history & evolution of Communication.

 Understand Nature & functions of Visual Communication.
 Acquire knowledge on different types of perception & illusion.
 Gain knowledge on semiotics.
 Understand the world of ideation creating.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Lester, E Visual Communications: Images with Messages. Thomson Learning.

2. Schildgen, T . Pocket Guide to color with digital applications. Thomsom Learning.
3. Palmer, Frederic: Visual Elements of Art and Design, Longman.
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1 3 - - -
CO 2 3 2 3 2 3 - - - - - - 1 3 - 2 -
CO 3 3 2 1 2 - - - - - - - - 3 2 2 -
CO 4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 3 - 3 -
CO 5 3 - 2 2 3 - - - - - - 2 2 2 3 -
266
1906707 MEMS AND NEMS LT P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The students should be made:
 To learn the basic concepts and principles of MEMS and NEMS.

 To introduce the concepts of micro and nano electromechanical devices.
 To know the fabrication process of Microsystems.
 To know the design concepts of micro sensors and micro actuators.
 To introduce the concepts of quantum mechanics and nano systems.
UNIT – I: OVERVIEW 9
New trends in Engineering and Science: Micro and Nanoscale systems, Introduction to
Design of MEMS and NEMS – Applications, Devices and structures. Materials for
MEMS:Silicon, silicon compounds, polymers, metals.
UNIT – II: MEMS FABRICATION TECHNOLOGIES 9
Microsystem fabrication processes: Photolithography, Ion Implantation, Diffusion,

Oxidation. Thin film depositions: LPCVD, Sputtering, Evaporation, Electroplating; Etching
techniques: Dry and wetetching, electrochemical etching; Micromachining: Bulk
Micromachining, Surface Micromachining, High Aspect- Ratio (LIGA and LIGA-like)
Technology; Packaging: Microsystems packaging, Essential packaging technologies,
Selection of packaging materials.
UNIT – III: MICRO SENSORS 9
MEMS Sensors: Design of Acoustic wave sensors, resonant sensor, Vibratory gyroscope,
Capacitive and Piezo Resistive Pressure sensors- engineering mechanics behind these
Microsensors. Casestudy: Piezo-resistive pressure sensor.
UNIT – IV: MICRO ACTUATORS 9
Design of Actuators: Actuation using thermal forces, Actuation using shape memory Alloys,
Actuation using piezoelectric crystals, Actuation using Electrostatic forces (Parallel plate,
Torsion bar, Combdrive actuators), Micromechanical Motors and pumps. Case study:
Comb drive actuators.
UNIT – V: NANOSYSTEMS AND QUANTUM MECHANICS 9
Atomic Structures and Quantum Mechanics, Molecular and Nanostructure Dynamics:

Schrodinger Equation and Wave function Theory, Density Functional Theory,
Nanostructures and Molecular Dynamics, Electromagnetic Fields and their quantization,
Molecular Wires and Molecular Circuits.
TOTAL PERIODS: 45
267
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 Acquire knowledge about micro system design and its various applications.
 Interpret the basics of micro/nano electromechanical systems including their
advantages.
 Recognize the use of materials in micro fabrication and describe the fabrication
processes including surface micromachining, bulk micromachining and LIGA.
 Analyse the key performance aspects of electromechanical transducers including

sensors and actuators through case studies.
 Comprehend the theoretical foundations of quantum mechanics and Nano systems.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Marc Madou, ―Fundamentals of Microfabrication, CRC press 1997.

2. Stephen D. Senturia, Micro system Design, Kluwer Academic Publishers,2001.
3. Tai Ran Hsu,MEMS and Microsystems Design and Manufacture,TataMcraw Hill,
2002.
4. Chang Liu,Foundations of MEMS, Pearson education India limited, 2006.
5.Sergey Edward Lyshevski, ―MEMS and NEMS: Systems, Devices, and
Structures,CRC Press, 2002.
6. Mohamed Gad – el – hak, The MEMS HAND Book, CRC press 2005.
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 3 3 3 - - - - - 3 - - 3 3 - -
CO 2 3 - 3 3 - 2 1 - - 2 - - 3 3 - -
CO 3 3 - 3 3 - - 1 - - 2 - - 3 3 - -
CO 4 3 2 3 3 - - - 1 - 2 - - 3 3 - -
CO 5 3 2 3 3 - - - 1 - 2 - - 3 3 - -
268
1907001 TRANSDUCERS ENGINEERING LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To make the students to know the methods of measurement, classification of

transducers and to analyze error.
 To make the students to understand the behavior of transducers under static and
dynamic conditions and hence to model the transducer.
 To expose the students to different types of resistive transducers and their
application areas.
 To make the students to acquire knowledge on capacitive and inductive
transducers.
 To impart knowledge on variety of transducers and get introduced to MEMS and
Smart transducers.
UNIT - I :SCIENCE OF MEASUREMENTS AND CLASSIFICATION OF 9

TRANSDUCERS
Units and standards – Static calibration – Classification of errors–Error analysis –

Statistical methods – Odds and uncertainty – Classification of transducers – Selection of
transducers.
UNIT - II : CHARACTERISTICS OF TRANSDUCERS 9
Static characteristics: - Accuracy, precision, resolution, sensitivity, linearity. Dynamic

characteristics: Mathematical model of transducer, Zero, I and II order transducers,
Response to impulse, step, ramp and sinusoidal inputs.
UNIT - III : VARIABLE RESISTANCE TRANSDUCERS 9
Principle of operation, construction details, characteristics and applications of

potentiometer, strain gauge, resistance thermometer, Thermistor, hot-wire anemometer,
piezo-resistive sensor and humidity sensor.
UNIT - IV : VARIABLE INDUCTANCE AND VARIABLE CAPACITANCE 9

TRANSDUCERS
Inductive transducers: – Principle of operation, construction details, characteristics and
applications of LVDT, Induction potentiometer – Variable reluctance transducers – EI
pickup-– Principle of operation, construction details, characteristics of capacitive
transducers - Capacitor microphone, Proximity sensor.
UNIT - V : OTHER TRANSDUCERS 9
Piezoelectric transducer – Hall Effect transducer – Magneto elastic sensor – Digital

transducers – Smart transducers - Fiber optic sensors – Thick & Thin Film sensors (Bio
sensor & Chemical Sensor) – Nano sensors
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
269
COURSE OUTCOMES :
At the end of the course, the student should be able to::
 Apply the mathematical knowledge and science & engineering fundamentals

gained to solve problems pertaining to measurement applications.
 Analyze the problems related to sensors & transducers.
 Select the right sensor/transducer for a given application.
 Determine the static and dynamic characteristics of transducers
 Understand fiber optic sensor, smart transducers and their applications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Doebelin E.O. and Manik D.N., “Measurement Systems”, 7th Edition, McGraw-Hill
Education Pvt. Ltd., 2019.
2. A.K. Sawhney, A Course in Electrical & Electronic Measurements &

Instrumentation, DhanpatRai and Co, New Delhi, 2015.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. BelaG.Liptak, Instrument Engineers' Handbook, Process Measurement and

Analysis, 4th Edition, Vol. 1, ISA/CRC Press, 2003.
2. D. Patranabis, Sensors and Transducers, 2nd edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2010.
3. E.A. John P. Bentley, Principles of Measurement Systems, 4th Edition, Pearson

Education,2004.
4. W.Bolton, Engineering Science, Elsevier Newnes, Fifth edition, 2006.
5. Murthy, D.V.S., Transducers and Instrumentation, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall of

India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2008.
6. S.Ranganathan,”Transducer Engineering”, Allied Publishers Pvt. Ltd. 2003.

Program
Course Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3
CO 2 3
CO 3 1 2 3 1
CO 4 2 2
CO 5 1 1 1 1
270
1907003 PROCESS MODELING AND SIMULATION LT PC
3 0 03
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To give an overview of various methods of process modeling, different

computational techniques for simulation.
 To analyze the simulation for steady state lumped system.
 To analyze the simulation for unsteady state lumped system.
 To analyze the simulation for steady state distributed system.
 To analyze the simulation for unsteady state distributed system.
Introduction to modeling and simulation, classification of mathematical models,

conservation equations and auxiliary relations.
UNIT - II : STEADY STATE LUMPED SYSTEMS 9

Degree of freedom analysis, single and network of process units, systems yielding linear
and nonlinear algebraic equations, flow sheeting – sequential modular and equation
oriented approach, tearing, partitioning and precedence ordering, solution of linear and
non-linear algebraic equations.
UNIT - III : UNSTEADY STATE LUMPED SYSTEMS 9

Analysis of liquid level tank, gravity flow tank, jacketed stirred tank heater, reactors, flash
anddistillation column, solution of ODE initial value problems, matrix differential
equations, simulation of closed loop systems.
UNIT - IV : STEADY STATE DISTRIBUTED SYSTEM 9

Analysis of compressible flow, heat exchanger, packed columns, plug flow reactor,
solution of ODE boundary value problems.
UNIT - V : UNSTEADY STATE DISTRIBUTED SYSTEM & OTHER MODELLING 9

APPROACHES
Analysis laminar flow in pipe, sedimentation, boundary layer flow, conduction, heat
exchanger, heat transfer in packed bed, diffusion, packed bed adsorption, plug flow
reactor. Empirical modeling, parameter estimation, population balance and stochastic
modeling.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
271
COURSE OUTCOMES :
At the end of the course, the student will be able to:
 Develop the process models based on Conservation principles and Process data.
 Understand the characteristics of state lumped systems.
 Understand the characteristics of state distributed lumped systems.
 Carry out the analysis and design empirical modeling of systems.
 Apply computational techniques to solve the process models.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ramirez, W.; “ Computational Methods in Process Simulation “, 2nd Edn.,

Butterworths Publishers, New York, 2000.
2. Luyben, W.L., “ Process Modelling Simulation and Control “,2nd Edn, McGraw-Hill
Book Co.,1990
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Felder, R. M. and Rousseau, R. W., “ Elementary Principles of Chemical Processes
“, John Wiley, 2000.
2. Franks, R. G. E., “ Mathematical Modelling in Chemical Engineering “, John Wiley,
1967.
3. Amiya K. Jana,”Process Simulation and Control Using ASPEN”, 2nd Edn,PHI
Learning Ltd (2012).
4. Amiya K. Jana,”ChemicalProcess Modelling and Computer Simulation” 2nd Edn,PHI
Learning Ltd,(2012).
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 3 2 3 2 1
CO 2 3 3 2 3 2 1
CO 3 3 3 2 3 3 1
CO 4 3 3 2 3 3 1
CO 5 3 3 2 3 3 1
272
1907708 STATE VARIABLE ANALYSIS AND DESIGN LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To provide knowledge on design in state variable form.

 To study the design of state variable.
 To study the design of state estimator.
 To study the design of optimal controller.
 To study the design of optimal estimator including Kalman Filter.
UNIT - I : STATE FORMULATION 9
Formulation of state variable model, non-uniqueness, controllability, observability, stability.
UNIT - II : STATE VARIABLE DESIGN 9
Modes, controllability of modes -effect of state and output Feedback- pole placement
Design .
UNIT - III : STATE ESTIMATION 9
Need for state estimation - design of state Observers - full and reduced order - disturbance
estimation - separation principle.
UNIT -IV : OPTIMAL CONTROL 9
Introduction - Time varying optimal control - LQR steady state optimal control - Solution of
Ricatti’s equation - Application examples.
UNIT - V : OPTIMAL ESTIMATION 9
Optimal estimation - KalmanBucy Filter-Solution by duality principle - Discrete systems -

Kalman Filter - Application examples.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
At the end of the course, the student will be able to:
 Apply advanced control theory to practical engineering problems.

 Understand and analyse state variable design.
 Understand and analyse state estimation.
 Understand and analyse optimal controller.
 Understand and analyse optimal estimator.
273
TEXT BOOKS :
1. K. P. Mohandas, “Modern Control Engineering”, 2nd Edition, Sanguine Technical

Publishers, 2016.
2. G. J. Thaler, “Automatic Control Systems”, Jaico Publishing House 1993.
3. M.Gopal, “Modern Control System Theory”, 3rd Edition, New Age International
Publishers, 2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. William S Levine, “Control System Fundamentals,” The Control Handbook, CRC

Press, Tayler and Francies Group, 2011.
2. Ashish Tewari, “Modern Control Design with Matlab and Simulink”, John Wiley, New
Delhi, 2002.
3. K. Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, 5th Edition, PHI, New Delhi, 2002.
4. T. Glad and L. Ljung,, “Control Theory –Multivariable and Non-Linear Methods”,
Taylor & Francis, 2002.
5. D.S.Naidu, “Optimal Control Systems” First Indian Reprint, CRC Press, 2009.
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 2
CO 2 2 2
CO 3 2 2
CO 4 2 2
CO 5 2 2
274
1908003 SOFTWARE QUALITY MANAGEMENT LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To have an introduction to software quality
 To understand software quality assurance.
 To understand about quality control and reliability.
 To understand quality management system.
 To understand about Quality Standards.
UNIT - I: INTRODUCTION TO SOFTWARE QUALITY 9
Software Quality – Hierarchical models of Boehm and McCall – Quality measurement –

Metrics measurement and analysis – Gilb’s approach – GQM Model .
UNIT - II: SOFTWARE QUALITY ASSURANCE 9
Quality tasks – SQA plan – Teams – Characteristics – Implementation – Documentation

–Reviews and Audits
UNIT - III: QUALITY CONTROL AND RELIABILITY 9
Tools for Quality – Ishikawa’s basic tools – CASE tools – Defect prevention and
removal–Reliability models – Rayleigh model – Reliability growth models for quality
Assessment
UN IT – IV: QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 9
Elements of QMS – Rayleigh model framework – Reliability Growth models for QMS –
Complexity metrics and models – Customer satisfaction analysis
UNIT - V: QUALITY STANDARDS 9
Need for standards – ISO 9000 Series – ISO 9000-3 for software development – CMM
and CMMI – Six Sigma concepts.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES
 To understand introduction about quality measurement.
 To understand SQA plan.
 To understand about Quality assessment.
 To understand about Customer satisfaction analysis.
 To understand Six Sigma Concepts.
275
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Allan C. Gillies, “Software Quality: Theory and Management”, Thomson Learning,
2003. (UI :Ch 1-4 ; UV : Ch 7-8)
2. Stephen H. Kan, “Metrics and Models in Software Quality Engineering”, Pearson
Education (Singapore) Pte Ltd., 2002. (UI :Ch 3-4; UIII : Ch 5-8 ; UIV : Ch 9-11)
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Norman E. Fenton and Shari Lawrence Pfleeger, “Software Metrics” Thomson,

2003
2. Mordechai Ben – Menachem and Garry S.Marliss, “Software Quality”, Thomson
Asia Pte Ltd, 2003.
3. Mary Beth Chrissis, Mike Konrad and Sandy Shrum, “CMMI”, Pearson Education
(Singapore) Pte Ltd, 2003.
4. ISO 9000-3 “Notes for the application of the ISO 9001 Standard to software
development”.
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 1 2 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 2
CO 2 2 3 2 2
CO 3 3 3 3
CO 4 3 2 2 3
CO 5 2 2 3 2 2
276
1908004 C# AND .NET PROGRAMMING LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To learn basic programming in C# and the object oriented programming concepts.

 To update and enhance skills in writing Windows applications, ADO.NET and ASP
.NET.
 To study the advanced concepts in data connectivity, WPF, WCF and WWF with
C# and .NET 4.5.
 To implement mobile applications using .Net compact framework
 To understand the working of base class libraries, their operations and
manipulation of data using XML.
UNIT - I: C# LANGUAGE BASICS 9
.Net Architecture – Core C# – Variables – Data Types – Flow control – Objects and
Types- Classes and Structs – Inheritance- Generics – Arrays and Tuples – Operators and
Casts – Indexers.
UNIT - II: C# ADVANCED FEATURES 9
Delegates – Lambdas – Lambda Expressions – Events – Event Publisher – Event

Listener – Strings and Regular Expressions – Generics – Collections – Memory
Management and Pointers – Errors and Exceptions – Reflection.
UNIT - III: BASE CLASS LIBRARIES AND DATA MANIPULATION 9
Diagnostics -Tasks, Threads and Synchronization – .Net Security – Localization –

Manipulating XML- SAX and DOM – Manipulating files and the Registry- Transactions –
ADO.NET- Peer-to-Peer Networking – PNRP – Building P2P Applications – Windows
Presentation Foundation (WPF).
UNIT - IV: WINDOW BASED APPLICATIONS, WCF AND WWF 9
Window based applications – Core ASP.NET- ASP.NET Web forms -Windows

Communication Foundation (WCF)- Introduction to Web Services – .Net Remoting –
Windows Service – Windows Workflow Foundation (WWF) – Activities – Workflows.
UNIT - V: .NET FRAMEWORK AND COMPACT FRAMEWORK 9
Assemblies – Shared assemblies – Custom Hosting with CLR Objects – Appdomains –

Core XAML – Bubbling and Tunneling Events- Reading and Writing XAML – .Net
Compact Framework – Compact Edition Data Stores – Errors, Testing and Debugging –
Optimizing performance – Packaging and Deployment – Networking and Mobile Devices
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
277
COURSE OUTCOMES :

 Write various applications using C# Language in the .NET Framework.
 Develop programs using advanced C# concepts on .NET
 Analyse the base class libraries, operations and manipulation of data using XML.
 Develop distributed applications using .NET Framework.
 Create mobile applications using .NET compact Framework.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Christian Nagel, Bill Evjen, Jay Glynn, Karli Watson, Morgan Skinner.
―Professional C# 2012 and .NET 4.5, Wiley, 2012.
2. Harsh Bhasin, ―Programming in C#, Oxford University Press, 2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ian Gariffiths, Mathew Adams, Jesse Liberty, ―Programming C# 4.0‖, OReilly,

Fourth Edition, 2010.
2. Andrew Troelsen, Pro C# 5.0 and the .NET 4.5 Framework, Apress publication,
2012.
3. Andy Wigley, Daniel Moth, Peter Foot, ―Mobile Development Handbook,
Microsoft Press, 2011.
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 2 2
CO 2 2 2 2 3 2
CO 3 2 2 2 1 3
CO 4 3 1 3
CO 5 2 1 2 3
278
1908005 VIRTUAL REALITY LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To study about basic concepts of Virtual reality

 To understand Virtual environment
 To understand geometric modeling
 To study about Virtual Hardware and Software
 To develop Virtual Reality applications
UNIT - I: INTRODUCTION TO VIRTUAL REALITY 9
Virtual Reality & Virtual Environment : Introduction – Computer graphics – Real time
computer graphics–Flight Simulation –Virtual environments–requirement – benefits of
virtual reality- Historical development of VR : Introduction – Scientific Landmark -3D
Computer Graphics :Introduction – The Virtual world space – positioning the virtual
observer – the perspective projection – human vision – stereo perspective projection –
3D clipping – Colour theory – Simple 3D modeling- illumination models – Reflection
models – Shading algorithms- Radiosity – Hidden Surface Removal – Realism-
Stereographic image.
UNIT - II: GEOMETRIC MODELLING 9
Geometric Modeling: Introduction – From 2D to 3D – 3D space curves – 3D boundary

representation - Geometrical Transformations: Introduction – Frames of reference –
Modeling transformations – Instances –Picking – Flying – Scaling the VE – Collision
detection - A Generic VR system: Introduction – The virtual environment – the Computer
environment – VR Technology – Model of interaction-VR Systems.
UNIT - III: VIRTUAL ENVIRONMENT 9
Animating the Virtual Environment: Introduction – The dynamics of numbers – Linear and
Non-linear interpolation - The animation of objects – linear and non- linear translation -
shape & object inbetweening – free from deformation – particle system- Physical
Simulation : Introduction – Objects falling in a gravitational field-Rotating wheels – Elastic
collisions – projectiles – simple pendulum – springs – Flight dynamics of an aircraft.
UNIT - IV: VR HARDWARES & SOFTWARES 9
Human factors: Introduction – the eye-the ear-the somatic senses-VR Hardware :

Introduction – sensor hardware – Head-coupled displays –Acoustic hardware –
Integrated VR systems-VR Software: Introduction –Modeling virtual world –Physical
simulation- VR toolkits – Introduction to VRML.
279
UNIT - V: VR APPLICATION 9
Virtual Reality Applications: Introduction – Engineering – Entertainment – Science

Training – The Future: Introduction – Virtual environments – modes of interaction.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :

 Understood the basic concept of virtual reality
 Understood 3D computer Graphics System
 Design object objects using geometric modeling
 Develop Virtual environment.
 Apply study about Virtual Hardwares, Softwares and Develop Virtual
Reality applications
TEXT BOOKS:
1. John Vince, “Virtual Reality Systems “, Pearson Education Asia, 2007.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Adams, “Visualizations of Virtual Reality”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2000.

2. Grigore C. Burdea, Philippe Coiffet , “Virtual Reality Technology”, Wiley
Interscience, 2nd Edition, 2006.
3. William R. Sherman, Alan B. Craig, “Understanding Virtual Reality: Interface,
Application, and Design”, Morgan Kaufmann, 2008.
4. www.vresources.org.
5. www.vrac.iastate.edu.
6. www.w3.org/MarkUp/VRML.

Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 3 3 1
CO 2 2 3 3 3
CO 3 3 3 3 2
CO 4 2 2 3 2
CO 5 3 3 2 1
280
1909718 ROBOTICS LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 Understand the functions of robots and review the need and application of robots
in different engineering fields.
 Exemplify the different types of robot drive systems as well as robot end effectors.
 Apply the different sensors and image processing techniques in robotics to
improve the ability of robots.
 Develop robotic programs for different tasks and analyze the kinematics motions of
robot.
 Implement robots in various industrial sectors and interpolate the economic
analysis of robots.
UNIT - I: FUNDAMENTALS OF ROBOT 9
Robot - Definition - Robot Anatomy - Coordinate Systems, Work Envelope Types and
Classification- Specifications-Pitch, Yaw, Roll, Joint Notations, Speed of Motion, Pay
Load- Robot Parts and their Functions-Need for Robots-Different Applications.
UNIT - II: ROBOT DRIVE SYSTEMS AND END EFFECTORS 9
Pneumatic Drives-Hydraulic Drives-Mechanical Drives-Electrical Drives-D.C. Servo

Motors, Stepper Motors, A.C. Servo Motors-Salient Features, Applications and
Comparison of all these Drives, End Effectors-Grippers-Mechanical Grippers,
Pneumatic and Hydraulic- Grippers, Magnetic Grippers, Vacuum Grippers; Two
Fingered and Three Fingered Grippers; Internal Grippers and External Grippers;
Selection and Design Considerations.
UNIT - III: SENSORS AND MACHINE VISION 9

Requirements of a sensor, Principles and Applications of the following types of sensors-
Position sensors - Piezo Electric Sensor, LVDT, Resolvers, Optical Encoders,
pneumatic Position Sensors, Range Sensors Triangulations Principles, Structured,
Lighting Approach, Time of Flight, Range Finders, Laser Range Meters, Touch Sensors
,binary Sensors., Analog Sensors, Wrist Sensors, Compliance Sensors, Slip Sensors,
Camera, Frame Grabber, Sensing and Digitizing Image Data-Signal Conversion, Image
Storage, Lighting Techniques, Image Processing and Analysis-Data Reduction,
Segmentation, Feature Extraction, Object Recognition, Other Algorithms, Applications-
Inspection, Identification, Visual Serving and Navigation.
281
UNIT - IV: ROBOT KINEMATICS AND ROBOT PROGRAMMING 9
Forward Kinematics, Inverse Kinematics and Difference; Forward Kinematics and

Reverse Kinematics of manipulators with Two, Three Degrees of Freedom (in 2
Dimension), Four Degrees of freedom (in 3 Dimension) Jacobians, Velocity and Forces-
Manipulator Dynamics, Trajectory Generator, Manipulator Mechanism Design-
Derivations and problems. Lead through Programming, Robot programming
Languages-VAL Programming-Motion Commands, Sensor Commands, End Effector
commands and simple Programs.
UNIT - V: IMPLEMENTATION AND ROBOT ECONOMICS 9
RGV, AGV; Implementation of Robots in Industries -Various Steps; Safety

Considerations for Robot Operations - Economic Analysis of Robots.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :

 Understand the functions of robots and review the need and application of
robots in different engineering fields.
 Exemplify the different types of robot drive systems as well as robot end
effectors.
 Apply the different sensors and image processing techniques in robotics to
improve the ability of robots.
 Develop robotic programs for different tasks and analyze the kinematics motions
of robot.
 Implement robots in various industrial sectors and interpolate the economic
analysis of robots.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Klafter R.D., Chmielewski T.A and Negin M., “Robotic Engineering - An

Integrated Approach”, Prentice Hall, 2003.
2. Groover M.P., “Industrial Robotics -Technology Programming and Applications”,
McGraw Hill, 2001.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Craig J.J., “Introduction to Robotics Mechanics and Control”, Pearson Education,

2008.
2. Deb S.R., “Robotics Technology and Flexible Automation” Tata McGraw Hill
Book Co.,1994.
3. Koren Y., “Robotics for Engineers", McGraw Hill Book Co., 1992.
4. Fu.K.S.,Gonzalz R.C. and Lee C.S.G., “Robotics Control, Sensing, Vision and
Intelligence”,McGraw Hill Book Co., 1987.
282
5. Janakiraman P.A., “Robotics and Image Processing”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1995.
6. Rajput R.K., “Robotics and Industrial Automation”, S.Chand and Company,
2008.
7. Surender Kumar, “Industrial Robots and Computer Integrated Manufacturing”,
Oxford and IBH Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd., 1991.

Program
Specific
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 1 2 2 2
CO 2 3 2 2 1 2 2
CO 3 3 3 2 2 1 2 2
CO 4 3 2 3 1 2 2
CO 5 3 3 3 1 1 2
283
1909719 TESTING OF MATERIALS LTPC
30 03
COURSE OBJECTIVE:
 Apply the concept of testing to various materials and result analysis.
 Apply various mechanical testing procedures to different materials.
 Apply different nondestructive testing procedures to different materials.
 Apply material characterization testing for analysis.
 Apply advanced testing techniques for thermal and chemical fields
UNIT -I : INTRODUCTION TOMATERIALSTESTING 9
Overview of materials, Classification of material testing, Purpose of testing, Selection

of material, Development of testing, Testing organizations and its committee, Testing
standards, Result Analysis, Advantages of testing.
UNIT - II : MECHANICALTESTING 9
Introduction to mechanical testing, Hardness test (Vickers, Brinell, Rockwell), Tensile

test, Impact test(Izod,Charpy)-
Principles,Techniques,Methods,AdvantagesandLimitations,Applications.Bend test,
Shear test, Creep and Fatigue test - Principles, Techniques, Methods, Advantages and
Limitations, Applications.
UNIT - III : NONDESTRUCTIVETESTING 9
Visual inspection, Liquid penetrant test, Magnetic particle test, Thermography test –
Principles, Techniques, Advantages and Limitations, Applications. Radiographic test,
Eddy current test, Ultrasonic test, Acoustic emission- Principles, Techniques, Methods,
Advantages and Limitations, Applications.
UNIT - IV : MATERIALCHARACTERIZATIONTESTING 9
Macroscopic and Microscopic observations, Optical and Electron microscopy (SEM

and TEM) - Principles, Types, Advantages and Limitations, Applications. Diffraction
techniques, SpectroscopicTechniques, Electrical and Magnetic Techniques- Principles,
Types, Advantages and Limitations, Applications.
UNIT - V : OTHERTESTING 9
Thermal Testing: Differential scanning calorimetry, Differential thermal analysis.

Thermo- mechanical and Dynamic mechanical analysis: Principles, Advantages,
Applications. Chemical Testing: X-Ray Fluorescence, Elemental Analysis by
Inductively Coupled Plasma-Optical Emission Spectroscopy and Plasma-Mass
Spectrometry.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
284
COURSE OUTCOMES :

 Apply the concept of testing to various materials and result analysis.
 Apply various mechanical testing procedures to different materials.
 Apply different nondestructive testing procedures to different materials.
 Apply material characterization testing for analysis.
 Apply advanced testing techniques for thermal and chemical fields.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Baldev Raj, T.Jayakumar, M.Thavasimuthu “Practical Non-Destructive Testing”,

Narosa Publishing House, 2009.
2. Cullity, B. D., “Elements of X-ray diffraction”, 3rd Edition, Addison-Wesley Company
Inc., New York,2000.
3. P. Field Foster, “The Mechanical Testing of Metals and Alloys” 7th Edition, Cousens
Press, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Metals Handbook: Mechanical testing, (Volume 8) ASM Handbook Committee, 9 th
Edition, American Society for Metals,1978.
2. ASM Metals Handbook, “Non-Destructive Evaluation and Quality Control”, American
Society of Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, USA.
3. Brandon D.G., “Modern Techniques in Metallography”, Von Nostrand Inc. NJ,
USA,1986.
Program
Specific
Course Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1
CO 2 3 2 1 1 1 1 1
CO 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 1
CO 4 3 2 1 1 1 1 1
CO 5 3 2 1 1 1 1 1
285
1909720 DESIGN OF ELECTRICAL VEHICLES LTPC
3003
OBJECTIVES:
 Understand about electric vehicle technology.

 Understand the load distribution and stability of vehicles.
 Analyze the handling characteristics of road vehicles.
 Analyze the steering, suspension and designing of breaks
 Understand hybrid vehicles, power electronics and fuel cell vehicles.
UNIT – I: INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRIC VEHICLES 9
Electric Vehicle – Need - Types – Cost and Emissions – End of life. Electric Vehicle
Technology – layouts, cables, components, Controls. Batteries – overview and its types.
Battery plug-in and life. Ultra-capacitor, Charging – Methods and Standards. Alternate
charging sources – Wireless & Solar.
UNIT - II: STABILITY OF VEHICLES 9
Load distribution for three wheeler and four wheeler-Stability of vehicle running on slope,
banked road and during turn-calculation of Tractive effort, maximum acceleration and
reaction forces for different drives.
UNIT - III: HANDLING CHARACTERISTICS OF ROAD VEHICLES 9
Steering geometry-Steady state handling characteristics- Steady state response to steering

input-Testing of handling characteristics-Transient response characteristics- Directional
stability.
UNIT - IV: STEERING, SUSPENSION AND BRAKE 9
Steering System - Ackerman Principle of Steering - Front End Geometry - Steering

Gearbox- Types-Recirculating Ball - Rack and Pinion - Power Steering. Suspension - Front
and Rear Forks - Springs for Suspension - Telescopic Suspension - Monoshock
Suspension - Hydraulic Shock Absorber - Dampers. Design Consideration – Brake - Drum
Brakes - Disc Brakes - ABS.
UNIT - V: POWER ELECTRONICS AND CONTROL FOR HYBRID AND 9

FUEL CELL VEHICLES
Series Hybrid Vehicle Propulsion System, Parallel Hybrid Vehicle Propulsion System, Fuel
Cell Vehicles, Power Electronics Requirements, Propulsion Motor Control Strategies, APU
Control System in Series Hybrid Vehicles, Fuel Cell for APU Applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
286
OUTCOMES:

 Understand about electric vehicle technology.
 Understand the load distribution and stability of vehicles.
 Analyze the handling characteristics of road vehicles.
 Analyze the steering, suspension and designing of breaks.
 Understand hybrid vehicles, power electronics and fuel cell vehicles.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Hybrid Electric Vehicle System Modeling and Control - Wei Liu, General Motors, USA,
John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2017.
2.Rajesh Rajamani, "Vehicle Dynamics and Control", 1st edition, Springer, 2005
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Thomas D. Gillespie, "Fundamentals of Vehicle Dynamics", Society of Automotive

Engineers Inc, 1992.
2. Dr.Kirpal Singh, ‘Automobile Engineering’- Vol. I and II, Standard Publishers, New Delhi,
2011.
3. V. Ganesan, ‘Internal Combustion Engines’, Tata McGraw Hill Book Co, Eighth Reprint,
2010.
4. Ali Emadi, “Handbook of Automotive Power Electronics and Drives”, Taylor & Francis
Group, First Edition, USA, 2005.
Program
Specific
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 - 2 1 1 - 1 - 1 - - 1 2
CO 2 2 - - 1 2 - - - 1 - - -
CO 3 1 - 1 - - 1 - - - - 1 -
CO 4 - 2 2 1 - - 2 - - - - -
CO 5 2 2 - 1 - - - - - - 2 -
287
1910703 CLINICAL TRIALS L T P C
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To highlight the epidemiologic methods, study design, protocol preparation.
 To learn about the crossover and factorial trial designs.
 To gain knowledge in the basic bio-statistical techniques involved in clinical
research.
 To describe the principles involved in ethical, legal and regulatory issues in clinical
trials.
 To gain knowledge on the reporting of trials.
UNIT – I: ROLE OF CLINICAL TRIALS IN NEW DRUG DEVELOPMENT 9
Drug Discovery, regulatory guidance and governance, pharmaceutical manufacturing,

nonclinical research, clinical trials, post-marketing surveillance, ethical conduct during
clinical trials.
UNIT – II: FUNDAMENTALS OF TRIAL DESIGN 9
Randomised clinical trials, uncontrolled trials. Protocol development, endpoints, patient

selection, source and control of bias, randomization, blinding, sample size and power.
UNIT – III: ALTERNATE TRIAL DESIGNS 9
Crossover design, factorial design, equivalence trials, bioequivalence trials, non-inferiority

trials, cluster randomized trials, multi-center trials.
UNIT – IV: BASICS OF STATISTICAL ANALYSIS 9
Types of data and normal distribution, significance tests and confidence intervals,
comparison of means, comparison of proportions, analysis of survival data, subgroup
analysis, regression analysis, missing data.
UNIT – V: REPORTING OF TRIALS 9
Overview of reporting, trial profile, presenting baseline data, use of tables, figures, critical
appraisal of report, meta-analysis.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
288
COURSE OUTCOMES:

 Explain key concepts in the design of clinical trials.
 Describe study designs used in data management for clinical trials.
 Identify key issues and determine alternate trial designs.
 Recognize the roles of regulatory affairs in clinical trials.
 Provide the overview of reporting trialsto the students.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Fundamentals of Clinical Trials, Lawrence M. Friedman, Springer Science &

Business Media, 2010
2. Textbook of Clinical Trials, David Machin, Simon Day, Sylvan Green, John Wiley &
Sons, 2007
3. Clinical Trials: A Practical Approach, Stuart J. Pocock, John Wiley & Sons, 17-Jul-
2013.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Clinical trials, A practical guide to design, analysis and reporting. Duolao Wang and
AmeetBakhai. Remedica. 2006.
2. Introduction to statistics in pharmaceutical clinical trials. T.A. Durham and J Rick
Turner. Pharmaceutical Press.
3. Clinical Trials: Study Design, Endpoints and Biomarkers, Drug Safety, and FDA and
ICH Guidelines, Tom Brody, Academic Press, 2016.
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 - - - - - - 2 - - - 2 - - - -
CO 2 3 2 2 - - - - 2 - - - 2 2 3 - -
CO 3 3 3 2 2 - - - 2 - - - 2 2 3 - -
CO 4 3 3 - - - - 2 3 - - - 2 2 2 - -
CO 5 3 - - - - - - 3 - - - 2 2 2 - -
289
1910704 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS IN L T P C
PHARAMACEUTICAL INDUSTRIES 3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To acquire the knowledge of pharmaceutical industry regulations.

 To learn about the packaging and labeling of drugs.
 To learn about the patent filling process.
 To gain knowledge about the quality guidelines in drug products.
 To gain knowledge on documentation.
UNIT–I: REGULATORY CONCEPTS 9
Quality assurance – Quality control – Practice of cGMP – Schedule M – USFDA.
UNIT – II: REGULATORY ASPECTS 9
Pharmaceuticals: Bulk drug manufacture; Personnel, Buildings and Facilities, Process

Equipment, Documentation and Records, Materials Management, Production and In-
Process Controls, Packaging and Identification Labelling of API‟s and Intermediates,
Storage and distribution, – Biotechnology derived products; Principles, Personnel,
Premises and equipments, Animal quarters and care, production, labelling, Lot processing
records and distribution records, quality assurance and quality control..
UNIT – III: INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS 9
Patent system – Different types of patents – Filing process of application for patent –
Infringement of patents – The patent rules 2003 as amended by the patents (amendment)
rules 2016.
UNIT – IV: ICH GUIDELINES 9
Quality guidelines – Impurities in new drug substances (Q3A(R2)) – Impurities in newdrug

products(Q3B(R2)) – Validation of analytical procedures text and methodology (Q2 (R1)).
UNIT – V: QUALITY AUDIT AND SELF INSPECTIONS 9
SOPs – Documentation – Loan license auditing – Common technical documentation (CTD)

– Drug master file (DMF).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
290
COURSE OUTCOMES:

 To be familiarise with the pharmaceutical industry manufacturing practices and
regulatory aspects of pharmacy products.
 To know the process of patenting activities.
 To acquire knowledge on filling process.
 To know the quality guidelines followed for pharmaceutical products.
 To understand the aspects involved in document preparation for pharmaceutical
product registration.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. C.V.SSubbrahmanyam&J.Thimmasetty, Pharmaceutical regulatory affairs,

1stEdn.,vallabhPrakashan, New Delhi, 2012.
2. Willig, H., Tuckeman, M.M. and Hitchings, W.S., “Good Manufacturing Practices for
Pharmaceuticals”, 5th Edition, Marcel Dekker Drugs and the Pharmaceutical
Sciences, by CRC Press, New York, 2000.
3. N Udupa, Krishnamurthy Bhat, A Concise Textbook of Drug Regulatory Affairs,
Manipal University Press (MUP); First Edition, 2015.
REFERENCEBOOKS:
1. Ira R. Berry,The Pharmaceutical Regulatory Process, marcel dekker Series: Drugs

and the Pharmaceutical Sciences, by CRC Press, Newyork, 2004.
2. Mindy J. Allport-Settle, Current Good Manufacturing Practices: Pharmaceutical,
Biologics, and Medical Device Regulations and Guidance Documents Concise
Reference, Pharmalogika Inc., USA, 2009.
3. Sharma, P.P., “How to Practice GMPs”, 3rd Edition, Vandana Publications, 2006.
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 2 - - - - - 3 3 - - - 3 2 - - -
CO 2 2 3 - - - 2 3 3 - - - 2 2 - - -
CO 3 2 2 3 2 - 2 3 3 - - - 2 2 - - -
CO 4 2 - - - - 2 3 3 - - - 2 2 - - -
CO 5 2 - - - - 2 3 3 - - - 2 2 - - -
291
1910705 MICROBIOLOGY L T PC
3 0 0 3
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To introduce students to the principles of Microbiology.
 To emphasize the structure and biochemical aspects of various microbes.
 To learn about the Nutritional classification of microorganisms.
 To gain knowledge on the Physical and chemical control of microorganisms.
 To learn about the preservation of food.
UNIT – I: INTRODUCTION TO MICROBIOLOGY 9
classification and nomenclature of microorganisms, microscopic examination of

microorganisms: light, fluorescent, dark field, phase contrast, and electron microscopy.
UNIT – II: MICROBES- STRUCTURE AND REPRODUCTION 9

Structural organization and multiplication of bacteria, viruses (TMV, Hepatitis B), algae
(cyanophyta, rhodophyta) and fungi (Neurospora), life history of actinomycetes
(Streptomyces), yeast (Sacharomyces), mycoplasma (M. pneumoniae) and bacteriophages
( T4 phage, ʎ phage)
UNIT – III: MICROBIAL NUTRITION, GROWTH AND METABOLISM 9

Nutritional classification of microorganisms based on carbon, energy and electron sources
Definition of growth, balanced and unbalanced growth, growth curve and different methods
to quantify bacterial growth:(counting chamber, viable count method, counting without
equipment, different media used for bacterial culture (defined, complex, selective,
differential, enriched) themathematics of growth-generation time, specific growth rate.
UNIT – IV: CONTROL OF MICROORGANISMS 9

Physical and chemical control of microorganisms Definition of sterilization, dry and moist
heat, pasteurization, tyndalization; radiation, ultrasonication, filtration.Disinfection
sanitization, antiseptics sterilants and fumigation.mode of action and resistance to
antibiotics; clinically important microorganisms
UNIT – V: INDUSTRIAL MICROBIOLOGY 9

Microbes involved in preservation (Lactobacillus,bacteriocins), spoilage of food and food
borne pathogens (E.coli, S.aureus, Bacillus, Clostridium). Industrial use of microbes
(production of penicillin, alcohol, vitamin B-12); biogas; bioremediation(oil spillage leaching
of ores by microorganisms ,pollution control); biofertilizers, biopesticides. Biosensors.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
292
COURSE OUTCOMES:
 To provide to the students the fundamentals of Microbiology.

 To Describe the scope of microbiology
 To solve the problems in microbial infection and their control.
 To understand the concept of food preservation.
 To be familiarize with the industrial use of microbes.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Pelczar, M.J. “Microbiology”, 5th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1993.

2. Prescot. Harley, Klein. “ Microbiology “: McGraw-Hill Higher Education, 2008.
3. Ananthanarayanan, R. and C.K. JayaramPaniker, “Textbook of Microbiology”,4th
Edition, Orient Longman, 1990.
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 - - - - - - - - - - 2 2 - - -
CO 2 3 2 - - - - - - - - - 2 2 - - -
CO 3 3 2 2 2 - 2 1 2 - - - 2 2 2 2 -
CO 4 3 - - 2 - 1 2 2 - - - 2 2 2 - -
CO 5 3 - - - - 3 2 - - - - 2 2 - - -
293
1920701 ANALYTICAL METHODS AND INSTRUMENTATION LTPC ANALY
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 Make the students understand the basics of spectrometry

 To explore the knowledge on molecular spectroscopy.
 To introduce the NMR and MASS spectrometry.
 To elucidate the various separation methods in chromatography.
 To gain knowledge on potentiometry and surface microscope.
SPECTRO
UNIT- I: SPECTROMETRY 9
Properties of electromagnetic radiation- wave properties – components of optical
instruments– Sources of radiation – wavelength selectors – sample containers – radiation
transducers – Signal process and read outs – signal to noise ratio - sources of noise –
Enhancement of signal to noise - types of optical instruments – Applications.
UNIT -II: MOLECULAR SPECTROSCOPY 9
Molecular absorption spectrometry – Measurement of Transmittance and Absorbance –

Beer’s law – Instrumentation - Applications -Theory of fluorescence and Phosphorescence
–Theory of Infrared absorption spectrometry – IR instrumentation – Applications – Theory
of Raman spectroscopy – Instrumentation – applications.
UNIT- III: NMR AND MASS SPECTROMETRY 9
Theory of NMR – chemical shift- NMR-spectrometers – applications of 1H and 13C NMR-

Molecular mass spectra – ion sources.Massspectrometer.Applications of molecular mass -
Electron paramagnetic resonance- g values – instrumentation.
UNIT- IV: SEPARATION METHODS 9
General description of chromatography – Band broadening and optimization of column

performance-Liquid chromatography – Partition chromatography – Adsorption
chromatography – Ion exchange chromatography -size exclusion chromatography- Affinity
chromatography- principles of GC and applications – HPLC- Capillary electrophoresis –
Applications.
UNIT-V: ELECTRO ANALYSIS AND SURFACE MICROSCOPY 9
Electrochemical cells- Electrode potential cell potentials – potentiometry- reference

electrode – ionselective and molecular selective electrodes – Instrument for potentiometric
studies – Voltametry – Cyclic and pulse voltametry- Applications of voltametry . Study of
surfaces – Scanning probemicroscopes – AFM and STM.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
294
COURSE OUTCOMES:

 Ability to understand the concept of spectrometry
 Ability to know the operations of various instruments.
 Able to apply molecular spectroscopy concepts in NMR and MASS spectrometry.
 Ability to understand surface microscopy and its applications.
 Ability to acquire knowledge on surface microscopic techniques and voltametric
applications.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Skoog, D.A. F. James Holler, and Stanky, R.Crouch “Instrumental Methods of

Analysis”.CengageLearning , 2007.
2. Willard, Hobart, etal., “Instrumental Methods of Analysis”. VIIth Edition, CBS, 1986.
3. Braun, Robert D. “Introduction to Instrumental Analysis”. Pharma Book Syndicate,
1987.
4. Ewing,G.W. “Instrumental Methods of Chemical Analysis”, Vth Edition, McGraw-Hill,
1985
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Sharma, B.K. “Instrumental Methods of Chemical Analysis : Analytical Chemistry”

Goel Publishing House, 1972.
2. Haven, Mary C., etal., “Laboratory Instrumentation “. IVth Edition, John Wiley, 1995.
Program
Specific
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 - 3 2 2 - - 3 - 3 2 1 - - 1 -
CO 2 2 2 3 2 2 - - 2 2 3 2 1 - - 1 -
CO 3 2 2 3 3 3 - 2 2 2 3 3 1 - - 1 -
CO 4 3 2 3 3 3 - - 3 2 3 3 1 - 1 -
CO 5 3 - 3 2 2 - - 3 - 3 2 1 - - 1
295
1920702 MEDICAL PHYSICS LTPC
3 003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To study the complete non-ionizing radiations including light and its effect in human
body.
 To understand the principles of ultrasound radiation and its applications in medicine.
 To learn about radioactive nuclides.
 To know the interactions of radiation with matters and how isotopes are
produced.
 To study the harmful effects of radiation and radiation protection regulations.
UNIT - I : NON-IONIZING RADIATION AND ITSMEDICALAPPLICATION 9

Introduction to EM waves - Tissue as a leaky dielectric - Relaxation processes:
Debye model, Cole–Cole model- Overview of non-ionizing radiation effects-Low
Frequency Effects- Higher frequency effects. Physics of light-Measurement of
light and its unit- limits of vision and color vision an overview - Applications of
ultraviolet in medicine, Thermography.
UNIT - II : ULTRASOUND IN MEDICINE 9

Ultrasound fundamentals – Generation of ultrasound (Ultrasound Transducer) -
Interaction of Ultrasound with matter: Cavitation, Reflection, Transmission-
Scanning systems – Artefacts- Ultrasound- Doppler-Double Doppler shift-Clinical
Applications- Ultrasonography.
UNIT - III : PRINCIPLES OF RADIOACTIVE NUCLIDESANDDECAY 9

Introduction to Radioisotopes - Radioactive decay : Spontaneous Fission,
Isomeric Transition, Alpha Decay, Beta Decay, Positron Decay, Electron Capture-
Radioactive decay equations – Half life- Mean Life- Effective half-life - Natural and
Artificial radioactivity, - Production of radionuclide – Cyclotron produced
Radionuclide - Reactor produced Radionuclide: fission and electron Capture
reaction, Target and Its Processing Equation for Production of Radionuclide -
Radionuclide Generator-Technetium generator.
296
UNIT - IV : INTERACTION OF RADIATIONWITH MATTER 9
Interaction of charged particles with matter –Specific ionization, Linear energy
transfer, range, Bremsstrahlung, Annihilation - Interaction of X and Gamma
radiation with matter: Photoelectric effect, Compton Scattering, Pair production-
Attenuation of Gamma Radiation - Interaction of neutron with matter and their
clinical significance- Radionuclide used in Medicine and Technology.
UNIT - V : RADIATION EFFECTSAND REGULATIONS 9

Classification of Radiation Damage, Stochastic and Deterministic Effects, Acute
Effects of Total Body Irradiation, Long-Term Effects of Radiation, Risk Versus
Benefit in Diagnostic Radiology and Nuclear Medicine, Risk of Pregnant Women,
Nuclear Regulatory Commission, ALARA Program, Medical Uses of Radioactive
Materials, Survey for Contamination and Exposure Rate, Dose Calibrators and
Survey Meters, Bioassay, Radioactive Waste Disposal.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Analyze the low frequency and high frequency effects of non-ionizing radiation
and physics of light.
 Define various clinical applications based on ultrasound wave.
 Explain the process of radioactive nuclide production using different techniques
 Analyze radiation mechanics involved with various physiological systems
 Outline the detrimental effects of radiation and regulations for radiation safety.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. B H Brown, R H Smallwood, D C Barber, P V Lawford and D R Hose, Medical

Physics and Biomedical Engineering, 2nd Edition, IOP Publishers.2001.
2. Gopal B. Saha, Physics and Radiobiology of Nuclear Medicine, 4 th Edition,
Springer, 2013.
3. R.Hendee and Russell Ritenour “Medical Imaging Physics”, Fourth Edition
William, Wiley-Liss, 2002.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. S.Webb “ The Physics of Medical Imaging”, Taylor and Francis,1988
2. HyltonB.Meire and Pat Farrant “Basic Ultrasound” John Wiley & Sons,1995
3. John R Cameran , James G Skofronick “Medical Physics” John-Wiley & Sons.1978.
297
Program Specific
Outcomes
Course Programme Outcomes (PO) (PSO)
Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 3 1 1 - - 2 1 - - - - 3 - - 1 -
CO 2 3 1 2 2 1 - 1 - - - - 3 - - 1 -
CO 3 3 1 2 - - 2 2 - - - - 2 - - 1 -
CO 4 2 1 1 - 1 1 1 - - - - 1 - 1 -
CO 5 3 2 3 - 2 1 3 - - - - 3 - - 1
298
1920703 ELECTRONIC MATERIALS LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To Understand the various materials and its properties towards electrical and
electronics field.
 To cover the properties of conducting materials.
 Make the students to understand various semiconducting and magnetic materials
and their properties.
 To give an idea on dielectric and insulating materials.
 To explore the knowledge on optoelectronic and nano materials.
Structure: atomic structures and bonding, types of bonding, band formation. Defects and
imperfections in solids: Point, Line and Planar defects; Interfacial defects and volume
defects. Classification of materials based on bonding: conductors, semiconductors and
insulators.
UNIT - II : CONDUCTING MATERIALS 9
Introduction, factors affecting the conductivity of materials, classification based on

conductivity of materials, temperature dependence of resistivity, Low resistivity materials
(graphite, Al, Cu and steel) and its applications, high resistivity materials (manganin,
constantan, nichrome, tungsten) and their applications. Superconductors: Meissner effect,
classification and applications.
UNIT - III : SEMICONDUCTING AND MAGNETIC MATERIALS 10
Semiconductors: Introduction, types of semiconductors, temperature dependence of

semiconductors, compound semiconductors, basic ideas of amorphous and organic
semiconductors. Magnetic Materials: classification of magnetic materials, ferromagnetism-
B-H curve (Qualitative), hard and soft magnetic materials, magneto materials applications.
UNIT - IV : DIELECTRIC AND INSULATING MATERIALS 9
Dielectric Materials: Introduction, classification, temperature dependence on polarization,

properties, dielectric loss, factors influencing dielectric strength and capacitor materials,
applications. Insulators: Introduction, thermal and mechanical properties required for
insulators, Inorganic materials, organic materials, liquid insulators, gaseous insulators and
ageing of insulators, applications.
299
UNIT - V : OPTOELECTRONIC ANDNANO ELECTRONIC MATERIALS 10
Optoelectronic materials. Introduction, properties, factor affecting optical properties, role of

optoelectronic materials in LEDs, LASERs, photo detectors, solar cells. Nano electronic
Materials: Introduction, advantage of nanoelectronic devices, materials, fabrication,
challenges in Nano electronic materials.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :

 Ability to understand the fundamentals of conducting materials
 Able to define various applications of semiconducting and magnetic materials
 Able to explain the concepts of dielectrics and insulating materials
 Ability to explain various optoelectronic devices and nano electronic materials
 With the basis, students will be able to have clear concepts on electronic behaviors
of materials.
TEXT BOOKS
1. S.O. Kasap “Principles of Electronic Materials and Devices”, 3rd edition, McGraw-
Hill Education (India) Pvt. Ltd., 2007.
2. W D Callister, “Materials Science & Engineering – An Introduction”, Jr., John Willey
&Sons,Inc, New York, 7th edition, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. B.G. Streetman and S. Banerjee, Solid State Electronic Devices, 6th edition, PHI
Learning, 2009.
2. Eugene A. Irene, Electronic Materials Science, Wiley, 2005
3. Wei Gao, Zhengwei Li, Nigel Sammes, An Introduction to Electronic Materials for
Engineers, 2nd Edition, World Scientific Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd., 2011.
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 -
CO 2 2 2 2 1 2 - - - - - - - - - 1 -
CO 3 3 3 3 - 3 2 - - - - - - - - 1 -
CO 4 2 3 3 1 3 3 - - - - - - - - 1 -
CO 5 2 3 2 1 3 3 - - - - - - - - 1 -
300
1921701 WASTE WATER TREATMENT LTPC
3003
COURSE OBJECTIVES :
 To make the student conversant with the water treatment methods including
adsorption and oxidation process.
 To provide basic under standings about the requirements of water and its
preliminary treatment.
 To study the dynamic processes and understand the features of corrosion and its
effects
 To develop and understand the waste water treatment process
 To provide a broad view about the water quality and its standards
UNIT - I : WATER QUALITY AND PRELIMINARY TREATMENT 9
Water Quality-physical-chemical and biological parameters of water-Water quality

requirement - potable water standards-Wastewater effluent standards-water quality
indices. Water purification systems in natural systems- physical processes-chemical
processes and biological processes-Primary, secondary and tertiary treatment-Unit
operations-unit processes. Mixing, clarification-sedimentation; Types-aeration and gas
transfer-coagulation and flocculation, coagulation processes.
UNIT - II : INDUSTRIAL WATER TREATMENT 9

Filtration-size and shape characteristics of filtering media-sand filters hydraulics of
filtration-design considerations-radial, upflow, highrate and multimedia filters, pressure
filter. Water softening-lime soda, zeolite and demineralization processes – Boiler troubles-
scale, sludge, priming, foaming, caustic embrittlement and boiler corrosion.
UNIT - III : CONVENTIONAL TREATMENT METHODS 9

Taste and odour control-Adsorption-activated carbon treatment-removal of color-iron and
manganese removal-aeration, oxidation, ion exchange and other methods-effects of
fluorides-fluoridation and defluoridation-desalination-Corrosion prevention and control-
factors influencing corrosion-Langelier index-Corrosion control measures.
UNIT - IV : WASTEWATER TREATMENT 9

Wastewater treatment-pre and primary treatment-equalization neutralization-screening
and grid removal-sedimentation-oil separation gas stripping of volatile organics-biological
oxidation-lagoons and stabilization basins-aerated lagoons-activated sludge process-
trickling filtration-anaerobic decomposition-Break point chlorination.
301
UNIT - V : ADSORPTION AND OXIDATION PROCESSES 9
Chemical process-Adsorption-theory of adsorption-Ion exchange process-chemical
oxidation- advanced oxidation process-sludge handling and disposal-Miscellaneous
treatment processes.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
COURSE OUTCOMES :
 Gain idea about various methods available for water treatment.
 Appreciate the necessity of water and acquire knowledge of preliminary treatment.
 Interpret the nature of corrosion and its harmful effects.
 Value the various waste water treatment methods.
 Understand about adsorption and oxidation process.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Metcalf and Eddy, “Wastewater Engineering”, 4th ed., McGraw Hill Higher Edu.,
2002.
2. G.L.Karia and R.A. Christian, Waste Water Treatment, Concepts and Design
Approach, Prentice Hall, 2013.
3. Joanne E. Drinon and Frank Spellman, Water and Waste Water Treatment, CRC
Press, 2012.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. S.P. Mahajan, “Pollution control in process industries”, 27th Ed. Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company Ltd., 2012.
2. M. Lancaster, “Green Chemistry: An Introductory Text”, 2 nd edition, RSC
publishing, 2010.
3. C.S. Rao, “Environmental Pollution Control Engineering”, New Age International,
2007.
4. M.J. Hammer and M.J. Hammer (Jr.), Water and Waste Water Technology,
Pearson, 2011.
302
Program
Specific
Outcomes
Outcomes (PSO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
CO 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
CO 2 1 2 1 1 1 2
CO 3 3 1 3 1 1 3 1
CO 4 2 1 1 2
CO 5 3 2 1 1 3 2
303

DOC-20231030-WA0006.

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DOC-20231030-WA0006.

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DOC-20231030-WA0006.

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SRM VALLIAMMAI ENGINEERING COLLEGE

(An Autonomous Institution)

CURRICULA AND SYLLABI

Programme: B.E., Computer Science and Engineering

(An Autonomous Institution, Affiliated to Anna University, Chennai)

PEO2: To impart the necessary background in Computer Science and Engineering by

PEO4: To groom the students to be multifaceted entrepreneurs with professional ethical

2. PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs):

4. PEOs / POs and PSOs Mapping:

Grid and Cloud Computing 2 3 3 2 3 - - - - - - - 2 3 3 -

Artificial Intelligence Laboratory 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 - - - - 2 2 2 -

Project Work - Phase - I 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

IV VIII Professional Elective VI

Project Work - Phase II 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Contribution 1: Reasonable 2: Significant 3: Strong

2. 1918102 Engineering Mathematics-I BS 4 3 1 0 4

SL. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C

6 1904304 Operating Systems PC 3 3 0 0 3

SL. COURSE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY CONTACT L T P C

SL. COURSE CONTACT

1. Cryptography and Network PC 3 3 0 0 3

SL. COURSE CONTACT

1. 19xxxxx Professional Elective – IV PE 3 3 0 0 3

SL. COURSE CONTACT

SL. COURSE CONTACT

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – III

SL. COURSE CONTACT

SL. COURSE CONTACT

SL. COURSE CONTACT

Sl. COURSE COURSE CONTACT

9. 1906505 Photonic Networks ECE 3 3 0 0 3

14. 1908002 Scripting Languages IT 3 3 0 0 3

17. 1909512 Industrial Safety Engineering MECH 3 3 0 0 3

20. 1920502 Microscopy PHYSICS 3 3 0 0 3

Sl.No COURSE COURSE CONTACT

1. 1903706 Green Building Design CIVIL 3 3 0 0 3

4. 1905712 Renewable Energy systems EEE 3 3 0 0 3

7. 1906706 Visual Communication ECE 3 3 0 0 3

8. 1906707 MEMS and NEMS ECE 3 3 0 0 3

9. 1907001 Transducers Engineering EIE 3 3 0 0 3

13. 1908004 C # and . Net IT 3 3 0 0 3

14. 1908005 Virtual Reality IT 3 3 0 0 3

15. 1909718 Robotics MECH 3 3 0 0 3

16. 1909719 Testing of Materials MECH 3 3 0 0 3

17. 1909720 Design of Electrical Vehicles MECH 3 3 0 0 3

23. 1920703 Electronic materials PHYSICS 3 3 0 0 3

24. 1921701 Waste Water Treatment CHEMISTRY 3 3 0 0 3

SUBJECT CREDITS AS PER SEMESTER CREDITS Percentage

1919101 COMMUNICATIVE ENGLISH LTPC

UNIT- I: SHARING INFORMATION RELATED TO ONESELF/FAMILY& 9

UNIT-II: GENERAL READING AND FREE 9

UNIT- III: GRAMMAR AND LANGUAGE DEVELOPMENT 9

UNIT- IV: READING AND LANGUAGE DEVELOPMENT 9

2. Richards, C. Jack. Interchange Students’ Book-2 New Delhi: CUP, 2015.

UNIT – II : DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS FOR FUNCTIONS OF ONE VARIABLE 9L+3T

UNIT – III : FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 9L+3T

UNIT – IV : INTEGRAL CALCULUS FOR FUNCTION OF ONE VARIABLE 9L+3T

Definite and Indefinite integrals - Substitution rule - Techniques of Integration - Integration by

UNIT – V : MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 9L+3T

TOTAL: 45L+15T PERIODS